HD64F36012FPV [RENESAS]
16-BIT, FLASH, 20MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP64, 10 X 10 MM, 0.65 MM PITCH, LQFP-64;
| 型号： | HD64F36012FPV |
| 厂家： | 
RENESAS TECHNOLOGY CORP |
| 描述： | 16-BIT, FLASH, 20MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP64, 10 X 10 MM, 0.65 MM PITCH, LQFP-64 时钟 ISM频段 外围集成电路 |
| 文件： | 总384页 (文件大小：2498K) |
| 中文： | 中文翻译 | 下载： | 下载PDF数据表文档文件 |
REJ09B0025-0400
The revision list can be viewed directly by
clicking the title page.
The revision list summarizes the locations of
revisions and additions. Details should always
be checked by referring to the relevant text.
H8/36024Group, H8/36014Group
Hardware Manual
16
Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer
H8 Family/H8/300H Tiny Series
H8/36024F HD64F36024, HD64F36024G,
H8/36022F HD64F36022, HD64F36022G,
H8/36014F HD64F36014, HD64F36014G,
H8/36012F HD64F36012, HD64F36012G,
H8/36024
H8/36023
H8/36022
H8/36014
H8/36013
H8/36012
H8/36011
H8/36010
HD64336024, HD64336024G,
HD64336023, HD64336023G,
HD64336022, HD64336022G,
HD64336014, HD64336014G,
HD64336013, HD64336013G,
HD64336012, HD64336012G,
HD64336011, HD64336011G,
HD64336010, HD64336010G
Rev.4.00
Revision Date: Sep. 23, 2005
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page ii of xxvi
Keep safety first in your circuit designs!
1. Renesas Technology Corp. puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better and
more reliable, but there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them. Trouble with
semiconductors may lead to personal injury, fire or property damage.
Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs, with appropriate
measures such as (i) placement of substitutive, auxiliary circuits, (ii) use of nonflammable material or
(iii) prevention against any malfunction or mishap.
Notes regarding these materials
1. These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the Renesas
Technology Corp. product best suited to the customer's application; they do not convey any license
under any intellectual property rights, or any other rights, belonging to Renesas Technology Corp. or
a third party.
2. Renesas Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, or infringement of any third-
party's rights, originating in the use of any product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, or
circuit application examples contained in these materials.
3. All information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams, charts, programs and
algorithms represents information on products at the time of publication of these materials, and are
subject to change by Renesas Technology Corp. without notice due to product improvements or
other reasons. It is therefore recommended that customers contact Renesas Technology Corp. or
an authorized Renesas Technology Corp. product distributor for the latest product information
before purchasing a product listed herein.
The information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Renesas Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability, or other loss rising
from these inaccuracies or errors.
Please also pay attention to information published by Renesas Technology Corp. by various means,
including the Renesas Technology Corp. Semiconductor home page (http://www.renesas.com).
4. When using any or all of the information contained in these materials, including product data,
diagrams, charts, programs, and algorithms, please be sure to evaluate all information as a total
system before making a final decision on the applicability of the information and products. Renesas
Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability or other loss resulting from the
information contained herein.
5. Renesas Technology Corp. semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for use in a device or
system that is used under circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake. Please contact
Renesas Technology Corp. or an authorized Renesas Technology Corp. product distributor when
considering the use of a product contained herein for any specific purposes, such as apparatus or
systems for transportation, vehicular, medical, aerospace, nuclear, or undersea repeater use.
6. The prior written approval of Renesas Technology Corp. is necessary to reprint or reproduce in
whole or in part these materials.
7. If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control restrictions, they must
be exported under a license from the Japanese government and cannot be imported into a country
other than the approved destination.
Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of Japan and/or the
country of destination is prohibited.
8. Please contact Renesas Technology Corp. for further details on these materials or the products
contained therein.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page iii of xxvi
General Precautions on Handling of Product
1. Treatment of NC Pins
Note: Do not connect anything to the NC pins.
The NC (not connected) pins are either not connected to any of the internal circuitry or are
used as test pins or to reduce noise. If something is connected to the NC pins, the
operation of the LSI is not guaranteed.
2. Treatment of Unused Input Pins
Note: Fix all unused input pins to high or low level.
Generally, the input pins of CMOS products are high-impedance input pins. If unused pins
are in their open states, intermediate levels are induced by noise in the vicinity, a pass-
through current flows internally, and a malfunction may occur.
3. Processing before Initialization
Note: When power is first supplied, the product’s state is undefined.
The states of internal circuits are undefined until full power is supplied throughout the
chip and a low level is input on the reset pin. During the period where the states are
undefined, the register settings and the output state of each pin are also undefined. Design
your system so that it does not malfunction because of processing while it is in this
undefined state. For those products which have a reset function, reset the LSI immediately
after the power supply has been turned on.
4. Prohibition of Access to Undefined or Reserved Addresses
Note: Access to undefined or reserved addresses is prohibited.
The undefined or reserved addresses may be used to expand functions, or test registers
may have been be allocated to these addresses. Do not access these registers; the system’s
operation is not guaranteed if they are accessed.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page iv of xxvi
Configuration of This Manual
This manual comprises the following items:
1. General Precautions on Handling of Product
2. Configuration of This Manual
3. Preface
4. Contents
5. Overview
6. Description of Functional Modules
•
•
CPU and System-Control Modules
On-Chip Peripheral Modules
The configuration of the functional description of each module differs according to the
module. However, the generic style includes the following items:
i) Feature
ii) Input/Output Pin
iii) Register Description
iv) Operation
v) Usage Note
When designing an application system that includes this LSI, take notes into account. Each section
includes notes in relation to the descriptions given, and usage notes are given, as required, as the
final part of each section.
7. List of Registers
8. Electrical Characteristics
9. Appendix
10. Main Revisions and Additions in this Edition (only for revised versions)
The list of revisions is a summary of points that have been revised or added to earlier versions.
This does not include all of the revised contents. For details, see the actual locations in this
manual.
11. Index
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page v of xxvi
Preface
The H8/36024 Group and H8/36014 Group are single-chip microcomputers made up of the high-
speed H8/300H CPU employing Renesas Technology original architecture as their cores, and the
peripheral functions required to configure a system. The H8/300H CPU has an instruction set that
is compatible with the H8/300 CPU.
Target Users: This manual was written for users who will be using the H8/36024 Group and
H8/36014 Group in the design of application systems. Target users are expected to
understand the fundamentals of electrical circuits, logical circuits, and
microcomputers.
Objective:
This manual was written to explain the hardware functions and electrical
characteristics of the H8/36024 Group and H8/36014 Group to the target users.
Refer to the H8/300H Series Software Manual for a detailed description of the
instruction set.
Notes on reading this manual:
•
In order to understand the overall functions of the chip
Read the manual according to the contents. This manual can be roughly categorized into parts
on the CPU, system control functions, peripheral functions and electrical characteristics.
•
•
In order to understand the details of the CPU's functions
Read the H8/300H Series Software Manual.
In order to understand the details of a register when its name is known
Read the index that is the final part of the manual to find the page number of the entry on the
register. The addresses, bits, and initial values of the registers are summarized in section 17,
List of Registers.
Example:
Bit order:
The MSB is on the left and the LSB is on the right.
Notes:
When using the on-chip emulator (E7, E8) for H8/36014 program development and debugging,
the following restrictions must be noted.
1. The NMI pin is reserved for the E7 or E8, and cannot be used.
2. Area H’7000 to H’7FFF is used by the E7 or E8, and is not available to the user.
3. Area H’F780 to H’FB7F must on no account be accessed.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page vi of xxvi
4. When the E7 or E8 is used, address breaks can be set as either available to the user or for use
by the E7 or E8. If address breaks are set as being used by the E7 or E8, the address break
control registers must not be accessed.
5. When the E7 or E8 is used, NMI is an input/output pin (open-drain in output mode).
6. Use channel 1 of the SCI3 (P21/RXD, P22/TXD) in on-board programming mode by boot
mode.
Related Manuals: The latest versions of all related manuals are available from our web site.
Please ensure you have the latest versions of all documents you require.
http://www.renesas.com/
H8/36024 Group and H8/36014 Group manuals:
Document Title
Document No.
This manual
H8/36024 Group, H8/36014 Group Hardware Manual
H8/300H Series Software Manual
REJ09B0213
User's manuals for development tools:
Document Title
Document No.
H8S, H8/300 Series C/C++ Compiler, Assembler, Optimizing Linkage Editor
User's Manual
REJ10B0058
Microcomputer Development Environment System H8S, H8/300 Series
Simulator/Debugger User's Manual
ADE-702-282
H8S, H8/300 Series High-Performance Embedded Workshop 3, Tutorial
REJ10B0024
REJ10B0026
H8S, H8/300 Series High-Performance Embedded Workshop 3, User's
Manual
Application notes:
Document Title
Document No.
REJ05B0464
ADE-502-055
H8S, H8/300 Series C/C++ Compiler Package Application Note
Single Power Supply F-ZTATTM On-Board Programming
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page vii of xxvi
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page viii of xxvi
Contents
Section 1 Overview................................................................................................1
1.1 Features.................................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Internal Block Diagram.......................................................................................................... 3
1.3 Pin Arrangement.................................................................................................................... 4
1.4 Pin Functions ......................................................................................................................... 6
Section 2 CPU........................................................................................................9
2.1 Address Space and Memory Map ........................................................................................ 10
2.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................................... 12
2.2.1 General Registers.................................................................................................... 13
2.2.2 Program Counter (PC) ............................................................................................ 14
2.2.3 Condition-Code Register (CCR)............................................................................. 14
2.3 Data Formats........................................................................................................................ 16
2.3.1 General Register Data Formats............................................................................... 16
2.3.2 Memory Data Formats............................................................................................ 18
2.4 Instruction Set...................................................................................................................... 19
2.4.1 Table of Instructions Classified by Function .......................................................... 19
2.4.2 Basic Instruction Formats ....................................................................................... 28
2.5 Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation........................................................ 30
2.5.1 Addressing Modes .................................................................................................. 30
2.5.2 Effective Address Calculation ................................................................................ 33
2.6 Basic Bus Cycle................................................................................................................... 35
2.6.1 Access to On-Chip Memory (RAM, ROM)............................................................ 35
2.6.2 On-Chip Peripheral Modules .................................................................................. 36
2.7 CPU States........................................................................................................................... 37
2.8 Usage Notes......................................................................................................................... 38
2.8.1 Notes on Data Access to Empty Areas ................................................................... 38
2.8.2 EEPMOV Instruction.............................................................................................. 38
2.8.3 Bit Manipulation Instruction................................................................................... 38
Section 3 Exception Handling .............................................................................45
3.1 Exception Sources and Vector Address ............................................................................... 45
3.2 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................... 47
3.2.1 Interrupt Edge Select Register 1 (IEGR1) .............................................................. 47
3.2.2 Interrupt Edge Select Register 2 (IEGR2) .............................................................. 48
3.2.3 Interrupt Enable Register 1 (IENR1) ...................................................................... 49
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page ix of xxvi
3.2.4 Interrupt Flag Register 1 (IRR1)............................................................................. 50
3.2.5 Wakeup Interrupt Flag Register (IWPR) ................................................................ 51
3.3 Reset Exception Handling.................................................................................................... 52
3.4 Interrupt Exception Handling .............................................................................................. 53
3.4.1 External Interrupts .................................................................................................. 53
3.4.2 Internal Interrupts ................................................................................................... 54
3.4.3 Interrupt Handling Sequence .................................................................................. 55
3.4.4 Interrupt Response Time......................................................................................... 56
3.5 Usage Notes......................................................................................................................... 58
3.5.1 Interrupts after Reset............................................................................................... 58
3.5.2 Notes on Stack Area Use ........................................................................................ 58
3.5.3 Notes on Rewriting Port Mode Registers ............................................................... 58
Section 4 Address Break .....................................................................................59
4.1 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................... 59
4.1.1 Address Break Control Register (ABRKCR) ......................................................... 60
4.1.2 Address Break Status Register (ABRKSR) ............................................................ 61
4.1.3 Break Address Registers (BARH, BARL).............................................................. 62
4.1.4 Break Data Registers (BDRH, BDRL) ................................................................... 62
4.2 Operation ............................................................................................................................. 62
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generators .......................................................................65
5.1 System Clock Generator ...................................................................................................... 65
5.1.1 Connecting Crystal Resonator ................................................................................ 66
5.1.2 Connecting Ceramic Resonator .............................................................................. 66
5.1.3 External Clock Input Method ................................................................................. 67
5.2 Prescalers............................................................................................................................. 67
5.2.1 Prescaler S .............................................................................................................. 67
5.3 Usage Notes......................................................................................................................... 67
5.3.1 Note on Resonators................................................................................................. 67
5.3.2 Notes on Board Design........................................................................................... 68
Section 6 Power-Down Modes............................................................................69
6.1 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................... 69
6.1.1 System Control Register 1 (SYSCR1).................................................................... 70
6.1.2 System Control Register 2 (SYSCR2).................................................................... 71
6.1.3 Module Standby Control Register 1 (MSTCR1) .................................................... 72
6.1.4 Module Standby Control Register 2 (MSTCR2) .................................................... 72
6.2 Mode Transitions and States of LSI..................................................................................... 73
6.2.1 Sleep Mode............................................................................................................. 75
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page x of xxvi
6.2.2 Standby Mode......................................................................................................... 75
6.2.3 Subsleep Mode........................................................................................................ 75
6.3 Operating Frequency in Active Mode.................................................................................. 76
6.4 Direct Transition.................................................................................................................. 76
6.5 Module Standby Function.................................................................................................... 76
Section 7 ROM ....................................................................................................77
7.1 Block Configuration............................................................................................................. 78
7.2 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................... 79
7.2.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)........................................................ 79
7.2.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)........................................................ 80
7.2.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1) .............................................................................. 81
7.2.4 Flash Memory Enable Register (FENR)................................................................. 81
7.3 On-Board Programming Modes........................................................................................... 82
7.3.1 Boot Mode .............................................................................................................. 82
7.3.2 Programming/Erasing in User Program Mode........................................................ 85
7.4 Flash Memory Programming/Erasing.................................................................................. 86
7.4.1 Program/Program-Verify........................................................................................ 86
7.4.2 Erase/Erase-Verify.................................................................................................. 88
7.4.3 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory............................. 89
7.5 Program/Erase Protection .................................................................................................... 91
7.5.1 Hardware Protection ............................................................................................... 91
7.5.2 Software Protection................................................................................................. 91
7.5.3 Error Protection....................................................................................................... 91
Section 8 RAM ....................................................................................................93
Section 9 I/O Ports...............................................................................................95
9.1 Port 1.................................................................................................................................... 95
9.1.1 Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1) ................................................................................ 96
9.1.2 Port Control Register 1 (PCR1) .............................................................................. 97
9.1.3 Port Data Register 1 (PDR1)................................................................................... 97
9.1.4 Port Pull-Up Control Register 1 (PUCR1).............................................................. 98
9.1.5 Pin Functions .......................................................................................................... 98
9.2 Port 2.................................................................................................................................. 100
9.2.1 Port Control Register 2 (PCR2) ............................................................................ 100
9.2.2 Port Data Register 2 (PDR2)................................................................................. 101
9.2.3 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 101
9.3 Port 5.................................................................................................................................. 102
9.3.1 Port Mode Register 5 (PMR5) .............................................................................. 103
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page xi of xxvi
9.3.2 Port Control Register 5 (PCR5)............................................................................ 104
9.3.3 Port Data Register 5 (PDR5) ................................................................................ 105
9.3.4 Port Pull-Up Control Register 5 (PUCR5)............................................................ 105
9.3.5 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 106
9.4 Port 7.................................................................................................................................. 108
9.4.1 Port Control Register 7 (PCR7)............................................................................ 109
9.4.2 Port Data Register 7 (PDR7) ................................................................................ 109
9.4.3 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 110
9.5 Port 8.................................................................................................................................. 112
9.5.1 Port Control Register 8 (PCR8)............................................................................ 112
9.5.2 Port Data Register 8 (PDR8) ................................................................................ 113
9.5.3 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 113
9.6 Port B................................................................................................................................. 115
9.6.1 Port Data Register B (PDRB) ............................................................................... 116
Section 10 Timer V ...........................................................................................117
10.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 117
10.2 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................................... 119
10.3 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 119
10.3.1 Timer Counter V (TCNTV).................................................................................. 119
10.3.2 Time Constant Registers A and B (TCORA, TCORB) ........................................ 120
10.3.3 Timer Control Register V0 (TCRV0)................................................................... 121
10.3.4 Timer Control/Status Register V (TCSRV).......................................................... 123
10.3.5 Timer Control Register V1 (TCRV1)................................................................... 125
10.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 126
10.4.1 Timer V Operation................................................................................................ 126
10.5 Timer V Application Examples ......................................................................................... 130
10.5.1 Pulse Output with Arbitrary Duty Cycle............................................................... 130
10.5.2 Pulse Output with Arbitrary Pulse Width and Delay from TRGV Input .............. 131
10.6 Usage Notes....................................................................................................................... 132
Section 11 Timer W...........................................................................................135
11.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 135
11.2 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................................... 138
11.3 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 138
11.3.1 Timer Mode Register W (TMRW) ....................................................................... 139
11.3.2 Timer Control Register W (TCRW) ..................................................................... 140
11.3.3 Timer Interrupt Enable Register W (TIERW) ...................................................... 141
11.3.4 Timer Status Register W (TSRW)........................................................................ 142
11.3.5 Timer I/O Control Register 0 (TIOR0)................................................................. 144
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page xii of xxvi
11.3.6 Timer I/O Control Register 1 (TIOR1)................................................................. 145
11.3.7 Timer Counter (TCNT)......................................................................................... 147
11.3.8 General Registers A to D (GRA to GRD)............................................................. 147
11.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 148
11.4.1 Normal Operation ................................................................................................. 148
11.4.2 PWM Operation.................................................................................................... 153
11.5 Operation Timing............................................................................................................... 158
11.5.1 TCNT Count Timing ............................................................................................ 158
11.5.2 Output Compare Output Timing........................................................................... 159
11.5.3 Input Capture Timing............................................................................................ 160
11.5.4 Timing of Counter Clearing by Compare Match .................................................. 160
11.5.5 Buffer Operation Timing ...................................................................................... 161
11.5.6 Timing of IMFA to IMFD Flag Setting at Compare Match.................................. 161
11.5.7 Timing of IMFA to IMFD Setting at Input Capture ............................................. 162
11.5.8 Timing of Status Flag Clearing............................................................................. 163
11.6 Usage Notes....................................................................................................................... 163
Section 12 Watchdog Timer ..............................................................................167
12.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 167
12.2 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 168
12.2.1 Timer Control/Status Register WD (TCSRWD)................................................... 168
12.2.2 Timer Counter WD (TCWD)................................................................................ 169
12.2.3 Timer Mode Register WD (TMWD) .................................................................... 170
12.3 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 171
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) .......................................173
13.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 173
13.2 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................................... 177
13.3 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 177
13.3.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) ............................................................................... 178
13.3.2 Receive Data Register (RDR)............................................................................... 178
13.3.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR).............................................................................. 178
13.3.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR).............................................................................. 178
13.3.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR) ................................................................................ 179
13.3.6 Serial Control Register 3 (SCR3).......................................................................... 180
13.3.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) ................................................................................. 182
13.3.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR) ....................................................................................... 184
13.3.9 SCI3_3 Module Control Register (SMCR)........................................................... 191
13.4 Operation in Asynchronous Mode ..................................................................................... 192
13.4.1 Clock..................................................................................................................... 192
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page xiii of xxvi
13.4.2 SCI3 Initialization................................................................................................. 193
13.4.3 Data Transmission ................................................................................................ 194
13.4.4 Serial Data Reception ........................................................................................... 196
13.5 Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode......................................................................... 200
13.5.1 Clock..................................................................................................................... 200
13.5.2 SCI3 Initialization................................................................................................. 201
13.5.3 Serial Data Transmission...................................................................................... 201
13.5.4 Serial Data Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode) .......................................... 203
13.5.5 Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception........................................ 205
13.6 Multiprocessor Communication Function.......................................................................... 207
13.6.1 Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission............................................................. 208
13.6.2 Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception .................................................................. 210
13.7 Interrupts............................................................................................................................ 214
13.8 Usage Notes....................................................................................................................... 215
13.8.1 Break Detection and Processing ........................................................................... 215
13.8.2 Mark State and Break Sending ............................................................................. 215
13.8.3 Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations
(Clocked Synchronous Mode Only) ..................................................................... 215
13.8.4 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous
Mode..................................................................................................................... 216
Section 14 A/D Converter .................................................................................217
14.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 217
14.2 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................................... 219
14.3 Register Description .......................................................................................................... 220
14.3.1 A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD) .............................................. 220
14.3.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) ................................................................ 221
14.3.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR) ............................................................................. 222
14.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 223
14.4.1 Single Mode.......................................................................................................... 223
14.4.2 Scan Mode ............................................................................................................ 223
14.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time .......................................................... 224
14.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing.............................................................................. 225
14.5 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions.............................................................................. 226
14.6 Usage Notes....................................................................................................................... 228
14.6.1 Permissible Signal Source Impedance.................................................................. 228
14.6.2 Influences on Absolute Accuracy......................................................................... 228
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page xiv of xxvi
Section 15 Power-On Reset and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits
(Optional).........................................................................................229
15.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 229
15.2 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 230
15.2.1 Low-Voltage-Detection Control Register (LVDCR)............................................ 231
15.2.2 Low-Voltage-Detection Status Register (LVDSR)............................................... 232
15.3 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 233
15.3.1 Power-On Reset Circuit........................................................................................ 233
15.3.2 Low-Voltage Detection Circuit............................................................................. 234
Section 16 Power Supply Circuit.......................................................................237
16.1 When Using Internal Power Supply Step-Down Circuit.................................................... 237
16.2 When Not Using Internal Power Supply Step-Down Circuit............................................. 238
Section 17 List of Registers...............................................................................225
17.1 Register Addresses (Address Order).................................................................................. 226
17.2 Register Bits....................................................................................................................... 230
17.3 Register States in Each Operating Mode ........................................................................... 233
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics .................................................................251
18.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings .............................................................................................. 251
18.2 Electrical Characteristics (F-ZTATTM Version).................................................................. 251
18.2.1 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Ranges...................................................... 251
18.2.2 DC Characteristics ................................................................................................ 254
18.2.3 AC Characteristics ................................................................................................ 259
18.2.4 A/D Converter Characteristics.............................................................................. 262
18.2.5 Watchdog Timer Characteristics........................................................................... 263
18.2.6 Flash Memory Characteristics .............................................................................. 264
18.2.7 Power-Supply-Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics (Optional)................... 266
18.2.8 Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics (Optional).............................................. 267
18.3 Electrical Characteristics (Masked ROM Version)............................................................ 267
18.3.1 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Ranges...................................................... 267
18.3.2 DC Characteristics ................................................................................................ 270
18.3.3 AC Characteristics ................................................................................................ 275
18.3.4 A/D Converter Characteristics.............................................................................. 278
18.3.5 Watchdog Timer Characteristics........................................................................... 279
18.3.6 Power-Supply-Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics (Optional)................... 280
18.3.7 Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics (Optional).............................................. 281
18.4 Operation Timing............................................................................................................... 281
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page xv of xxvi
18.5 Output Load Condition ...................................................................................................... 283
Appendix A Instruction Set...............................................................................285
A.1 Instruction List................................................................................................................... 285
A.2 Operation Code Map.......................................................................................................... 300
A.3 Number of Execution States .............................................................................................. 303
A.4 Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes ....................................................... 314
Appendix B I/O Port Block Diagrams...............................................................315
B.1 I/O Port Block Diagrams ................................................................................................... 315
B.2 Port States in Each Operating State ................................................................................... 337
Appendix C Product Code Lineup ....................................................................338
Appendix D Package Dimensions.....................................................................342
Main Revisions and Additions in this Edition.....................................................347
Index
.........................................................................................................351
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page xvi of xxvi
Figures
Section 1 Overview
Figure 1.1 Internal Block Diagram.................................................................................................3
Figure 1.2 Pin Arrangement (FP-64E)............................................................................................4
Figure 1.3 Pin Arrangement (FP-48F, FP-48B, TNP-48)...............................................................5
Section 2 CPU
Figure 2.1 Memory Map (1) .........................................................................................................10
Figure 2.1 Memory Map (2) .........................................................................................................11
Figure 2.2 CPU Registers .............................................................................................................12
Figure 2.3 Usage of General Registers .........................................................................................13
Figure 2.4 Relationship between Stack Pointer and Stack Area...................................................14
Figure 2.5 General Register Data Formats (1)..............................................................................16
Figure 2.5 General Register Data Formats (2)..............................................................................17
Figure 2.6 Memory Data Formats.................................................................................................18
Figure 2.7 Instruction Formats......................................................................................................29
Figure 2.8 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode...........................................33
Figure 2.9 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle..................................................................................35
Figure 2.10 On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Cycle (3-State Access).....................................36
Figure 2.11 CPU Operation States................................................................................................37
Figure 2.12 State Transitions........................................................................................................38
Figure 2.13 Example of Timer Configuration with Two Registers Allocated to Same
Address......................................................................................................................39
Section 3 Exception Handling
Figure 3.1 Reset Sequence............................................................................................................54
Figure 3.2 Stack Status after Exception Handling........................................................................56
Figure 3.3 Interrupt Sequence.......................................................................................................57
Figure 3.4 Port Mode Register Setting and Interrupt Request Flag Clearing Procedure ..............58
Section 4 Address Break
Figure 4.1 Block Diagram of Address Break................................................................................59
Figure 4.2 Address Break Interrupt Operation Example (1).........................................................63
Figure 4.2 Address Break Interrupt Operation Example (2).........................................................63
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generators
Figure 5.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generators..................................................................65
Figure 5.2 Block Diagram of System Clock Generator................................................................65
Figure 5.3 Typical Connection to Crystal Resonator....................................................................66
Figure 5.4 Equivalent Circuit of Crystal Resonator......................................................................66
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page xvii of xxvi
Figure 5.5 Typical Connection to Ceramic Resonator.................................................................. 66
Figure 5.6 Example of External Clock Input................................................................................ 67
Figure 5.7 Example of Incorrect Board Design............................................................................ 68
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
Figure 6.1 Mode Transition Diagram ...........................................................................................73
Section 7 ROM
Figure 7.1 Flash Memory Block Configuration............................................................................. 78
Figure 7.2 Programming/Erasing Flowchart Example in User Program Mode............................ 85
Figure 7.3 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart ............................................................................ 87
Figure 7.4 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart ..................................................................................... 90
Section 9 I/O Ports
Figure 9.1 Port 1 Pin Configuration.............................................................................................. 95
Figure 9.2 Port 2 Pin Configuration............................................................................................ 100
Figure 9.3 Port 5 Pin Configuration............................................................................................ 102
Figure 9.4 Port 7 Pin Configuration............................................................................................ 108
Figure 9.5 Port 8 Pin Configuration............................................................................................ 112
Figure 9.6 Port B Pin Configuration........................................................................................... 115
Section 10 Timer V
Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of Timer V ..................................................................................... 118
Figure 10.2 Increment Timing with Internal Clock.................................................................... 127
Figure 10.3 Increment Timing with External Clock................................................................... 127
Figure 10.4 OVF Set Timing...................................................................................................... 127
Figure 10.5 CMFA and CMFB Set Timing................................................................................ 128
Figure 10.6 TMOV Output Timing ............................................................................................ 128
Figure 10.7 Clear Timing by Compare Match............................................................................ 128
Figure 10.8 Clear Timing by TMRIV Input ............................................................................... 129
Figure 10.9 Pulse Output Example.............................................................................................130
Figure 10.10 Example of Pulse Output Synchronized to TRGV Input....................................... 131
Figure 10.11 Contention between TCNTV Write and Clear ...................................................... 132
Figure 10.12 Contention between TCORA Write and Compare Match..................................... 133
Figure 10.13 Internal Clock Switching and TCNTV Operation................................................. 133
Section 11 Timer W
Figure 11.1 Timer W Block Diagram......................................................................................... 137
Figure 11.2 Free-Running Counter Operation............................................................................ 148
Figure 11.3 Periodic Counter Operation..................................................................................... 149
Figure 11.4 0 and 1 Output Example (TOA = 0, TOB = 1)........................................................ 149
Figure 11.5 Toggle Output Example (TOA = 0, TOB = 1) ........................................................ 150
Figure 11.6 Toggle Output Example (TOA = 0, TOB = 1) ........................................................ 150
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page xviii of xxvi
Figure 11.7 Input Capture Operating Example...........................................................................151
Figure 11.8 Buffer Operation Example (Input Capture).............................................................152
Figure 11.9 PWM Mode Example (1) ........................................................................................153
Figure 11.10 PWM Mode Example (2) ......................................................................................154
Figure 11.11 Buffer Operation Example (Output Compare) ......................................................155
Figure 11.12 PWM Mode Example
(TOB, TOC, and TOD = 0: initial output values are set to 0) ...............................156
Figure 11.13 PWM Mode Example
(TOB, TOC, and TOD = 1: initial output values are set to 1) ...............................157
Figure 11.14 Count Timing for Internal Clock Source...............................................................158
Figure 11.15 Count Timing for External Clock Source..............................................................158
Figure 11.16 Output Compare Output Timing ...........................................................................159
Figure 11.17 Input Capture Input Signal Timing........................................................................160
Figure 11.18 Timing of Counter Clearing by Compare Match...................................................160
Figure 11.19 Buffer Operation Timing (Compare Match)..........................................................161
Figure 11.20 Buffer Operation Timing (Input Capture) .............................................................161
Figure 11.21 Timing of IMFA to IMFD Flag Setting at Compare Match..................................162
Figure 11.22 Timing of IMFA to IMFD Flag Setting at Input Capture......................................162
Figure 11.23 Timing of Status Flag Clearing by CPU................................................................163
Figure 11.24 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear .........................................................164
Figure 11.25 Internal Clock Switching and TCNT Operation....................................................164
Figure 11.26 When Compare Match and Bit Manipulation Instruction to TCRW Occur at the
Same Timing .........................................................................................................165
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of Watchdog Timer ........................................................................167
Figure 12.2 Watchdog Timer Operation Example......................................................................171
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
Figure 13.1 Block Diagram of SCI3...........................................................................................176
Figure 13.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication ......................................................192
Figure 13.3 Relationship between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase
(Asynchronous Mode)(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits) ..............192
Figure 13.4 Sample SCI3 Initialization Flowchart .....................................................................193
Figure 13.5 Example of SCI3 Transmission in Asynchronous Mode
(8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) ...........................................................................194
Figure 13.6 Sample Serial Transmission Data Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode)......................195
Figure 13.7 Example of SCI3 Reception in Asynchronous Mode
(8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) ...........................................................................196
Figure 13.8 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode)(1).......................198
Figure 13.8 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode)(2).......................199
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page xix of xxvi
Figure 13.9 Data Format in Clocked Synchronous Communication .......................................... 200
Figure 13.10 Example of SCI3 Transmission in Clocked Synchronous Mode .......................... 202
Figure 13.11 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart (Clocked Synchronous Mode) ................ 202
Figure 13.12 Example of SCI3 Reception in Clocked Synchronous Mode................................ 203
Figure 13.13 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart (Clocked Synchronous Mode)...................... 204
Figure 13.14 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations
(Clocked Synchronous Mode)............................................................................... 206
Figure 13.15 Example of Inter-Processor Communication Using Multiprocessor Format
(Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A) .......................................... 208
Figure 13.16 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart........................................ 209
Figure 13.17 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1)........................................ 211
Figure 13.17 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (2)........................................ 212
Figure 13.18 Example of SCI3 Reception Using Multiprocessor Format
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit).............................. 213
Figure 13.19 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode ...................................... 216
Section 14 A/D Converter
Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter ........................................................................... 218
Figure 14.2 A/D Conversion Timing.......................................................................................... 224
Figure 14.3 External Trigger Input Timing ................................................................................ 225
Figure 14.4 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions (1).............................................................. 227
Figure 14.5 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions (2).............................................................. 227
Figure 14.6 Analog Input Circuit Example ................................................................................ 228
Section 15 Power-On Reset and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits (Optional)
Figure 15.1 Block Diagram of Power-On Reset Circuit and Low-Voltage Detection Circuit.... 230
Figure 15.2 Operational Timing of Power-On Reset Circuit...................................................... 233
Figure 15.3 Operational Timing of LVDR Circuit ..................................................................... 234
Figure 15.4 Operational Timing of LVDI Circuit ...................................................................... 235
Figure 15.5 Timing for Operation/Release of Low-Voltage Detection Circuit .......................... 236
Section 16 Power Supply Circuit
Figure 16.1 Power Supply Connection when Internal Step-Down Circuit is Used .................... 237
Figure 16.2 Power Supply Connection when Internal Step-Down Circuit is Not Used ............. 238
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
Figure 18.1 System Clock Input Timing .................................................................................... 281
Figure 18.2 RES Low Width Timing.......................................................................................... 282
Figure 18.3 Input Timing............................................................................................................ 282
Figure 18.4 SCK3 Input Clock Timing ...................................................................................... 282
Figure 18.5 SCI3 Input/Output Timing in Clocked Synchronous Mode.................................... 283
Figure 18.6 Output Load Circuit ................................................................................................ 283
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page xx of xxvi
Appendix
Figure B.1 Port 1 Block Diagram (P17) .....................................................................................315
Figure B.2 Port 1 Block Diagram (P14) .....................................................................................316
Figure B.3 Port 1 Block Diagram (P16, P15, P12, P10).............................................................317
Figure B.4 Port 1 Block Diagram (P12) (H8/36024)..................................................................318
Figure B.5 Port 1 Block Diagram (P11) ......................................................................................319
Figure B.6 Port 2 Block Diagram (P22) .....................................................................................320
Figure B.7 Port 2 Block Diagram (P21) .....................................................................................321
Figure B.8 Port 2 Block Diagram (P20) .....................................................................................322
Figure B.9 Port 5 Block Diagram (P57, P56) (H8/36014)..........................................................323
Figure B.10 Port 5 Block Diagram (P57) (H8/36024)................................................................324
Figure B.11 Port 5 Block Diagram (P56) (H8/36024)................................................................325
Figure B.12 Port 5 Block Diagram (P55) ...................................................................................326
Figure B.13 Port 5 Block Diagram (P54 to P50)........................................................................327
Figure B.14 Port 7 Block Diagram (P76) ...................................................................................328
Figure B.15 Port 7 Block Diagram (P75) ...................................................................................329
Figure B.16 Port 7 Block Diagram (P74) ...................................................................................330
Figure B.17 Port 7 Block Diagram (P73) ...................................................................................331
Figure B.18 Port 7 Block Diagram (P72) ...................................................................................332
Figure B.19 Port 7 Block Diagram (P71) ...................................................................................333
Figure B.20 Port 7 Block Diagram (P70) ...................................................................................334
Figure B.21 Port 8 Block Diagram (P84 to P81)........................................................................335
Figure B.22 Port 8 Block Diagram (P80) ...................................................................................336
Figure B.23 Port B Block Diagram (PB3 to PB0)......................................................................337
Figure D.1 FP-64E Package Dimensions....................................................................................343
Figure D.2 FP-48F Package Dimensions....................................................................................344
Figure D.3 FP-48B Package Dimensions ...................................................................................345
Figure D.4 TNP-48 Package Dimensions...................................................................................346
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page xxi of xxvi
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page xxii of xxvi
Tables
Section 1 Overview
Table 1.1 Pin Functions ............................................................................................................6
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.1
Table 2.2
Table 2.3
Table 2.3
Table 2.4
Table 2.5
Table 2.6
Table 2.6
Table 2.7
Table 2.8
Table 2.9
Table 2.10
Table 2.11
Table 2.12
Table 2.12
Operation Notation .................................................................................................19
Data Transfer Instructions.......................................................................................20
Arithmetic Operations Instructions (1) ...................................................................21
Arithmetic Operations Instructions (2) ...................................................................22
Logic Operations Instructions.................................................................................22
Shift Instructions.....................................................................................................23
Bit Manipulation Instructions (1)............................................................................24
Bit Manipulation Instructions (2)............................................................................25
Branch Instructions.................................................................................................26
System Control Instructions....................................................................................27
Block Data Transfer Instructions............................................................................28
Addressing Modes ..................................................................................................30
Absolute Address Access Ranges...........................................................................32
Effective Address Calculation (1)...........................................................................33
Effective Address Calculation (2)...........................................................................34
Section 3 Exception Handling
Table 3.1
Table 3.2
Exception Sources and Vector Address..................................................................45
Interrupt Wait States ...............................................................................................56
Section 4 Address Break
Table 4.1
Access and Data Bus Used .....................................................................................61
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generators
Table 5.1
Crystal Resonator Parameters.................................................................................66
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
Table 6.1
Table 6.2
Table 6.3
Operating Frequency and Waiting Time.................................................................70
Transition Mode after SLEEP Instruction Execution and Interrupt Handling........74
Internal State in Each Operating Mode...................................................................74
Section 7 ROM
Table 7.1
Table 7.2
Table 7.3
Setting Programming Modes ..................................................................................82
Boot Mode Operation .............................................................................................84
System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of LSI Bit Rate is
Possible...................................................................................................................85
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page xxiii of xxvi
Table 7.4
Table 7.5
Table 7.6
Reprogram Data Computation Table...................................................................... 88
Additional-Program Data Computation Table........................................................ 88
Programming Time................................................................................................. 88
Section 10 Timer V
Table 10.1
Table 10.2
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 119
Clock Signals to Input to TCNTV and Counting Conditions ............................... 122
Section 11 Timer W
Table 11.1
Table 11.2
Timer W Functions............................................................................................... 136
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 138
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
Table 13.1
Table 13.2
Table 13.3
Table 13.3
Table 13.3
Table 13.4
Table 13.5
Channel Configuration.......................................................................................... 175
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 177
Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (1) ...... 185
Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (2) ...... 186
Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (3) ...... 187
Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode) .......................... 188
Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
(1) ......................................................................................................................... 189
Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
(2) ......................................................................................................................... 190
SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling...................................................... 197
SCI3 Interrupt Requests........................................................................................ 214
Table 13.5
Table 13.6
Table 13.7
Section 14 A/D Converter
Table 14.1
Table 14.2
Table 14.3
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 219
Analog Input Channels and Corresponding ADDR Registers.............................. 220
A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode)................................................................... 225
Section 15 Power-On Reset and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits (Optional)
Table 15.1 LVDCR Settings and Select Functions................................................................. 232
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
Table 18.1
Table 18.2
Table 18.2
Table 18.3
Table 18.4
Table 18.5
Table 18.6
Table 18.7
Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................................................................. 251
DC Characteristics (1) .......................................................................................... 254
DC Characteristics (2) .......................................................................................... 258
AC Characteristics................................................................................................ 259
Serial Interface (SCI3) Timing ............................................................................. 261
A/D Converter Characteristics.............................................................................. 262
Watchdog Timer Characteristics........................................................................... 263
Flash Memory Characteristics .............................................................................. 264
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page xxiv of xxvi
Table 18.8
Table 18.9
Table 18.10
Table 18.10
Table 18.11
Table 18.12
Table 18.13
Table 18.14
Table 18.15
Table 18.16
Power-Supply-Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics.....................................266
Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics................................................................267
DC Characteristics (1).......................................................................................270
DC Characteristics (2).......................................................................................274
AC Characteristics ............................................................................................275
Serial Interface (SCI3) Timing .........................................................................277
A/D Converter Characteristics..........................................................................278
Watchdog Timer Characteristics.......................................................................279
Power-Supply-Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics.................................280
Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics............................................................281
Appendix
Table A.1
Table A.2
Table A.2
Table A.2
Table A.3
Table A.4
Table A.5
Instruction Set.......................................................................................................287
Operation Code Map (1).......................................................................................300
Operation Code Map (2).......................................................................................301
Operation Code Map (3).......................................................................................302
Number of Cycles in Each Instruction..................................................................304
Number of Cycles in Each Instruction..................................................................305
Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes ..........................................314
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page xxv of xxvi
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page xxvi of xxvi
Section 1 Overview
Section 1 Overview
1.1
Features
•
High-speed H8/300H central processing unit with an internal 16-bit architecture
Upward-compatible with H8/300 CPU on an object level
Sixteen 16-bit general registers
62 basic instructions
•
Various peripheral functions
Timer V (8-bit timer)
Timer W (16-bit timer)
Watchdog timer
SCI3 (Asynchronous or clocked synchronous serial communication interface)
10-bit A/D converter
•
On-chip memory
Model
On-Chip Power-
On Reset and
Low-Voltage
Standard
Version
Detecting
Circuit Version ROM
Product Classification
RAM
Flash memory
version
(F-ZTATTM
H8/36024F HD64F36024
H8/36022F HD64F36022
H8/36014F HD64F36014
H8/36012F HD64F36012
HD64F36024G 32 kbytes
HD64F36022G 16 kbytes
HD64F36014G 32 kbytes
HD64F36012G 16 kbytes
HD64336024G 32 kbytes
HD64336023G 24 kbytes
HD64336022G 16 kbytes
HD64336014G 32 kbytes
HD64336013G 24 kbytes
HD64336012G 16 kbytes
HD64336011G 12 kbytes
HD64336010G 8 kbytes
2,048 bytes
2,048 bytes
2,048 bytes
2,048 bytes
1,024 bytes
1,024 bytes
512 bytes
1,024 bytes
1,024 bytes
512 bytes
512 bytes
512 bytes
version)
Masked ROM
version
H8/36024
H8/36023
H8/36022
H8/36014
H8/36013
H8/36012
H8/36011
H8/36010
HD64336024
HD64336023
HD64336022
HD64336014
HD64336013
HD64336012
HD64336011
HD64336010
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 1 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 1 Overview
•
General I/O ports
I/O pins: 30 I/O pins, including 5 large current ports (IOL = 20 mA, @VOL = 1.5 V)
Input-only pins: 4 input pins (also used for analog input)
Supports various power-down modes
•
Note: F-ZTATTM is a trademark of Renesas Technology Corp.
Compact package
•
Package
Code
Body Size
Pin Pitch
0.5 mm
0.65 mm
0.5 mm
0.5 mm
LQFP-64
LQFP-48
LQFP-48
QFN-48
FP-64E
FP-48F
FP-48B
TNP-48
10.0 × 10.0 mm
10.0 × 10.0 mm
7.0 × 7.0 mm
7.0 × 7.0 mm
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 2 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 1 Overview
1.2
Internal Block Diagram
E10T_0*3
E10T_1*3
E10T_2*3
System
clock
generator
CPU
H8/300H
P17/IRQ3/TRGV
Data bus (lower)
P16
P15
P14/IRQ0
P12/SCK3_3*2
P11
RAM
P10
ROM
P22/TXD
P21/RXD
P20/SCK3
SCI3
P76/TMOV
P75/TMCIV
P74/TMRIV
P73
Timer W
Timer V
SCI3_2
P72/TXD_2
P71/RXD_2
P70/SCK3_2
SCI3_3*1
P84/FTIOD
P83/FTIOC
P82/FTIOB
P81/FTIOA
P80/FTCI
P57/TXD_3*2
P56/RXD_3*2
A/D
converter
Watchdog
timer
P55/WKP5/ADTRG
P54/WKP4
P53/WKP3
P52/WKP2
P51/WKP1
P50/WKP0
Port B
Notes: 1. The SCI3_3 function is incorporated in the H8/36024.
2. Since the SCI3_3 function is not incorporated in the H8/36014, the SCK3_3, RXD_3, and TXD_3 pins are not multiplexed.
3. Can also be used for the E7 or E8 emulator.
Figure 1.1 Internal Block Diagram
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 3 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 1 Overview
1.3
Pin Arrangement
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
NC
NC
NC
NC
P76/TMOV
P75/TMCIV
P74/TMRIV
P57/TXD_3*1
P56/RXD_3*1
P12/SCK3_3*1
P11
P14/IRQ0
P15
P16
P17/IRQ3/TRGV
P73
P72/TXD_2
P71/RXD_2
P70/SCK3_2
PB3/AN3
PB2/AN2
PB1/AN1
PB0/AN0
NC
H8/36024 Group
H8/36014 Group
Top view
P10
P55/WKP5/ADTRG
P54/WKP4
P53/WKP3
P52/WKP2
NC
NC
NC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Notes: Do not connect NC pins (these pins are not connected to the internal circuitry).
*1 The SCK3_3, RXD_3, and TXD_3 pins are not multiplexed in the H8/36014.
*2 Can also be used for the E7 or E8 emulator.
Figure 1.2 Pin Arrangement (FP-64E)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 4 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 1 Overview
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
P76/TMOV
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
P14/IRQ0
P15
P75/TMCIV
P74/TMRIV
P57/TXD_3*1
P56/RXD_3*1
P12/SCK3_3*1
P11
P16
P17/IRQ3/TRGV
P73
H8/36014
Top view
P72/TXD_2
P71/RXD_2
P70/SCK3_2
PB3/AN3
PB2/AN2
PB1/AN1
PB0/AN0
P10
P55/WKP5/ADTRG
P54/WKP4
P53/WKP3
P52/WKP2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12
Notes: Do not connect NC pins (these pins are not connected to the internal circuitry).
*1 The SCK3_3, RXD_3, and TXD_3 pins are not multiplexed in the H8/36014.
*2 Can also be used for the E7 or E8 emulator.
Figure 1.3 Pin Arrangement (FP-48F, FP-48B, TNP-48)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 5 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 1 Overview
1.4
Pin Functions
Table 1.1 Pin Functions
Pin No.
FP-48F,
FP-48B,
TNP-48
Type
Symbol
FP-64E
I/O
Functions
Power
source pins
VCC
12
10
Input
Power supply pin. Connect this pin
to the system power supply.
VSS
9
3
7
Input
Input
Ground pin. Connect this pin to the
system power supply (0V).
AVCC
1
Analog power supply pin for the A/D
converter. When the A/D converter
is not used, connect this pin to the
system power supply.
VCL
6
4
Input
Internal step-down power supply
pin. Connect a capacitor of around
0.1 µF between this pin and the Vss
pin for stabilization.
Clock pins
OSC1
OSC2
11
10
9
8
Input
These pins connect to a crystal or
ceramic resonator for system
clocks, or can be used to input an
external clock.
Output
See section 5, Clock Pulse
Generators, for a typical
connection.
System
control
RES
7
5
Input
Reset pin. The pull-up resistor (typ.
150 kΩ) is incorporated. When
driven low, the chip is reset.
TEST
8
6
Input
Input
Test pin. Connect this pin to Vss.
Interrupt
pins
NMI
35
25
Non-maskable interrupt request
input pin. Be sure to pull-up by a
pull-up resistor.
IRQ0,
51, 54
37, 40
Input
Input
External interrupt request input
pins. Can select the rising or falling
edge.
IRQ3
WKP0 to
13, 14,
19 to 22
11 to 16
External interrupt request input
pins. Can select the rising or falling
edge.
WKP5
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 6 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 1 Overview
Pin No.
FP-48F,
FP-48B,
TNP-48
Type
Symbol
FP-64E
I/O
Functions
Timer V
TMOV
30
24
Output This is an output pin for waveforms
generated by the output compare
function.
TMCIV
TMRIV
TRGV
FTCI
29
23
Input
Input
Input
Input
I/O
External event input pin.
Counter reset input pin.
Counter start trigger input pin.
External event input pin.
28
22
54
40
Timer W
36
26
FTIOA to
FTIOD
37 to 40
27 to 30
Output compare output/ input
capture input/ PWM output pin
Serial com- TXD,
46, 56, 27 36, 42, 21 Output Transmit data output pin
munication
interface
(SCI)
TXD_2,
TXD_3*
RXD,
RXD_2,
RXD_3*
45, 57, 26 35, 43, 20 Input
44, 58, 25 34, 44, 19 I/O
Receive data input pin
Clock I/O pin
SCK3,
SCK3_2,
SCK3_3*
A/D
converter
AN3 to AN0 59 to 62
ADTRG 22
45 to 48
16
Input
Input
Input
I/O
Analog input pin
A/D converter trigger input pin.
4-bit input port.
I/O ports
PB3 to PB0 59 to 62
45 to 48
P17 to P14, 54 to 51,
P12 to P10 25 to 23
40 to 37,
19 to 17
7-bit I/O port.
P22 to P20 46 to 44
36 to 34
I/O
I/O
3-bit I/O port.
8-bit I/O port
P57 to P50 27, 26,
22 to 19,
21, 20,
16 to 11
14, 13
P76 to P70 30 to 28,
55 to 58
24 to 22,
41 to 44
I/O
I/O
7-bit I/O port
5-bit I/O port.
P84 to P80 40 to 36
30 to 26
E10T
E10T _0,
E10T _1,
E10T _2
41, 42, 43 31, 32, 33
Interface pin for the E10T, E8, or
E7 emulator
Note:
*
The SCK3_3, RXD_3, and TXD_3 pins are not multiplexed in the H8/36014.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 7 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 1 Overview
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 8 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
Section 2 CPU
This LSI has an H8/300H CPU with an internal 32-bit architecture that is upward-compatible with
the H8/300CPU, and supports only normal mode, which has a 64-kbyte address space.
•
Upward-compatible with H8/300 CPUs
Can execute H8/300 CPUs object programs
Additional eight 16-bit extended registers
32-bit transfer and arithmetic and logic instructions are added
Signed multiply and divide instructions are added.
General-register architecture
•
•
Sixteen 16-bit general registers also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers
Sixty-two basic instructions
8/16/32-bit data transfer and arithmetic and logic instructions
Multiply and divide instructions
Powerful bit-manipulation instructions
Eight addressing modes
•
Register direct [Rn]
Register indirect [@ERn]
Register indirect with displacement [@(d:16,ERn) or @(d:24,ERn)]
Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@ERn+ or @–ERn]
Absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24]
Immediate [#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32]
Program-counter relative [@(d:8,PC) or @(d:16,PC)]
Memory indirect [@@aa:8]
•
•
64-kbyte address space
High-speed operation
All frequently-used instructions execute in one or two states
8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract
8 × 8-bit register-register multiply : 14 states
16 ÷ 8-bit register-register divide : 14 states
: 2 state
16 × 16-bit register-register multiply : 22 states
32 ÷ 16-bit register-register divide : 22 states
Power-down state
•
Transition to power-down state by SLEEP instruction
CPU30H2E_000120030300
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 9 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
2.1
Address Space and Memory Map
The address space of this LSI is 64 kbytes, which includes the program area and the data area.
Figures 2.1 show the memory maps.
H8/36024F
H8/36014F
(Flash memory version)
H8/36022F
H8/36012F
(Flash memory version)
H8/36024
H8/36014
(Masked ROM version)
H8/36023
H8/36013
(Masked ROM version)
H'0000
H'0045
H'0046
H'0000
H'0045
H'0046
H'0000
H'0045
H'0046
H'0000
H'0045
H'0046
Interrupt vector
Interrupt vector
Interrupt vector
Interrupt vector
On-chip ROM
(16 kbytes)
On-chip ROM
(24 kbytes)
H'3FFF
On-chip ROM
(32 kbytes)
On-chip ROM
(32 kbytes)
H'5FFF
Not used
H'7FFF
H'7FFF
Not used
Not used
Not used
H'F600
H'F74F
H'F600
H'F74F
H'F600
H'F74F
H'F600
H'F74F
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
Not used
H'F780
H'F780
(1-kbyte work area for
flash memory
(1-kbyte work area for
flash memory
Not used
programming)
programming)
On-chip RAM
(2 kbytes)
On-chip RAM
(2 kbytes)
H'FB7F
H'FB80
H'FB7F
H'FB80
H'FB80
H'FB80
On-chip RAM
(1 kbyte)
On-chip RAM
(1 kbyte)
(1-kbyte user area)
Internal I/O register
(1-kbyte user area)
Internal I/O register
H'FF7F
H'FF80
H'FF7F
H'FF80
H'FF7F
H'FF80
H'FF7F
H'FF80
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
H'FFFF
H'FFFF
H'FFFF
H'FFFF
Figure 2.1 Memory Map (1)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 10 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
H8/36022
H8/36012
(Masked ROM version)
H8/36011
(Masked ROM version)
H8/36010
(Masked ROM version)
H'0000
H'0045
H'0046
H'0000
H'0045
H'0046
H'0000
H'0045
H'0046
Interrupt vector
Interrupt vector
Interrupt vector
On-chip ROM
(8 kbytes)
On-chip ROM
(12 kbytes)
H'1FFF
On-chip ROM
(16 kbytes)
H'2FFF
H'3FFF
Not used
Not used
Not used
H'F600
H'F74F
H'F600
H'F74F
H'F600
H'F74F
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
Not used
Not used
Not used
H'FD80
H'FD80
H'FD80
On-chip RAM
(512 bytes)
On-chip RAM
(512 bytes)
On-chip RAM
(512 bytes)
H'FF7F
H'FF80
H'FF7F
H'FF80
H'FF7F
H'FF80
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
H'FFFF
H'FFFF
H'FFFF
Figure 2.1 Memory Map (2)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 11 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
2.2
Register Configuration
The H8/300H CPU has the internal registers shown in figure 2.2. There are two types of registers;
general registers and control registers. The control registers are a 24-bit program counter (PC), and
an 8-bit condition code register (CCR).
General Registers (ERn)
15
0 7
0 7
0
ER0
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
R0H
R1H
R2H
R3H
R4H
R5H
R6H
R7H
R0L
R1L
R2L
R3L
R4L
R5L
R6L
R7L
ER1
ER2
ER3
ER4
ER5
ER6
ER7 (SP)
Control Registers (CR)
23
0
0
PC
7
6 5 4 3 2 1
CCR
I UI H U N Z V C
Legend
SP
PC
:Stack pointer
:Program counter
H
:Half-carry flag
:User bit
:Negative flag
:Zero flag
:Overflow flag
:Carry flag
U
N
Z
V
C
CCR :Condition-code register
I
UI
:Interrupt mask bit
:User bit
Figure 2.2 CPU Registers
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 12 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
2.2.1
General Registers
The H8/300H CPU has eight 32-bit general registers. These general registers are all functionally
identical and can be used as both address registers and data registers. When a general register is
used as a data register, it can be accessed as a 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit register. Figure 2.3 illustrates
the usage of the general registers. When the general registers are used as 32-bit registers or address
registers, they are designated by the letters ER (ER0 to ER7).
The ER registers divide into 16-bit general registers designated by the letters E (E0 to E7) and R
(R0 to R7). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum of sixteen 16-bit
registers. The E registers (E0 to E7) are also referred to as extended registers.
The R registers divide into 8-bit registers designated by the letters RH (R0H to R7H) and RL (R0L
to R7L). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum of sixteen 8-bit
registers.
The usage of each register can be selected independently.
• Address registers
• 32-bit registers
• 16-bit registers
• 8-bit registers
E registers (extended registers)
(E0 to E7)
ER registers
(ER0 to ER7)
RH registers
(R0H to R7H)
R registers
(R0 to R7)
RL registers
(R0L to R7L)
Figure 2.3 Usage of General Registers
General register ER7 has the function of stack pointer (SP) in addition to its general-register
function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. Figure 2.4 shows the
stack.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 13 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
Free area
SP (ER7)
Stack area
Figure 2.4 Relationship between Stack Pointer and Stack Area
Program Counter (PC)
2.2.2
This 24-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the CPU will execute. The length
of all CPU instructions is 2 bytes (one word), so the least significant PC bit is ignored. (When an
instruction is fetched, the least significant PC bit is regarded as 0). The PC is initialized when the
start address is loaded by the vector address generated during reset exception-handling sequence.
2.2.3
Condition-Code Register (CCR)
This 8-bit register contains internal CPU status information, including an interrupt mask bit (I) and
half-carry (H), negative (N), zero (Z), overflow (V), and carry (C) flags. The I bit is initialized to 1
by reset exception-handling sequence, but other bits are not initialized.
Some instructions leave flag bits unchanged. Operations can be performed on the CCR bits by the
LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. The N, Z, V, and C flags are used as branching
conditions for conditional branch (Bcc) instructions.
For the action of each instruction on the flag bits, see Appendix A.1, Instruction List.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 14 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
I
1
R/W
Interrupt Mask Bit
Masks interrupts other than NMI when set to 1. NMI is
accepted regardless of the I bit setting. The I bit is set
to 1 at the start of an exception-handling sequence.
6
5
UI
H
Undefined R/W
Undefined R/W
User Bit
Can be written and read by software using the LDC,
STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions.
Half-Carry Flag
When the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B, CMP.B,
or NEG.B instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if
there is a carry or borrow at bit 3, and cleared to 0
otherwise. When the ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, or
NEG.W instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if
there is a carry or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0
otherwise. When the ADD.L, SUB.L, CMP.L, or NEG.L
instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a
carry or borrow at bit 27, and cleared to 0 otherwise.
4
3
2
1
0
U
N
Z
Undefined R/W
Undefined R/W
Undefined R/W
Undefined R/W
Undefined R/W
User Bit
Can be written and read by software using the LDC,
STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions.
Negative Flag
Stores the value of the most significant bit of data as a
sign bit.
Zero Flag
Set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to
indicate non-zero data.
V
C
Overflow Flag
Set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and
cleared to 0 at other times.
Carry Flag
Set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0
otherwise. Used by:
•
•
•
Add instructions, to indicate a carry
Subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow
Shift and rotate instructions, to indicate a carry
The carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit
manipulation instructions.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 15 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
2.3
Data Formats
The H8/300H CPU can process 1-bit, 4-bit (BCD), 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit
(longword) data. Bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1, 2,
…, 7) of byte operand data. The DAA and DAS decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two
digits of 4-bit BCD data.
2.3.1
General Register Data Formats
Figure 2.5 shows the data formats in general registers.
Data Type
1-bit data
General Register
RnH
Data Format
7
0
0
Don't care
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
0
0
Don't care
RnL
RnH
RnL
RnH
RnL
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1-bit data
7
4
3
0
4-bit BCD data
Upper
Lower
Don't care
7
4
3
0
4-bit BCD data
Byte data
Don't care
Upper
Lower
7
0
Don't care
MSB
LSB
7
0
Byte data
Don't care
MSB
LSB
Figure 2.5 General Register Data Formats (1)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 16 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
Data Type
Word data
General
Register
Data Format
Rn
15
0
MSB
LSB
Word data
En
15
0
MSB
31
LSB
Longword
data
ERn
16 15
0
MSB
LSB
Legend
ERn : General register ER
En
Rn
: General register E
: General register R
RnH : General register RH
RnL : General register RL
MSB : Most significant bit
LSB : Least significant bit
Figure 2.5 General Register Data Formats (2)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 17 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
2.3.2
Memory Data Formats
Figure 2.6 shows the data formats in memory. The H8/300H CPU can access word data and
longword data in memory, however word or longword data must begin at an even address. If an
attempt is made to access word or longword data at an odd address, an address error does not
occur, however the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0, so access begins the
preceding address. This also applies to instruction fetches.
When ER7 (SP) is used as an address register to access the stack, the operand size should be word
or longword.
Data Type
Address
Data Format
7
7
0
0
1-bit data
Byte data
Word data
Address L
Address L
6
5
4
3
2
1
MSB
MSB
LSB
LSB
Address 2M
Address 2M+1
Longword data
Address 2N
MSB
Address 2N+1
Address 2N+2
Address 2N+3
LSB
Figure 2.6 Memory Data Formats
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 18 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
2.4
Instruction Set
2.4.1
Table of Instructions Classified by Function
The H8/300H CPU has 62 instructions. Tables 2.2 to 2.9 summarize the instructions in each
functional category. The notation used in tables 2.2 to 2.9 is defined below.
Table 2.1 Operation Notation
Symbol
Rd
Rs
Rn
ERn
(EAd)
(EAs)
CCR
N
Description
General register (destination)*
General register (source)*
General register*
General register (32-bit register or address register)
Destination operand
Source operand
Condition-code register
N (negative) flag in CCR
Z (zero) flag in CCR
V (overflow) flag in CCR
C (carry) flag in CCR
Program counter
Stack pointer
Z
V
C
PC
SP
#IMM
disp
+
Immediate data
Displacement
Addition
–
Subtraction
×
Multiplication
÷
Division
∧
Logical AND
∨
Logical OR
⊕
Logical XOR
→
Move
¬
NOT (logical complement)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 19 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
Symbol
Description
:3/:8/:16/:24
3-, 8-, 16-, or 24-bit length
Note:
*
General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit registers (R0
to R7, E0 to E7), and 32-bit registers/address registers (ER0 to ER7).
Table 2.2 Data Transfer Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
MOV
B/W/L
(EAs) → Rd, Rs → (EAd)
Moves data between two general registers or between a general register
and memory, or moves immediate data to a general register.
MOVFPE
MOVTPE
POP
B
(EAs) → Rd, Cannot be used in this LSI.
Rs → (EAs) Cannot be used in this LSI.
B
W/L
@SP+ → Rn
Pops a general register from the stack. POP.W Rn is identical to
MOV.W @SP+, Rn. POP.L ERn is identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn.
PUSH
W/L
Rn → @–SP
Pushes a general register onto the stack. PUSH.W Rn is identical to
MOV.W Rn, @–SP. PUSH.L ERn is identical to MOV.L ERn, @–SP.
Note:
*
Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 20 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.3 Arithmetic Operations Instructions (1)
Instruction
Size*
Function
ADD
SUB
B/W/L
Rd Rs → Rd, Rd #IMM → Rd
Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers, or on
immediate data and data in a general register (immediate byte data
cannot be subtracted from byte data in a general register. Use the
SUBX or ADD instruction.)
ADDX
SUBX
B
Rd Rs C → Rd, Rd #IMM C → Rd
Performs addition or subtraction with carry on byte data in two general
registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register.
INC
DEC
B/W/L
Rd 1 → Rd, Rd 2 → Rd
Increments or decrements a general register by 1 or 2. (Byte operands
can be incremented or decremented by 1 only.)
ADDS
SUBS
L
Rd 1 → Rd, Rd 2 → Rd, Rd 4 → Rd
Adds or subtracts the value 1, 2, or 4 to or from data in a 32-bit register.
DAA
DAS
B
Rd decimal adjust → Rd
Decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a general register by
referring to the CCR to produce 4-bit BCD data.
MULXU
MULXS
DIVXU
B/W
B/W
B/W
Rd × Rs → Rd
Performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers: either
8 bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits × 16 bits → 32 bits.
Rd × Rs → Rd
Performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8
bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits × 16 bits → 32 bits.
Rd ÷ Rs → Rd
Performs unsigned division on data in two general registers: either 16
bits ÷ 8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits →
16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder.
Note:
*
Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 21 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.3 Arithmetic Operations Instructions (2)
Instruction
Size*
Function
DIVXS
B/W
Rd ÷ Rs → Rd
Performs signed division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits
÷ 8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits → 16-bit
quotient and 16-bit remainder.
CMP
B/W/L
Rd – Rs, Rd – #IMM
Compares data in a general register with data in another general
register or with immediate data, and sets CCR bits according to the
result.
NEG
B/W/L
W/L
0 – Rd → Rd
Takes the two's complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a
general register.
EXTU
Rd (zero extension) → Rd
Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16
bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by padding with zeros on the
left.
EXTS
W/L
Rd (sign extension) → Rd
Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16
bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by extending the sign bit.
Note:
*
Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Table 2.4 Logic Operations Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
AND
B/W/L
Rd ∧ Rs → Rd, Rd ∧ #IMM → Rd
Performs a logical AND operation on a general register and another
general register or immediate data.
OR
B/W/L
B/W/L
B/W/L
Rd ∨ Rs → Rd, Rd ∨ #IMM → Rd
Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and another
general register or immediate data.
XOR
NOT
Rd ⊕ Rs → Rd, Rd ⊕ #IMM → Rd
Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register and
another general register or immediate data.
¬ (Rd) → (Rd)
Takes the one's complement of general register contents.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 22 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
Note:
*
Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Table 2.5 Shift Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
SHAL
SHAR
B/W/L
Rd (shift) → Rd
Performs an arithmetic shift on general register contents.
SHLL
SHLR
B/W/L
B/W/L
B/W/L
Rd (shift) → Rd
Performs a logical shift on general register contents.
ROTL
ROTR
Rd (rotate) → Rd
Rotates general register contents.
ROTXL
ROTXR
Rd (rotate) → Rd
Rotates general register contents through the carry flag.
Note:
*
Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 23 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.6 Bit Manipulation Instructions (1)
Instruction
Size*
Function
BSET
B
1 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Sets a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 1. The bit
number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a
general register.
BCLR
BNOT
BTST
B
B
B
0 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Clears a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 0. The
bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of
a general register.
¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Inverts a specified bit in a general register or memory operand. The bit
number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a
general register.
¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → Z
Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and sets
or clears the Z flag accordingly. The bit number is specified by 3-bit
immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register.
BAND
B
B
C ∧ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ANDs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
BIAND
C ∧ ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ANDs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BOR
B
B
C ∨ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
BIOR
C ∨ ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register
or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
Note:
*
Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 24 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.6 Bit Manipulation Instructions (2)
Instruction
Size*
Function
BXOR
B
C ⊕ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
XORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
BIXOR
B
C ⊕ ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
XORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BLD
B
B
(<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
Transfers a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to the
carry flag.
BILD
¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
Transfers the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand to the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BST
B
B
C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Transfers the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general register or
memory operand.
BIST
¬ C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Transfers the inverse of the carry flag value to a specified bit in a
general register or memory operand.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
Note:
*
Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 25 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.7 Branch Instructions
Instruction
Size
Function
Bcc*
—
Branches to a specified address if a specified condition is true. The
branching conditions are listed below.
Mnemonic
BRA(BT)
BRN(BF)
BHI
Description
Always (true)
Never (false)
High
Condition
Always
Never
C ∨ Z = 0
C ∨ Z = 1
C = 0
BLS
Low or same
BCC(BHS)
Carry clear
(high or same)
BCS(BLO)
BNE
BEQ
BVC
BVS
Carry set (low)
Not equal
C = 1
Z = 0
Equal
Z = 1
Overflow clear
Overflow set
Plus
V = 0
V = 1
BPL
N = 0
BMI
Minus
N = 1
BGE
BLT
Greater or equal
Less than
N ⊕ V = 0
N ⊕ V = 1
Z∨(N ⊕ V) = 0
Z∨(N ⊕ V) = 1
BGT
BLE
Greater than
Less or equal
JMP
BSR
JSR
RTS
—
—
—
—
Branches unconditionally to a specified address.
Branches to a subroutine at a specified address.
Branches to a subroutine at a specified address.
Returns from a subroutine
Note:
*
Bcc is the general name for conditional branch instructions.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 26 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.8 System Control Instructions
Instruction
TRAPA
RTE
Size*
—
Function
Starts trap-instruction exception handling.
Returns from an exception-handling routine.
Causes a transition to a power-down state.
(EAs) → CCR
—
SLEEP
LDC
—
B/W
Moves the source operand contents to the CCR. The CCR size is one
byte, but in transfer from memory, data is read by word access.
STC
B/W
CCR → (EAd), EXR → (EAd)
Transfers the CCR contents to a destination location. The condition
code register size is one byte, but in transfer to memory, data is written
by word access.
ANDC
ORC
B
CCR ∧ #IMM → CCR, EXR ∧ #IMM → EXR
Logically ANDs the CCR with immediate data.
B
CCR ∨ #IMM → CCR, EXR ∨ #IMM → EXR
Logically ORs the CCR with immediate data.
XORC
NOP
B
CCR ⊕ #IMM → CCR, EXR ⊕ #IMM → EXR
Logically XORs the CCR with immediate data.
—
PC + 2 → PC
Only increments the program counter.
Note:
*
Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 27 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.9 Block Data Transfer Instructions
Instruction
Size
Function
EEPMOV.B
—
if R4L ≠ 0 then
Repeat @ER5+ → @ER6+,
R4L–1 → R4L
Until R4L = 0
else next;
EEPMOV.W
—
if R4 ≠ 0 then
Repeat @ER5+ → @ER6+,
R4–1 → R4
Until R4 = 0
else next;
Transfers a data block. Starting from the address set in ER5, transfers
data for the number of bytes set in R4L or R4 to the address location set
in ER6.
Execution of the next instruction begins as soon as the transfer is
completed.
2.4.2
Basic Instruction Formats
H8/300H CPU instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. An instruction consists of an
operation field (op field), a register field (r field), an effective address extension (EA field), and a
condition field (cc).
Figure 2.7 shows examples of instruction formats.
•
Operation Field
Indicates the function of the instruction, the addressing mode, and the operation to be carried
out on the operand. The operation field always includes the first four bits of the instruction.
Some instructions have two operation fields.
•
•
•
Register Field
Specifies a general register. Address registers are specified by 3 bits, and data registers by 3
bits or 4 bits. Some instructions have two register fields. Some have no register field.
Effective Address Extension
8, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute address, or a displacement. A24-bit
address or displacement is treated as a 32-bit data in which the first 8 bits are 0 (H'00).
Condition Field
Specifies the branching condition of Bcc instructions.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 28 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
(1) Operation field only
op
NOP, RTS, etc.
(2) Operation field and register fields
op
rm
rn
ADD.B Rn, Rm, etc.
(3) Operation field, register fields, and effective address extension
op
rn
rm
MOV.B @(d:16, Rn), Rm
EA(disp)
(4) Operation field, effective address extension, and condition field
op cc EA(disp) BRA d:8
Figure 2.7 Instruction Formats
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 29 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
2.5
Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation
The following describes the H8/300H CPU. In this LSI, the upper eight bits are ignored in the
generated 24-bit address, so the effective address is 16 bits.
2.5.1
Addressing Modes
The H8/300H CPU supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2.10. Each instruction uses
a subset of these addressing modes. Addressing modes that can be used differ depending on the
instruction. For details, refer to Appendix A.4, Combinations of Instructions and Addressing
Modes.
Arithmetic and logic instructions can use the register direct and immediate modes. Data transfer
instructions can use all addressing modes except program-counter relative and memory indirect.
Bit manipulation instructions use register direct, register indirect, or the absolute addressing mode
to specify an operand, and register direct (BSET, BCLR, BNOT, and BTST instructions) or
immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit number in the operand.
Table 2.10 Addressing Modes
No.
1
Addressing Mode
Symbol
Register direct
Rn
2
Register indirect
@ERn
3
Register indirect with displacement
@(d:16,ERn)/@(d:24,ERn)
4
Register indirect with post-increment
Register indirect with pre-decrement
@ERn+
@–ERn
5
6
7
8
Absolute address
Immediate
@aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24
#xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32
@(d:8,PC)/@(d:16,PC)
@@aa:8
Program-counter relative
Memory indirect
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 30 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
(1) Register Direct—Rn
The register field of the instruction specifies an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit general register containing the
operand. R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L can be specified as 8-bit registers. R0 to R7 and E0 to E7
can be specified as 16-bit registers. ER0 to ER7 can be specified as 32-bit registers.
(2) Register Indirect—@ERn
The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn), the lower 24 bits of
which contain the address of the operand on memory.
(3) Register Indirect with Displacement—@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:24, ERn)
A 16-bit or 24-bit displacement contained in the instruction is added to an address register (ERn)
specified by the register field of the instruction, and the lower 24 bits of the sum the address of a
memory operand. A 16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added.
(4) Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement—@ERn+ or @-ERn
•
Register indirect with post-increment—@ERn+
The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) the lower 24 bits
of which contains the address of a memory operand. After the operand is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is
added to the address register contents (32 bits) and the sum is stored in the address register.
The value added is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. For the word
or longword access, the register value should be even.
•
Register indirect with pre-decrement—@-ERn
The value 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from an address register (ERn) specified by the register field
in the instruction code, and the lower 24 bits of the result is the address of a memory operand.
The result is also stored in the address register. The value subtracted is 1 for byte access, 2 for
word access, or 4 for longword access. For the word or longword access, the register value
should be even.
(5) Absolute Address—@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24
The instruction code contains the absolute address of a memory operand. The absolute address
may be 8 bits long (@aa:8), 16 bits long (@aa:16), 24 bits long (@aa:24)
For an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 16 bits are all assumed to be 1 (H'FFFF). For a 16-bit
absolute address the upper 8 bits are a sign extension. A 24-bit absolute address can access the
entire address space.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 31 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
The access ranges of absolute addresses for the group of this LSI are those shown in table 2.11,
because the upper 8 bits are ignored.
Table 2.11 Absolute Address Access Ranges
Absolute Address
8 bits (@aa:8)
Access Range
H'FF00 to H'FFFF
H'0000 to H'FFFF
H'0000 to H'FFFF
16 bits (@aa:16)
24 bits (@aa:24)
(6) Immediate—#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32
The instruction contains 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit (#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) immediate data as an
operand.
The ADDS, SUBS, INC, and DEC instructions contain immediate data implicitly. Some bit
manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data in the instruction code, specifying a bit
number. The TRAPA instruction contains 2-bit immediate data in its instruction code, specifying a
vector address.
(7) Program-Counter Relative—@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC)
This mode is used in the BSR instruction. An 8-bit or 16-bit displacement contained in the
instruction is sign-extended and added to the 24-bit PC contents to generate a branch address. The
PC value to which the displacement is added is the address of the first byte of the next instruction,
so the possible branching range is –126 to +128 bytes (–63 to +64 words) or –32766 to +32768
bytes (–16383 to +16384 words) from the branch instruction. The resulting value should be an
even number.
(8) Memory Indirect—@@aa:8
This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The instruction code contains an 8-bit
absolute address specifying a memory operand. This memory operand contains a branch address.
The memory operand is accessed by longword access. The first byte of the memory operand is
ignored, generating a 24-bit branch address. Figure 2.8 shows how to specify branch address for in
memory indirect mode. The upper bits of the absolute address are all assumed to be 0, so the
address range is 0 to 255 (H'0000 to H'00FF).
Note that the first part of the address range is also the exception vector area.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 32 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
Specified
by @aa:8
Dummy
Branch address
Figure 2.8 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode
Effective Address Calculation
2.5.2
Table 2.12 indicates how effective addresses are calculated in each addressing mode. In this LSI
the upper 8 bits of the effective address are ignored in order to generate a 16-bit effective address.
Table 2.12 Effective Address Calculation (1)
No
1
Addressing Mode and Instruction Format
Register direct(Rn)
Effective Address Calculation
Effective Address (EA)
Operand is general register contents.
op
rm rn
2
3
Register indirect(@ERn)
31
0
23
0
General register contents
General register contents
op
r
Register indirect with displacement
@(d:16,ERn) or @(d:24,ERn)
31
31
0
0
23
0
op
r
disp
disp
Sign extension
Register indirect with post-increment or
pre-decrement
•Register indirect with post-increment @ERn+
4
31
31
0
0
23
0
General register contents
op
r
1, 2, or 4
•Register indirect with pre-decrement @-ERn
General register contents
23
0
op
r
1, 2, or 4
The value to be added or subtracted is 1 when the
operand is byte size, 2 for word size, and 4 for
longword size.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 33 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.12 Effective Address Calculation (2)
No
5
Addressing Mode and Instruction Format
Effective Address Calculation
Effective Address (EA)
Absolute address
@aa:8
23
8 7
0
0
op
abs
H'FFFF
@aa:16
23
16 15
op
op
abs
Sign extension
@aa:24
23
0
abs
6
7
Immediate
#xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32
op
Operand is immediate data.
IMM
disp
23
0
0
Program-counter relative
@(d:8,PC) @(d:16,PC)
PC contents
op
23
Sign
disp
extension
23
0
8
Memory indirect @@aa:8
23
8
7
0
0
op
abs
abs
H'0000
15
23
16 15
H'00
0
Memory contents
Legend
r, rm,rn : Register field
op :
Operation field
Displacement
Immediate data
Absolute address
disp :
IMM :
abs :
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 34 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
2.6
Basic Bus Cycle
CPU operation is synchronized by a system clock (φ) or a subclock (φSUB). The period from a rising
edge of φ or φSUB to the next rising edge is called one state. A bus cycle consists of two states or
three states. The cycle differs depending on whether access is to on-chip memory or to on-chip
peripheral modules.
2.6.1
Access to On-Chip Memory (RAM, ROM)
Access to on-chip memory takes place in two states. The data bus width is 16 bits, allowing access
in byte or word size. Figure 2.9 shows the on-chip memory access cycle.
Bus cycle
T1 state
T2 state
ø or øSUB
Internal address bus
Address
Internal read signal
Internal data bus
(read access)
Read data
Internal write signal
Internal data bus
(write access)
Write data
Figure 2.9 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 35 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
2.6.2
On-Chip Peripheral Modules
On-chip peripheral modules are accessed in two states or three states. The data bus width is 8 bits
or 16 bits depending on the register. For description on the data bus width and number of
accessing states of each register, refer to section 17.1, Register Addresses (Address Order).
Registers with 16-bit data bus width can be accessed by word size only. Registers with 8-bit data
bus width can be accessed by byte or word size. When a register with 8-bit data bus width is
accessed by word size, a bus cycle occurs twice. In two-state access, the operation timing is the
same as that for on-chip memory.
Figure 2.10 shows the operation timing in the case of three-state access to an on-chip peripheral
module.
Bus cycle
T1 state
T2 state
T3 state
ø or øSUB
Internal
address bus
Address
Internal
read signal
Internal
data bus
Read data
(read access)
Internal
write signal
Internal
data bus
Write data
(write access)
Figure 2.10 On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Cycle (3-State Access)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 36 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
2.7
CPU States
There are four CPU states: the reset state, program execution state, program halt state, and
exception-handling state. The program execution state includes active mode. In the program halt
state there are a sleep mode, and standby mode. These states are shown in figure 2.11. Figure 2.12
shows the state transitions. For details on program execution state and program halt state, refer to
section 6, Power-Down Modes. For details on exception processing, refer to section 3, Exception
Handling.
CPU state
Reset state
The CPU is initialized
Program
execution state
Active
(high speed) mode
The CPU executes successive program
instructions at high speed,
synchronized by the system clock
The CPU executes
successive program
instructions at reduced
speed, synchronized
by the subclock
Sleep mode
Program halt state
Power-down
modes
A state in which some
or all of the chip
functions are stopped
to conserve power
Standby mode
Exception-
handling state
A transient state in which the CPU changes
the processing flow due to a reset or an interrupt
Figure 2.11 CPU Operation States
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 37 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
Reset cleared
Reset occurs
Reset state
Exception-handling state
Reset
occurs
Interrupt
source
Reset
occurs
Interrupt
source
Exception-
handling
complete
Program halt state
Program execution state
SLEEP instruction executed
Figure 2.12 State Transitions
2.8
Usage Notes
2.8.1
Notes on Data Access to Empty Areas
The address space of this LSI includes empty areas in addition to the ROM, RAM, and on-chip
I/O registers areas available to the user. When data is transferred from CPU to empty areas, the
transferred data will be lost. This action may also cause the CPU to malfunction. When data is
transferred from an empty area to CPU, the contents of the data cannot be guaranteed.
2.8.2
EEPMOV Instruction
EEPMOV is a block-transfer instruction and transfers the byte size of data indicated by R4L,
which starts from the address indicated by R5, to the address indicated by R6. Set R4L and R6 so
that the end address of the destination address (value of R6 + R4L) does not exceed H'FFFF (the
value of R6 must not change from H'FFFF to H'0000 during execution).
2.8.3
Bit Manipulation Instruction
The BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST instructions read data from the specified address in
byte units, manipulate the data of the target bit, and write data to the same address again in byte
units. Special care is required when using these instructions in cases where two registers are
assigned to the same address or when a bit is directly manipulated for a port, because this may
rewrite data of a bit other than the bit to be manipulated.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 38 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
(1) Bit manipulation for two registers assigned to the same address
Example: Bit manipulation for the timer load register and timer counter
(Applicable for timer B and timer C, not for the group of this LSI.)
Figure 2.13 shows an example of a timer in which two timer registers are assigned to the same
address. When a bit manipulation instruction accesses the timer load register and timer counter of
a reloadable timer, since these two registers share the same address, the following operations takes
place.
1. Data is read in byte units.
2. The CPU sets or resets the bit to be manipulated with the bit manipulation instruction.
3. The written data is written again in byte units to the timer load register.
The timer is counting, so the value read is not necessarily the same as the value in the timer load
register. As a result, bits other than the intended bit in the timer counter may be modified and the
modified value may be written to the timer load register.
Read
Count clock
Timer counter
Reload
Write
Timer load register
Internal bus
Figure 2.13 Example of Timer Configuration with Two Registers Allocated to
Same Address
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 39 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
Example 2: The BSET instruction is executed for port 5.
P57 and P56 are input pins, with a low-level signal input at P57 and a high-level signal input at
P56. P55 to P50 are output pins and output low-level signals. An example to output a high-level
signal at P50 with a BSET instruction is shown below.
•
Prior to executing BSET
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Pin state
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
PCR5
PDR5
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
•
BSET instruction executed
BSET #0, @PDR5
The BSET instruction is executed for port 5.
•
After executing BSET
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Pin state
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
High
level
PCR5
PDR5
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
•
Description on operation
1. When the BSET instruction is executed, first the CPU reads port 5.
Since P57 and P56 are input pins, the CPU reads the pin states (low-level and high-level
input).
P55 to P50 are output pins, so the CPU reads the value in PDR5. In this example PDR5 has a
value of H'80, but the value read by the CPU is H'40.
2. Next, the CPU sets bit 0 of the read data to 1, changing the PDR5 data to H'41.
3. Finally, the CPU writes H'41 to PDR5, completing execution of BSET.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 40 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
As a result of the BSET instruction, bit 0 in PDR5 becomes 1, and P50 outputs a high-level
signal. However, bits 7 and 6 of PDR5 end up with different values. To prevent this problem,
store a copy of the PDR5 data in a work area in memory. Perform the bit manipulation on the
data in the work area, then write this data to PDR5.
•
Prior to executing BSET
MOV.B
MOV.B
MOV.B
#80, R0L
R0L, @RAM0
R0L, @PDR5
The PDR5 value (H'80) is written to a work area in
memory (RAM0) as well as to PDR5.
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Pin state
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
PCR5
PDR5
RAM0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
•
BSET instruction executed
BSET #0, @RAM0
The BSET instruction is executed designating the PDR5
work area (RAM0).
•
After executing BSET
MOV.B
MOV.B
@RAM0, R0L
R0L, @PDR5
The work area (RAM0) value is written to PDR5.
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Pin state
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
High
level
PCR5
PDR5
RAM0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 41 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
(2) Bit Manipulation in a Register Containing a Write-Only Bit
Example 3: BCLR instruction executed designating port 5 control register PCR5
P57 and P56 are input pins, with a low-level signal input at P57 and a high-level signal input at
P56. P55 to P50 are output pins that output low-level signals. An example of setting the P50 pin as
an input pin by the BCLR instruction is shown below. It is assumed that a high-level signal will be
input to this input pin.
•
Prior to executing BCLR
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Pin state
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
PCR5
PDR5
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
•
BCLR instruction executed
BCLR #0, @PCR5
The BCLR instruction is executed for PCR5.
•
After executing BCLR
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Pin state
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Input
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
High
level
PCR5
PDR5
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
•
Description on operation
1. When the BCLR instruction is executed, first the CPU reads PCR5. Since PCR5 is a write-only
register, the CPU reads a value of H'FF, even though the PCR5 value is actually H'3F.
2. Next, the CPU clears bit 0 in the read data to 0, changing the data to H'FE.
3. Finally, H'FE is written to PCR5 and BCLR instruction execution ends.
As a result of this operation, bit 0 in PCR5 becomes 0, making P50 an input port. However,
bits 7 and 6 in PCR5 change to 1, so that P57 and P56 change from input pins to output pins.
To prevent this problem, store a copy of the PCR5 data in a work area in memory and
manipulate data of the bit in the work area, then write this data to PCR5.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 42 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
•
Prior to executing BCLR
MOV.B
MOV.B
MOV.B
#3F, R0L
R0L, @RAM0
R0L, @PCR5
The PCR5 value (H'3F) is written to a work area in
memory (RAM0) as well as to PCR5.
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Pin state
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
PCR5
PDR5
RAM0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
•
BCLR instruction executed
BCLR #0, @RAM0
The BCLR instructions executed for the PCR5 work area
(RAM0).
•
After executing BCLR
MOV.B
MOV.B
@RAM0, R0L
R0L, @PCR5
The work area (RAM0) value is written to PCR5.
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Pin state
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
High
level
PCR5
PDR5
RAM0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 43 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 2 CPU
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 44 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 3 Exception Handling
Section 3 Exception Handling
Exception handling may be caused by a reset, a trap instruction (TRAPA), or interrupts.
Reset
•
A reset has the highest exception priority. Exception handling starts as soon as the reset is cleared
by the RES pin. The chip is also reset when the watchdog timer overflows, and exception handling
starts. Exception handling is the same as exception handling by the RES pin.
•
Trap Instruction
Exception handling starts when a trap instruction (TRAPA) is executed. The TRAPA instruction
generates a vector address corresponding to a vector number from 0 to 3, as specified in the
instruction code. Exception handling can be executed at all times in the program execution state.
•
Interrupts
External interrupts other than NMI and internal interrupts other than address break are masked by
the I bit in CCR, and kept masked while the I bit is set to 1. Exception handling starts when the
current instruction or exception handling ends, if an interrupt request has been issued.
3.1
Exception Sources and Vector Address
Table 3.1 shows the vector addresses and priority of each exception handling. When more than
one interrupt is requested, handling is performed from the interrupt with the highest priority.
Table 3.1 Exception Sources and Vector Address
Relative Module Exception Sources
Vector Number Vector Address Priority
RES pin
Reset
0
H'0000 to H'0001 High
Watchdog timer
Reserved for system use
1 to 6
7
H'0002 to H'000D
H'000E to H'000F
External interrupt NMI
pin
CPU
Trap instruction (#0)
8
H'0010 to H'0011
H'0012 to H'0013
H'0014 to H'0015
H'0016 to H'0017
H'0018 to H'0019 Low
(#1)
9
(#2)
(#3)
10
11
12
Address break
Break conditions satisfied
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 45 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 3 Exception Handling
Relative Module Exception Sources
Vector Number Vector Address Priority
CPU
Direct transition by executing 13
the SLEEP instruction
H'001A to H'001B High
External interrupt IRQ0
14
H'001C to H'001D
pin
Low-voltage detection
interrupt*1
IRQ3
17
18
20
21
H'0022 to H'0023
H'0024 to H'0025
H’0028 to H’0029
H’002A to H’002B
WKP
Reserved for system use
Timer W
Timer W input capture A
/compare match A
Timer W input capture B
/compare match B
Timer W input capture C
/compare match C
Timer W input capture D
/compare match D
Timer W overflow
Timer V
SCI3
Timer V compare match A
Timer V compare match B
Timer V overflow
22
23
H'002C to H'002D
H'002E to H'002F
SCI3 receive data full
SCI3 transmit data empty
SCI3 transmit end
SCI3 receive error
A/D converter
SCI3_2
A/D conversion end
25
32
H'0032 to H'0033
H'0040 to H'0041
SCI3_2 receive data full
SCI3_2 transmit data empty
SCI3_2 transmit end
SCI3_2 receive error
SCI3_3*2
SCI3_3 receive data full
SCI3_3 transmit data empty
SCI3_3 transmit end
34
H'0044 to H'0045
SCI3_3 receive error
Low
Notes: 1. A low-voltage detection interrupt is enabled only in the product with an on-chip power-
on reset and low-voltage detection circuit.
2. The SCI3_3 function is incorporated in the H8/36024.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 46 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 3 Exception Handling
3.2
Register Descriptions
Interrupts are controlled by the following registers.
•
•
•
•
•
Interrupt edge select register 1 (IEGR1)
Interrupt edge select register 2 (IEGR2)
Interrupt enable register 1 (IENR1)
Interrupt flag register 1 (IRR1)
Wakeup interrupt flag register (IWPR)
3.2.1
Interrupt Edge Select Register 1 (IEGR1)
IEGR1 selects the direction of an edge that generates interrupt requests of pins and IRQ3 and
IRQ0.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
0
−
Reserved
This bit is always read as 0.
Reserved
6 to 4
3
All 1
0
These bits are always read as 1.
IRQ3 Edge Select
IEG3
R/W
0: Falling edge of IRQ3 pin input is detected
1: Rising edge of IRQ3 pin input is detected
Reserved
2, 1
0
All 0
0
These bits are always read as 0.
IRQ0 Edge Select
IEG0
R/W
0: Falling edge of IRQ0 pin input is detected
1: Rising edge of IRQ0 pin input is detected
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 47 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 3 Exception Handling
3.2.2
Interrupt Edge Select Register 2 (IEGR2)
IEGR2 selects the direction of an edge that generates interrupt requests of the pins ADTRG and
WKP5 to WKP0.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7, 6
All 1
0
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
WKP5 Edge Select
5
4
3
2
1
0
WPEG5
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0: Falling edge of WKP5 (ADTRG) pin input is detected
1: Rising edge of WKP5 (ADTRG) pin input is detected
WKP4 Edge Select
WPEG4
WPEG3
WPEG2
WPEG1
WPEG0
0
0
0
0
0
0: Falling edge of WKP4 pin input is detected
1: Rising edge of WKP4 pin input is detected
WKP3 Edge Select
0: Falling edge of WKP3 pin input is detected
1: Rising edge of WKP3 pin input is detected
WKP2 Edge Select
0: Falling edge of WKP2 pin input is detected
1: Rising edge of WKP2 pin input is detected
WKP1Edge Select
0: Falling edge of WKP1 pin input is detected
1: Rising edge of WKP1 pin input is detected
WKP0 Edge Select
0: Falling edge of WKP0 pin input is detected
1: Rising edge of WKP0 pin input is detected
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 48 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 3 Exception Handling
3.2.3
Interrupt Enable Register 1 (IENR1)
IENR1 enables direct transition interrupts, and external pin interrupts.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
IENDT
0
R/W
Direct Transfer Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, direct transition interrupt
requests are enabled.
6
5
0
0
Reserved
This bit is always read as 0.
Wakeup Interrupt Enable
IENWP
R/W
This bit is an enable bit, which is common to the pins
WKP5 to WKP0. When the bit is set to 1, interrupt
requests are enabled.
4
3
1
0
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1.
IRQ3 Interrupt Enable
IEN3
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, interrupt requests of the IRQ3 pin
are enabled.
2, 1
0
All 0
0
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0.
IRQ0 Interrupt Enable
IEN0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, interrupt requests of the IRQ0 pin
are enabled.
When disabling interrupts by clearing bits in an interrupt enable register, or when clearing bits in
an interrupt flag register, always do so while interrupts are masked (I = 1). If the above clear
operations are performed while I = 0, and as a result a conflict arises between the clear instruction
and an interrupt request, exception handling for the interrupt will be executed after the clear
instruction has been executed.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 49 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 3 Exception Handling
3.2.4
Interrupt Flag Register 1 (IRR1)
IRR1 is a status flag register for direct transition interrupts, and IRQ3 and IRQ0 interrupt requests.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
IRRDT
0
R/W
Direct Transfer Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
When a direct transfer is made by executing a SLEEP
instruction while DTON in SYSCR2 is set to 1.
[Clearing condition]
When IRRDT is cleared by writing 0
Reserved
6
0
This bit is always read as 0.
Reserved
5, 4
3
All 1
0
These bits are always read as 1.
IRQ3 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
IRRI3
R/W
When IRQ3 pin is designated for interrupt input and the
designated signal edge is detected.
[Clearing condition]
When IRRI3 is cleared by writing 0
Reserved
2, 1
0
All 0
0
These bits are always read as 0.
IRQ0 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
IRRl0
R/W
When IRQ0 pin is designated for interrupt input and the
designated signal edge is detected.
[Clearing condition]
When IRRI0 is cleared by writing 0
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 50 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 3 Exception Handling
3.2.5
Wakeup Interrupt Flag Register (IWPR)
IWPR is a status flag register for WKP5 to WKP0 interrupt requests.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7, 6
All 1
0
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
WKP5 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
5
4
3
2
1
IWPF5
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
When WKP5 pin is designated for interrupt input and the
designated signal edge is detected.
[Clearing condition]
When IWPF5 is cleared by writing 0.
WKP4 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
IWPF4
IWPF3
IWPF2
IWPF1
0
0
0
0
When WKP4 pin is designated for interrupt input and the
designated signal edge is detected.
[Clearing condition]
When IWPF4 is cleared by writing 0.
WKP3 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
When WKP3 pin is designated for interrupt input and the
designated signal edge is detected.
[Clearing condition]
When IWPF3 is cleared by writing 0.
WKP2 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
When WKP2 pin is designated for interrupt input and the
designated signal edge is detected.
[Clearing condition]
When IWPF2 is cleared by writing 0.
WKP1 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
When WKP1 pin is designated for interrupt input and the
designated signal edge is detected.
[Clearing condition]
When IWPF1 is cleared by writing 0.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 51 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 3 Exception Handling
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
0
IWPF0
0
R/W
WKP0 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
When WKP0 pin is designated for interrupt input and the
designated signal edge is detected.
[Clearing condition]
When IWPF0 is cleared by writing 0.
3.3
Reset Exception Handling
When the RES pin goes low, all processing halts and this LSI enters the reset. The internal state of
the CPU and the registers of the on-chip peripheral modules are initialized by the reset. To ensure
that this LSI is reset at power-up, hold the RES pin low until the clock pulse generator output
stabilizes. To reset the chip during operation, hold the RES pin low for at least 10 system clock
cycles. When the RES pin goes high after being held low for the necessary time, this LSI starts
reset exception handling. The reset exception handling sequence is shown in figure 3.1.
The reset exception handling sequence is as follows. However, for the reset exception handling
sequence of the product with on-chip power-on reset circuit, refer to section 15, Power-On Reset
and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits (Optional).
1. Set the I bit in the condition code register (CCR) to 1.
2. The CPU generates a reset exception handling vector address (from H'0000 to H'0001), the
data in that address is sent to the program counter (PC) as the start address, and program
execution starts from that address.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 52 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 3 Exception Handling
3.4
Interrupt Exception Handling
3.4.1
External Interrupts
There are external interrupts, NMI, IRQ3, IRQ0, and WKP.
(1) NMI
NMI interrupt is requested by input falling edge to pin NMI.
NMI is the highest interrupt, and can always be accepted without depending on the I bit value in
CCR.
(2) IRQ3 to IRQ0 Interrupts
IRQ3 to IRQ0 interrupts are requested by input signals to pins IRQ3 to IRQ0. These four
interrupts are given different vector addresses, and are detected individually by either rising edge
sensing or falling edge sensing, depending on the settings of bits IEG3 to IEG0 in IEGR1.
When pins IRQ3 to IRQ0 are designated for interrupt input in PMR1 and the designated signal
edge is input, the corresponding bit in IRR1 is set to 1, requesting the CPU of an interrupt. When
IRQ3 to IRQ0 interrupt is accepted, the I bit is set to 1 in CCR. These interrupts can be masked by
setting bits IEN3 to IEN0 in IENR1.
(3) WKP5 to WKP0 Interrupts
WKP5 to WKP0 interrupts are requested by input signals to pins WKP5 to WKP0. These six
interrupts have the same vector addresses, and are detected individually by either rising edge
sensing or falling edge sensing, depending on the settings of bits WPEG5 to WPEG0 in IEGR2.
When pins WKP5 to WKP0 are designated for interrupt input in PMR5 and the designated signal
edge is input, the corresponding bit in IWPR is set to 1, requesting the CPU of an interrupt. These
interrupts can be masked by setting bit IENWP in IENR1.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 53 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 3 Exception Handling
Reset cleared
Initial program
instruction prefetch
Vector fetch Internal
processing
RES
ø
Internal
address bus
(1)
(2)
Internal read
signal
Internal write
signal
Internal data
bus (16 bits)
(2)
(3)
(1) Reset exception handling vector address (H'0000)
(2) Program start address
(3) Initial program instruction
Figure 3.1 Reset Sequence
3.4.2
Internal Interrupts
Each on-chip peripheral module has a flag to show the interrupt request status and the enable bit to
enable or disable the interrupt. For direct transfer interrupt requests generated by execution of a
SLEEP instruction, this function is included in IRR1 and IENR1.
When an on-chip peripheral module requests an interrupt, the corresponding interrupt request
status flag is set to 1, requesting the CPU of an interrupt. When this interrupt is accepted, the I bit
is set to 1 in CCR. These interrupts can be masked by writing 0 to clear the corresponding enable
bit.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 54 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 3 Exception Handling
3.4.3
Interrupt Handling Sequence
Interrupts are controlled by an interrupt controller.
Interrupt operation is described as follows.
1. If an interrupt occurs while the NMI or interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request
signal is sent to the interrupt controller.
2. When multiple interrupt requests are generated, the interrupt controller requests to the CPU for
the interrupt handling with the highest priority at that time according to table 3.1. Other
interrupt requests are held pending.
3. The CPU accepts the NMI or address break without depending on the I bit value. Other
interrupt requests are accepted, if the I bit is cleared to 0 in CCR; if the I bit is set to 1, the
interrupt request is held pending.
4. If the CPU accepts the interrupt after processing of the current instruction is completed,
interrupt exception handling will begin. First, both PC and CCR are pushed onto the stack. The
state of the stack at this time is shown in figure 3.2. The PC value pushed onto the stack is the
address of the first instruction to be executed upon return from interrupt handling.
5. Then, the I bit of CCR is set to 1, masking further interrupts excluding the NMI and address
break. Upon return from interrupt handling, the values of I bit and other bits in CCR will be
restored and returned to the values prior to the start of interrupt exception handling.
6. Next, the CPU generates the vector address corresponding to the accepted interrupt, and
transfers the address to PC as a start address of the interrupt handling-routine. Then a program
starts executing from the address indicated in PC.
Figure 3.3 shows a typical interrupt sequence where the program area is in the on-chip ROM and
the stack area is in the on-chip RAM.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 55 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 3 Exception Handling
SP – 4
SP – 3
SP – 2
SP – 1
SP (R7)
SP (R7)
SP + 1
SP + 2
SP + 3
SP + 4
CCR
CCR*3
PCH
PCL
Even address
Stack area
Prior to start of interrupt
exception handling
After completion of interrupt
exception handling
PC and CCR
saved to stack
Legend:
PC
PC
H
L
: Upper 8 bits of program counter (PC)
Lower 8 bits of program counter (PC)
:
CCR: Condition code register
SP: Stack pointer
1. PC shows the address of the first instruction to be executed upon return from the interrupt
handling routine.
Notes:
2. Register contents must always be saved and restored by word length, starting from
an even-numbered address.
3. Ignored when returning from the interrupt handling routine.
Figure 3.2 Stack Status after Exception Handling
3.4.4
Interrupt Response Time
Table 3.2 shows the number of wait states after an interrupt request flag is set until the first
instruction of the interrupt handling-routine is executed.
Table 3.2 Interrupt Wait States
Item
States
Total
Waiting time for completion of executing instruction*
Saving of PC and CCR to stack
Vector fetch
1 to 23
15 to 37
4
2
4
4
Instruction fetch
Internal processing
Note:
*
Not including EEPMOV instruction.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 56 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 3 Exception Handling
Figure 3.3 Interrupt Sequence
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 57 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 3 Exception Handling
3.5
Usage Notes
3.5.1
Interrupts after Reset
If an interrupt is accepted after a reset and before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized, the PC and
CCR will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this, all interrupt requests,
including NMI, are disabled immediately after a reset. Since the first instruction of a program is
always executed immediately after the reset state ends, make sure that this instruction initializes
the stack pointer (example: MOV.W #xx: 16, SP).
3.5.2
Notes on Stack Area Use
When word data is accessed, the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0. Access to the
stack always takes place in word size, so the stack pointer (SP: R7) should never indicate an odd
address. Use PUSH Rn (MOV.W Rn, @–SP) or POP Rn (MOV.W @SP+, Rn) to save or restore
register values.
3.5.3
Notes on Rewriting Port Mode Registers
When a port mode register is rewritten to switch the functions of external interrupt pins, IRQ3,
IRQ0, and WKP5 to WKP0, the interrupt request flag may be set to 1.
Figure 3.4 shows a port mode register setting and interrupt request flag clearing procedure.
When switching a pin function, mask the interrupt before setting the bit in the port mode register.
After accessing the port mode register, execute at least one instruction (e.g., NOP), then clear the
interrupt request flag from 1 to 0.
Interrupts masked. (Another possibility
is to disable the relevant interrupt in
interrupt enable register 1.)
←
CCR I bit
1
Set port mode register bit
After setting the port mode register bit,
first execute at least one instruction
(e.g., NOP), then clear the interrupt
request flag to 0
Execute NOP instruction
Clear interrupt request flag to 0
←
Interrupt mask cleared
CCR I bit
0
Figure 3.4 Port Mode Register Setting and Interrupt Request Flag Clearing Procedure
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 58 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 4 Address Break
Section 4 Address Break
The address break simplifies on-board program debugging. It requests an address break interrupt
when the set break condition is satisfied. The interrupt request is not affected by the I bit of CCR.
Break conditions that can be set include instruction execution at a specific address and a
combination of access and data at a specific address. With the address break function, the
execution start point of a program containing a bug is detected and execution is branched to the
correcting program. Figure 4.1 shows a block diagram of the address break.
Internal address bus
Comparator
BARH
BARL
ABRKCR
ABRKSR
Interrupt
generation
control circuit
BDRH
BDRL
Comparator
Interrupt
Legend:
BARH, BARL: Break address register
BDRH, BDRL: Break data register
ABRKCR:
ABRKSR:
Address break control register
Address break status register
Figure 4.1 Block Diagram of Address Break
4.1
Register Descriptions
Address break has the following registers.
•
•
•
Address break control register (ABRKCR)
Address break status register (ABRKSR)
Break address register (BARH, BARL)
ABK0001A_000020020200
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 59 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 4 Address Break
•
Break data register (BDRH, BDRL)
4.1.1 Address Break Control Register (ABRKCR)
ABRKCR sets address break conditions.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
RTINTE
1
R/W
RTE Interrupt Enable
When this bit is 0, the interrupt immediately after
executing RTE is masked and then one instruction must
be executed. When this bit is 1, the interrupt is not
masked.
6
5
CSEL1
CSEL0
0
0
R/W
R/W
Condition Select 1 and 0
These bits set address break conditions.
00: Instruction execution cycle
01: CPU data read cycle
10: CPU data write cycle
11: CPU data read/write cycle
Address Compare Condition Select 2 to 0
4
3
2
ACMP2
ACMP1
ACMP0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
These bits comparison condition between the address set
in BAR and the internal address bus.
000: Compares 16-bit addresses
001: Compares upper 12-bit addresses
010: Compares upper 8-bit addresses
011: Compares upper 4-bit addresses
1XX: Reserved (setting prohibited)
Data Compare Condition Select 1 and 0
1
0
DCMP1
DCMP0
0
0
R/W
R/W
These bits set the comparison condition between the data
set in BDR and the internal data bus.
00: No data comparison
01: Compares lower 8-bit data between BDRL and data
bus
10: Compares upper 8-bit data between BDRH and data
bus
11: Compares 16-bit data between BDR and data bus
Legend: X: Don't care.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 60 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 4 Address Break
When an address break is set in the data read cycle or data write cycle, the data bus used will
depend on the combination of the byte/word access and address. Table 4.1 shows the access and
data bus used. When an I/O register space with an 8-bit data bus width is accessed in word size, a
byte access is generated twice. For details on data widths of each register, see section 17.1,
Register Addresses (Address Order).
Table 4.1 Access and Data Bus Used
Word Access
Byte Access
Even Address Odd Address Even Address Odd Address
ROM space
RAM space
Upper 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
Lower 8 bits
Lower 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
I/O register with 8-bit data bus Upper 8 bits
width
I/O register with 16-bit data
bus width
Upper 8 bits
Lower 8 bits
—
—
4.1.2
Address Break Status Register (ABRKSR)
ABRKSR consists of the address break interrupt flag and the address break interrupt enable bit.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
ABIF
0
R/W
Address Break Interrupt Flag
[Setting condition]
When the condition set in ABRKCR is satisfied
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written after ABIF=1 is read
Address Break Interrupt Enable
6
ABIE
—
0
R/W
—
When this bit is 1, an address break interrupt request is
enabled.
5 to 0
All 1
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 61 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 4 Address Break
4.1.3
Break Address Registers (BARH, BARL)
BARH and BARL are 16-bit read/write registers that set the address for generating an address
break interrupt. When setting the address break condition to the instruction execution cycle, set
the first byte address of the instruction. The initial value of this register is H'FFFF.
4.1.4
Break Data Registers (BDRH, BDRL)
BDRH and BDRL are 16-bit read/write registers that set the data for generating an address break
interrupt. BDRH is compared with the upper 8-bit data bus. BDRL is compared with the lower 8-
bit data bus. When memory or registers are accessed by byte, the upper 8-bit data bus is used for
even and odd addresses in the data transmission. Therefore, comparison data must be set in
BDRH for byte access. For word access, the data bus used depends on the address. See section
4.1.1, Address Break Control Register (ABRKCR), for details. The initial value of this register is
undefined.
4.2
Operation
When the ABIF and ABIE bits in ABRKSR are set to 1, the address break function generates an
interrupt request to the CPU. The ABIF bit in ABRKSR is set to 1 by the combination of the
address set in BAR, the data set in BDR, and the conditions set in ABRKCR. When the interrupt
request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after the instruction being executed ends.
The address break interrupt is not masked because of the I bit in CCR of the CPU.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 62 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 4 Address Break
Figures 4.2 show the operation examples of the address break interrupt setting.
When the address break is specified in instruction execution cycle
Register setting
• ABRKCR = H'80
• BAR = H'025A
Program
0258 NOP
* 025A NOP
025C MOV.W @H'025A,R0
0260 NOP
Underline indicates the address
to be stacked.
0262 NOP
:
:
NOP
NOP
MOV
MOV
instruc- instruc- instruc- instruc-
tion
tion
tion 1
tion 2
Internal
prefetch prefetch prefetch prefetch processing
Stack save
φ
Address
bus
0258
025A
025C
025E
SP-2
SP-4
Interrupt
request
Interrupt acceptance
Figure 4.2 Address Break Interrupt Operation Example (1)
When the address break is specified in the data read cycle
Register setting
• ABRKCR = H'A0
• BAR = H'025A
Program
0258 NOP
025A NOP
* 025C MOV.W @H'025A,R0
0260 NOP
0262 NOP
Underline indicates the address
to be stacked.
:
:
MOV
MOV
NOP
MOV
NOP
Next
instruc- instruc- instruc- instruc- instruc- instru-
tion 1
tion 2
tion
tion
tion
ction
Internal Stack
prefetch prefetch prefetch execution prefetch prefetch processing save
φ
Address
bus
025C
025E
0260
025A
0262
0264
SP-2
Interrupt
request
Interrupt acceptance
Figure 4.2 Address Break Interrupt Operation Example (2)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 63 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 4 Address Break
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 64 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generators
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generators
Clock oscillator circuitry (CPG: clock pulse generator) is provided on-chip, including a system
clock pulse generator. The system clock pulse generator consists of a system clock oscillator, a
duty correction circuit, and system clock dividers.
Figure 5.1 shows a block diagram of the clock pulse generators.
φOSC
φ
φ
φ
φ
OSC/8
φ
System
clock
divider
System
clock
oscillator
Duty
correction
circuit
OSC1
OSC2
φOSC
(fOSC
φOSC
(fOSC
OSC/16
OSC/32
OSC/64
)
)
φ/2
Prescaler S
(13 bits)
to
φ/8192
System clock pulse generator
Figure 5.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generators
The basic clock signals that drive the CPU and on-chip peripheral modules are system clocks (φ).
The system clock is divided into φ/8192 to φ/2 by prescaler S and they are supplied to respective
peripheral modules.
5.1
System Clock Generator
Clock pulses can be supplied to the system clock divider either by connecting a crystal or ceramic
resonator, or by providing external clock input. Figure 5.2 shows a block diagram of the system
clock generator.
OSC2
LPM
OSC1
LPM: Low-power mode (standby mode, subsleep mode)
Figure 5.2 Block Diagram of System Clock Generator
CPG0200A_000020020200
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 65 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generators
5.1.1
Connecting Crystal Resonator
Figure 5.3 shows a typical method of connecting a crystal resonator. An AT-cut parallel-resonance
crystal resonator should be used. Figure 5.4 shows the equivalent circuit of a crystal resonator. A
resonator having the characteristics given in table 5.1 should be used.
C1
OSC1
OSC2
C2
C1 = C2 = 12 pF 20ꢀ
Figure 5.3 Typical Connection to Crystal Resonator
LS
RS
CS
OSC1
OSC2
C0
Figure 5.4 Equivalent Circuit of Crystal Resonator
Table 5.1 Crystal Resonator Parameters
Frequency (MHz)
RS (max)
2
4
8
10
16
20
500 Ω
7 pF
120 Ω
7 pF
80 Ω
7 pF
60 Ω
7 pF
50 Ω
7 pF
40 Ω
7 pF
C0 (max)
5.1.2
Connecting Ceramic Resonator
Figure 5.5 shows a typical method of connecting a ceramic resonator.
C1
OSC1
C2
OSC2
C1 = 30 pF 10ꢀ
2 = 30 pF 10ꢀ
C
Figure 5.5 Typical Connection to Ceramic Resonator
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 66 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generators
5.1.3
External Clock Input Method
Connect an external clock signal to pin OSC1, and leave pin OSC2 open. Figure 5.6 shows a typical
connection. The duty cycle of the external clock signal must be 45 to 55%.
OSC1
OSC 2
External clock input
Open
Figure 5.6 Example of External Clock Input
5.2
Prescalers
5.2.1
Prescaler S
Prescaler S is a 13-bit counter using the system clock (φ) as its input clock. It is incremented once
per clock period. Prescaler S is initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and starts counting on exit from
the reset state. In standby mode and subsleep mode, the system clock pulse generator stops.
Prescaler S also stops and is initialized to H'0000. The CPU cannot read or write prescaler S.
The output from prescaler S is shared by the on-chip peripheral modules. The divider ratio can be
set separately for each on-chip peripheral function. In active mode and sleep mode, the clock input
to prescaler S is determined by the division factor designated by MA2 to MA0 in SYSCR2.
5.3
Usage Notes
5.3.1
Note on Resonators
Resonator characteristics are closely related to board design and should be carefully evaluated by
the user, referring to the examples shown in this section. Resonator circuit constants will differ
depending on the resonator element, stray capacitance in its interconnecting circuit, and other
factors. Suitable constants should be determined in consultation with the resonator element
manufacturer. Design the circuit so that the resonator element never receives voltages exceeding
its maximum rating.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 67 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generators
5.3.2
Notes on Board Design
When using a crystal resonator (ceramic resonator), place the resonator and its load capacitors as
close as possible to the OSC1 and OSC2 pins. Other signal lines should be routed away from the
oscillator circuit to prevent induction from interfering with correct oscillation (see figure 5.7).
Avoid
Signal A Signal B
C1
C2
OSC1
OSC2
Figure 5.7 Example of Incorrect Board Design
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 68 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
This LSI has five modes of operation after a reset. These include a normal active mode and three
power-down modes, in which power consumption is significantly reduced. Module standby mode
reduces power consumption by selectively halting on-chip module functions.
•
Active mode
The CPU and all on-chip peripheral modules are operable on the system clock. The system
clock frequency can be selected from φosc, φosc/8, φosc/16, φosc/32, and φosc/64.
•
•
•
Sleep mode
The CPU halts. On-chip peripheral modules are operable on the system clock.
Standby mode
The CPU and all on-chip peripheral modules halt.
Subsleep mode
The CPU and all on-chip peripheral modules halt. I/O ports keep the same states as before the
transition.
•
Module standby mode
Independent of the above modes, power consumption can be reduced by halting on-chip
peripheral modules that are not used in module units.
6.1
Register Descriptions
The registers related to power-down modes are listed below.
•
•
•
•
System control register 1 (SYSCR1)
System control register 2 (SYSCR2)
Module standby control register 1 (MSTCR1)
Module standby control register 2 (MSTCR2)
LPW3003A_000020020200
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 69 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
6.1.1
System Control Register 1 (SYSCR1)
SYSCR1 controls the power-down modes, as well as SYSCR2.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
SSBY
0
R/W
Software Standby
This bit selects the mode to transit after the execution of
the SLEEP instruction.
0: a transition is made to sleep mode
1: a transition is made to standby mode.
For details, see table 6.2.
6
5
4
STS2
STS1
STS0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Standby Timer Select 2 to 0
These bits designate the time the CPU and peripheral
modules wait for stable clock operation after exiting from
standby mode, to active mode or sleep mode due to an
interrupt. The designation should be made according to
the clock frequency so that the waiting time is at least 6.5
ms. The relationship between the specified value and the
number of wait states is shown in table 6.1. When an
external clock is to be used, the minimum value (STS2 =
STS1 = STS0 =1) is recommended.
3 to 0
All 0
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0.
Table 6.1 Operating Frequency and Waiting Time
Bit Name
Operating Frequency
20 MHz 16 MHz 10 MHz 8 MHz 4 MHz 2 MHz 1 MHz 0.5 MHz
STS2 STS1 STS0 Waiting Time
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
8,192 states
16,384 states
32,768 states
65,536 states
0.4
0.8
1.6
3.3
0.5
0.8
1.0
2.0
4.1
8.1
16.4
32.8
65.5
131.1
1.0
1.6
2.0
4.1
8.2
16.4
32.8
65.5
2.0
3.3
4.1
8.2
16.4
32.8
65.5
0.51
0.06
0.01
4.1
6.6
8.2
16.4
32.8
0.26
0.03
0.00
1
131,072 states 6.6
8.2
13.1
0.10
0.01
0.00
16.4
0.13
0.02
0.00
131.1 262.1
1,024 states
128 states
16 states
0.05
0.06
0.00
0.00
1.02
0.13
0.02
2.05
0.26
0.03
0.00
0.00
Note: Time unit is ms.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 70 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
6.1.2
System Control Register 2 (SYSCR2)
SYSCR2 controls the power-down modes, as well as SYSCR1.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
SMSEL
0
R/W
Sleep Mode Selection
This bit selects the mode to transit after the execution of
a SLEEP instruction, as well as bit SSBY of SYSCR1.
For details, see table 6.2.
Reserved
6
5
0
0
This bit is always read as 0.
Direct Transfer on Flag
DTON
R/W
This bit selects the mode to transit after the execution of
a SLEEP instruction, as well as bit SSBY of SYSCR1.
For details, see table 6.2.
4
3
2
MA2
MA1
MA0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Active Mode Clock Select 2 to 0
These bits select the operating clock frequency in active
and sleep modes. The operating clock frequency
changes to the set frequency after the SLEEP instruction
is executed.
0XX: φOSC
100: φOSC/8
101: φOSC/16
110: φOSC/32
111: φOSC/64
1, 0
All 0
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0.
Legend: X : Don't care.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 71 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
6.1.3
Module Standby Control Register 1 (MSTCR1)
MSTCR1 allows the on-chip peripheral modules to enter a standby state in module units.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7, 6
All 0
0
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0.
SCI3 Module Standby
5
4
MSTS3
MSTAD
R/W
R/W
SCI3 enters standby mode when this bit is set to 1.
A/D Converter Module Standby
0
A/D converter enters standby mode when this bit is set to
1.
3
MSTWD
0
R/W
Watchdog Timer Module Standby
Watchdog timer enters standby mode when this bit is set
to 1.When the internal oscillator is selected for the
watchdog timer clock, the watchdog timer operates
regardless of the setting of this bit.
2
1
0
MSTTW
MSTTV
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
Timer W Module Standby
Timer W enters standby mode when this bit is set to 1.
Timer V Module Standby
Timer V enters standby mode when this bit is set to 1.
Reserved
This bit is always read as 0.
6.1.4
Module Standby Control Register 2 (MSTCR2)
MSTCR2 allows the on-chip peripheral modules to enter a standby state in module units.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
MSTS3_2
0
R/W
SCI3_2 Module Standby
SCI3_2 enters standby mode when this bit is set to1.
Reserved
6 to 0
All 0
These bits are always read as 0.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 72 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
6.2
Mode Transitions and States of LSI
Figure 6.1 shows the possible transitions among these operating modes. A transition is made from
the program execution state to the program halt state of the program by executing a SLEEP
instruction. Interrupts allow for returning from the program halt state to the program execution
state of the program. A direct transition from active mode to active mode changes the operating
frequency. RES input enables transitions from a mode to the reset state. Table 6.2 shows the
transition conditions of each mode after the SLEEP instruction is executed and a mode to return
by an interrupt. Table 6.3 shows the internal states of the LSI in each mode.
Reset state
Program halt state
Standby mode
Program execution state
Active mode
Program halt state
Sleep mode
Direct transition
interrupt
SLEEP
instruction
SLEEP
instruction
Interrupt
Interrupt
SLEEP
instruction
Interrupt
Subsleep mode
Notes: 1. To make a transition to another mode by an interrupt, make sure interrupt handling is after the interrupt
is accepted.
2. Details on the mode transition conditions are given in table 6.2.
Figure 6.1 Mode Transition Diagram
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 73 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
Table 6.2 Transition Mode after SLEEP Instruction Execution and Interrupt Handling
Transition Mode after SLEEP Transition Mode due to
DTON
SSBY
SMSEL
Instruction Execution
Interrupt
Active mode
Active mode
Active mode
—
0
0
0
1
X
0
Sleep mode
1
Subsleep mode
X
0*
Standby mode
1
Active mode (direct transition)
Legend:
X: Don’t care.
*
When a state transition is performed while SMSEL is 1, timer V, SCI3, SCI3_2, SCI3_3
(only for the H8/36024) and the A/D converter are reset, and all registers are set to their
initial values. To use these functions after entering active mode, reset the registers.
Table 6.3 Internal State in Each Operating Mode
Function
Active Mode
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Sleep Mode
Functioning
Halted
Subsleep Mode
Halted
Standby Mode
Halted
System clock oscillator
CPU
operations
Instructions
Registers
Halted
Halted
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
RAM
IO ports
Register contents are
retained, but output is the
high-impedance state.
External
interrupts
IRQ3, IRQ0
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
WKP5 to
WKP0
Peripheral Timer V
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Reset
Reset
functions
Timer W
Retained
Retained (if internal clock
φ is selected as a count
clock, the counter is
incremented by a
subclock)
Watchdog
timer
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Retained
Retained (functioning if the
internal oscillator is
selected as a count clock)
SCI3
Functioning
Functioning
Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset
A/D converter Functioning
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 74 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
6.2.1
Sleep Mode
In sleep mode, CPU operation is halted but the on-chip peripheral modules function at the clock
frequency set by the MA2 to MA0 bits in SYSCR2. CPU register contents are retained. When an
interrupt is requested, sleep mode is cleared and interrupt exception handling starts. Sleep mode is
not cleared if the I bit of the condition code register (CCR) is set to 1 or the requested interrupt is
disabled in the interrupt enable register. a transition is made to subactive mode when the bit is 1.
When the RES pin goes low, the CPU goes into the reset state and sleep mode is cleared.
6.2.2
Standby Mode
In standby mode, the clock pulse generator stops, so the CPU and on-chip peripheral modules stop
functioning. However, as long as the rated voltage is supplied, the contents of CPU registers, on-
chip RAM, and some on-chip peripheral module registers are retained. On-chip RAM contents
will be retained as long as the voltage set by the RAM data retention voltage is provided. The I/O
ports go to the high-impedance state.
Standby mode is cleared by an interrupt. When an interrupt is requested, the system clock pulse
generator starts. After the time set in bits STS2–STS0 in SYSCR1 has elapsed, and interrupt
exception handling starts. Standby mode is not cleared if the I bit of CCR is set to 1 or the
requested interrupt is disabled in the interrupt enable register.
When the RES pin goes low, the system clock pulse generator starts. Since system clock signals
are supplied to the entire chip as soon as the system clock pulse generator starts functioning, the
RES pin must be kept low until the pulse generator output stabilizes. After the pulse generator
output has stabilized, the CPU starts reset exception handling if the RES pin is driven high.
6.2.3
Subsleep Mode
In subsleep mode, the system clock oscillator is halted, and operation of the CPU and on-chip
peripheral modules is halted. As long as a required voltage is applied, the contents of CPU
registers, the on-chip RAM, and some registers of the on-chip peripheral modules are retained. I/O
ports keep the same states as before the transition.
Subsleep mode is cleared by an interrupt. When an interrupt is requested, the system clock
oscillator starts to oscillate. Subsleep mode is cleared and an interrupt exception handling starts
when the time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SYSCR1 elapses. Subsleep mode is not cleared if the I
bit of CCR is 1 or the interrupt is disabled in the interrupt enable bit.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 75 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
6.3
Operating Frequency in Active Mode
Operation in active mode is clocked at the frequency designated by the MA2 to MA0 bits in
SYSCR2. The operating frequency changes to the set frequency after SLEEP instruction
execution.
6.4
Direct Transition
The CPU can execute programs in active mode. The operating frequency can be changed by
making a transition directly from active mode to active mode. A direct transition can be made by
executing a SLEEP instruction while the DTON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1. The direct transition
also enables operating frequency modification in active mode. After the mode transition, direct
transition interrupt exception handling starts.
If the direct transition interrupt is disabled in interrupt enable register 1, a transition is made
instead to sleep mode. Note that if a direct transition is attempted while the I bit in CCR is set to 1,
sleep mode will be entered, and the resulting mode cannot be cleared by means of an interrupt.
6.5
Module Standby Function
The module-standby function can be set to any peripheral module. In module standby mode, the
clock supply to modules stops to enter the power-down mode. Module standby mode enables each
on-chip peripheral module to enter the standby state by setting a bit that corresponds to each
module in MSTCR1 and MSTCR2 to 1 and cancels the mode by clearing the bit to 0.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 76 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 7 ROM
Section 7 ROM
The features of the 32-kbyte (4 kbytes of them are the control program area for E7 or E8) flash
memory built into the HD64F36024 and HD64F36014 are summarized below.
•
Programming/erase methods
The flash memory is programmed 128 bytes at a time. Erase is performed in single-block
units. The flash memory is configured as follows: 1 kbyte × 4 blocks and 28 kbytes × 1
block. To erase the entire flash memory, each block must be erased in turn.
•
•
Reprogramming capability
The flash memory can be reprogrammed up to 1,000 times.
On-board programming
On-board programming/erasing can be done in boot mode, in which the boot program built
into the chip is started to erase or program of the entire flash memory. In normal user
program mode, individual blocks can be erased or programmed.
•
•
Automatic bit rate adjustment
For data transfer in boot mode, this LSI's bit rate can be automatically adjusted to match
the transfer bit rate of the host.
Programming/erasing protection
Sets software protection against flash memory programming/erasing.
ROM3321A_000120030300
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 77 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 7 ROM
7.1
Block Configuration
Figure 7.1 shows the block configuration of 32-kbyte flash memory. The thick lines indicate
erasing units, the narrow lines indicate programming units, and the values are addresses. The flash
memory is divided into 1 kbyte × 4 blocks and 28 kbytes × 1 block. Erasing is performed in these
units. Programming is performed in 128-byte units starting from an address with lower eight bits
H'00 or H'80.
H'0000
H'0080
H'0001
H'0081
H'0002
H'0082
Programming unit: 128 bytes
Programming unit: 128 bytes
Programming unit: 128 bytes
Programming unit: 128 bytes
Programming unit: 128 bytes
H'007F
H'00FF
Erase unit
1kbyte
H'0380
H'0400
H'0480
H'0381
H'0401
H'0481
H'0382
H'0402
H'0481
H'03FF
H'047F
H'04FF
Erase unit
1kbyte
H'0780
H'0800
H'0880
H'0781
H'0801
H'0881
H'0782
H'0802
H'0882
H'07FF
H'087F
H'08FF
Erase unit
1kbyte
H'0B80
H'0C00
H'0C80
H'0B81
H'0C01
H'0C81
H'0B82
H'0C02
H'0C82
H'0BFF
H'0C7F
H'0CFF
Erase unit
1kbyte
H'0F80
H'1000
H'1080
H'0F81
H'1001
H'1081
H'0F82
H'1002
H'1082
H'0FFF
H'107F
H'10FF
Erase unit
28 kbytes
H'7F80
H'7F81
H'7F82
H'7FFF
Figure 7.1 Flash Memory Block Configuration
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 78 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 7 ROM
7.2
Register Descriptions
The flash memory has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
Flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1)
Flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2)
Erase block register 1 (EBR1)
Flash memory enable register (FENR)
7.2.1
Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)
FLMCR1 is a register that makes the flash memory change to program mode, program-verify
mode, erase mode, or erase-verify mode. For details on register setting, refer to section 7.4, Flash
Memory Programming/Erasing.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
—
0
0
—
Reserved
This bit is always read as 0.
Software Write Enable
6
5
4
3
SWE
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, flash memory
programming/erasing is enabled. When this bit is cleared
to 0, other FLMCR1 register bits and all EBR1 bits cannot
be set.
ESU
PSU
EV
0
0
0
Erase Setup
When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to the
erase setup state. When it is cleared to 0, the erase setup
state is cancelled. Set this bit to 1 before setting the E bit
to 1 in FLMCR1.
Program Setup
When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to the
program setup state. When it is cleared to 0, the program
setup state is cancelled. Set this bit to 1 before setting the
P bit in FLMCR1.
Erase-Verify
When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to
erase-verify mode. When it is cleared to 0, erase-verify
mode is cancelled.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 79 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 7 ROM
Initial
Bit Name Value
Bit
R/W
Description
2
PV
0
0
0
R/W
Program-Verify
When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to
program-verify mode. When it is cleared to 0, program-
verify mode is cancelled.
1
0
E
R/W
R/W
Erase
When this bit is set to 1, and while the SWE = 1 and ESU
= 1 bits are 1, the flash memory changes to erase mode.
When it is cleared to 0, erase mode is cancelled.
P
Program
When this bit is set to 1, and while the SWE = 1 and PSU
= 1 bits are 1, the flash memory changes to program
mode. When it is cleared to 0, program mode is
cancelled.
7.2.2
Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)
FLMCR2 is a register that displays the state of flash memory programming/erasing. FLMCR2 is a
read-only register, and should not be written to.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
FLER
0
R
Flash Memory Error
Indicates that an error has occurred during an operation
on flash memory (programming or erasing). When FLER
is set to 1, flash memory goes to the error-protection
state.
See 7.5.3, Error Protection, for details.
Reserved
6 to 0
—
All 0
—
These bits are always read as 0.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 80 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 7 ROM
7.2.3
Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1)
EBR1 specifies the flash memory erase area block. EBR1 is initialized to H'00 when the SWE bit
in FLMCR1 is 0. Do not set more than one bit at a time, as this will cause all the bits in EBR1 to
be automatically cleared to 0.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7 to 5
—
All 0
—
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0.
4
3
2
1
0
EB4
EB3
EB2
EB1
EB0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, 28 kbytes of H'1000 to H'7FFF
will be erased.
When this bit is set to 1, 1 kbyte of H'0C00 to H'0FFF will
be erased.
When this bit is set to 1, 1 kbyte of H'0800 to H'0BFF will
be erased.
When this bit is set to 1, 1 kbyte of H'0400 to H'07FF will
be erased.
When this bit is set to 1, 1 kbyte of H'0000 to H'03FF will
be erased.
7.2.4
Flash Memory Enable Register (FENR)
Bit 7 (FLSHE) in FENR enables or disables the CPU access to the flash memory control registers,
FLMCR1, FLMCR2, and EBR1.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
FLSHE
—
0
R/W
Flash Memory Control Register Enable
Flash memory control registers can be accessed when
this bit is set to 1. Flash memory control registers cannot
be accessed when this bit is set to 0.
6 to 0
All 0
—
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 81 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 7 ROM
7.3
On-Board Programming Modes
There is a mode for programming/erasing of the flash memory; boot mode, which enables on-
board programming/erasing. On-board programming/erasing can also be performed in user
program mode. At reset-start in reset mode, this LSI changes to a mode depending on the TEST
pin settings, NMI pin settings, and input level of each port, as shown in table 7.1. The input level
of each pin must be defined four states before the reset ends.
When changing to boot mode, the boot program built into this LSI is initiated. The boot program
transfers the programming control program from the externally-connected host to on-chip RAM
via SCI3. After erasing the entire flash memory, the programming control program is executed.
This can be used for programming initial values in the on-board state or for a forcible return when
programming/erasing can no longer be done in user program mode. In user program mode,
individual blocks can be erased and programmed by branching to the user program/erase control
program prepared by the user.
Table 7.1 Setting Programming Modes
TEST
NMI
1
E10T_0 PB0
PB1
X
PB2
X
LSI State after Reset End
User Mode
0
0
X
1
X
X
0
X
X
Boot Mode
Legend:X: Don’t care.
7.3.1
Boot Mode
Table 7.2 shows the boot mode operations between reset end and branching to the programming
control program.
1. When boot mode is used, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in
the host beforehand. Prepare a programming control program in accordance with the
description in section 7.4, Flash Memory Programming/Erasing.
2. SCI3 should be set to asynchronous mode, and the transfer format as follows: 8-bit data, 1 stop
bit, and no parity.
3. When the boot program is initiated, the chip measures the low-level period of asynchronous
SCI communication data (H'00) transmitted continuously from the host. The chip then
calculates the bit rate of transmission from the host, and adjusts the SCI3 bit rate to match that
of the host. The reset should end with the RxD pin high. The RxD and TxD pins should be
pulled up on the board if necessary. After the reset is complete, it takes approximately 100
states before the chip is ready to measure the low-level period.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 82 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 7 ROM
4. After matching the bit rates, the chip transmits one H'00 byte to the host to indicate the
completion of bit rate adjustment. The host should confirm that this adjustment end indication
(H'00) has been received normally, and transmit one H'55 byte to the chip. If reception could
not be performed normally, initiate boot mode again by a reset. Depending on the host's
transfer bit rate and system clock frequency of this LSI, there will be a discrepancy between
the bit rates of the host and the chip. To operate the SCI properly, set the host's transfer bit rate
and system clock frequency of this LSI within the ranges listed in table 7.3.
5. In boot mode, a part of the on-chip RAM area is used by the boot program. The area H'F780 to
H'FEEF is the area to which the programming control program is transferred from the host.
The boot program area cannot be used until the execution state in boot mode switches to the
programming control program.
6. Before branching to the programming control program, the chip terminates transfer operations
by SCI3 (by clearing the RE and TE bits in SCR3 to 0), however the adjusted bit rate value
remains set in BRR. Therefore, the programming control program can still use it for transfer of
write data or verify data with the host. The TxD pin is high (PCR22 = 1, P22 = 1). The
contents of the CPU general registers are undefined immediately after branching to the
programming control program. These registers must be initialized at the beginning of the
programming control program, as the stack pointer (SP), in particular, is used implicitly in
subroutine calls, etc.
7. Boot mode can be cleared by a reset. End the reset after driving the reset pin low, waiting at
least 20 states, and then setting the NMI pin. Boot mode is also cleared when a WDT overflow
occurs.
8. Do not change the TEST pin and NMI pin input levels in boot mode.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 83 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 7 ROM
Table 7.2 Boot Mode Operation
Host Operation
Communication Contents
LSI Operation
Processing Contents
Processing Contents
Branches to boot program at reset-start.
Boot program initiation
. . .
H'00, H'00
H'00
Continuously transmits data H'00
at specified bit rate.
• Measures low-level period of receive data
H'00.
• Calculates bit rate and sets BRR in SCI3.
• Transmits data H'00 to host as adjustment
end indication.
H'00
Transmits data H'55 when data H'00
is received error-free.
H'55
H'55 reception.
H'FF
H'AA
Boot program
erase error
Checks flash memory data, erases all flash
memory blocks in case of written data
existing, and transmits data H'AA to host.
(If erase could not be done, transmits data
H'FF to host and aborts operation.)
H'AA reception
Upper bytes, lower bytes
Echoback
Transmits number of bytes (N) of
programming control program to be
transferred as 2-byte data
(low-order byte following high-order
byte)
Echobacks the 2-byte data
received to host.
Echobacks received data to host and also
transfers it to RAM.
(repeated for N times)
H'XX
Transmits 1-byte of programming
control program (repeated for N times)
Echoback
H'AA
Transmits data H'AA to host.
H'AA reception
Branches to programming control program
transferred to on-chip RAM and starts
execution.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 84 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 7 ROM
Table 7.3 System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of LSI Bit Rate is
Possible
Host Bit Rate
19,200 bps
9,600 bps
System Clock Frequency Range of LSI
16 to 20 MHz
8 to 16 MHz
4,800 bps
4 to 16 MHz
2,400 bps
2 to 16 MHz
7.3.2
Programming/Erasing in User Program Mode
On-board programming/erasing of an individual flash memory block can also be performed in user
program mode by branching to a user program/erase control program. The user must set branching
conditions and provide on-board means of supplying programming data. The flash memory must
contain the user program/erase control program or a program that provides the user program/erase
control program from external memory. As the flash memory itself cannot be read during
programming/erasing, transfer the user program/erase control program to on-chip RAM, as in boot
mode. Figure 7.2 shows a sample procedure for programming/erasing in user program mode.
Prepare a user program/erase control program in accordance with the description in section 7.4,
Flash Memory Programming/Erasing.
Reset-start
No
Program/erase?
Yes
Transfer user program/erase control
program to RAM
Branch to flash memory application
program
Branch to user program/erase control
program in RAM
Execute user program/erase control
program (flash memory rewrite)
Branch to flash memory application
program
Figure 7.2 Programming/Erasing Flowchart Example in User Program Mode
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 85 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 7 ROM
7.4
Flash Memory Programming/Erasing
A software method using the CPU is employed to program and erase flash memory in the on-
board programming modes. Depending on the FLMCR1 setting, the flash memory operates in one
of the following four modes: Program mode, program-verify mode, erase mode, and erase-verify
mode. The programming control program in boot mode and the user program/erase control
program in user program mode use these operating modes in combination to perform
programming/erasing. Flash memory programming and erasing should be performed in
accordance with the descriptions in section 7.4.1, Program/Program-Verify and section 7.4.2,
Erase/Erase-Verify, respectively.
7.4.1
Program/Program-Verify
When writing data or programs to the flash memory, the program/program-verify flowchart shown
in figure 7.3 should be followed. Performing programming operations according to this flowchart
will enable data or programs to be written to the flash memory without subjecting the chip to
voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability.
1. Programming must be done to an empty address. Do not reprogram an address to which
programming has already been performed.
2. Programming should be carried out 128 bytes at a time. A 128-byte data transfer must be
performed even if writing fewer than 128 bytes. In this case, H'FF data must be written to the
extra addresses.
3. Prepare the following data storage areas in RAM: A 128-byte programming data area, a 128-
byte reprogramming data area, and a 128-byte additional-programming data area. Perform
reprogramming data computation according to table 7.4, and additional programming data
computation according to table 7.5.
4. Consecutively transfer 128 bytes of data in byte units from the reprogramming data area or
additional-programming data area to the flash memory. The program address and 128-byte
data are latched in the flash memory. The lower 8 bits of the start address in the flash memory
destination area must be H'00 or H'80.
5. The time during which the P bit is set to 1 is the programming time. Table 7.6 shows the
allowable programming times.
6. The watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overprogramming due to program runaway, etc.
An overflow cycle of approximately 6.6 ms is allowed.
7. For a dummy write to a verify address, write 1-byte data H'FF to an address whose lower 2
bits are B'00. Verify data can be read in words or in longwords from the address to which a
dummy write was performed.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 86 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 7 ROM
8. The maximum number of repetitions of the program/program-verify sequence of the same bit
is 1,000.
Write pulse application subroutine
Apply Write Pulse
START
Set SWE bit in FLMCR1
Wait 1 µs
WDT enable
Set PSU bit in FLMCR1
Wait 50 µs
Store 128-byte program data in program
data area and reprogram data area
*
n= 1
Set P bit in FLMCR1
m= 0
Wait (Wait time=programming time)
Write 128-byte data in RAM reprogram
data area consecutively to flash memory
Clear P bit in FLMCR1
Wait 5 µs
Apply Write pulse
Set PV bit in FLMCR1
Clear PSU bit in FLMCR1
Wait 4 µs
Wait 5 µs
Set block start address as
verify address
Disable WDT
End Sub
n ← n + 1
H'FF dummy write to verify address
Wait 2 µs
*
Read verify data
Increment address
Verify data =
write data?
No
m = 1
Yes
No
n ≤ 6 ?
Yes
Additional-programming data computation
Reprogram data computation
128-byte
data verification completed?
No
Yes
Clear PV bit in FLMCR1
Wait 2 µs
No
n ≤ 6?
Yes
Successively write 128-byte data from additional-
programming data area in RAM to flash memory
Sub-Routine-Call
Apply Write Pulse
No
Yes
m= 0 ?
n ≤ 1000 ?
Yes
No
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
Wait 100 µs
Wait 100 µs
End of programming
Programming failure
Note: *The RTS instruction must not be used during the following 1. and 2. periods.
1. A period between 128-byte data programming to flash memory and the P bit clearing
2. A period between dummy writing of H'FF to a verify address and verify data reading
Figure 7.3 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 87 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 7 ROM
Table 7.4 Reprogram Data Computation Table
Program Data
Verify Data
Reprogram Data
Comments
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
Programming completed
Reprogram bit
—
Remains in erased state
Table 7.5 Additional-Program Data Computation Table
Additional-Program
Reprogram Data
Verify Data
Data
Comments
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
Additional-program bit
No additional programming
No additional programming
No additional programming
Table 7.6 Programming Time
n
Programming
In Additional
Programming
(Number of Writes) Time
Comments
1 to 6
30
10
—
7 to 1,000
200
Note: Time shown in µs.
7.4.2
Erase/Erase-Verify
When erasing flash memory, the erase/erase-verify flowchart shown in figure 7.4 should be
followed.
1. Prewriting (setting erase block data to all 0s) is not necessary.
2. Erasing is performed in block units. Make only a single-bit specification in the erase block
register (EBR1). To erase multiple blocks, each block must be erased in turn.
3. The time during which the E bit is set to 1 is the flash memory erase time.
4. The watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overerasing due to program runaway, etc. An
overflow cycle of approximately 19.8 ms is allowed.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 88 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 7 ROM
5. For a dummy write to a verify address, write 1-byte data H'FF to an address whose lower two
bits are B'00. Verify data can be read in longwords from the address to which a dummy write
was performed.
6. If the read data is not erased successfully, set erase mode again, and repeat the erase/erase-
verify sequence as before. The maximum number of repetitions of the erase/erase-verify
sequence is 100.
7.4.3
Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory
All interrupts, including the NMI interrupt, are disabled while flash memory is being programmed
or erased, or while the boot program is executing, for the following three reasons:
1. Interrupt during programming/erasing may cause a violation of the programming or erasing
algorithm, with the result that normal operation cannot be assured.
2. If interrupt exception handling starts before the vector address is written or during
programming/erasing, a correct vector cannot be fetched and the CPU malfunctions.
3. If an interrupt occurs during boot program execution, normal boot mode sequence cannot be
carried out.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 89 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 7 ROM
Erase start
SWE bit ← 1
Wait 1 µs
n ← 1
Set EBR1
Enable WDT
ESU bit ← 1
Wait 100 µs
E bit ← 1
Wait 10 ms
E bit ← 0
Wait 10 µs
ESU bit ← 10
10 µs
Disable WDT
EV bit ← 1
Wait 20 µs
Set block start address as verify address
H'FF dummy write to verify address
Wait 2 µs
*
n ← n + 1
Read verify data
No
Verify data + all 1s ?
Yes
Increment address
No
Last address of block ?
Yes
EV bit ← 0
Wait 4 µs
EV bit ← 0
Wait 4µs
No
Yes
n ≤100 ?
All erase block erased ?
Yes
No
Yes
SWE bit ← 0
SWE bit ← 0
Wait 100 µs
Wait 100 µs
End of erasing
Erase failure
Note: * The RTS instruction must not be used during a period between dummy writing of H'FF to a verify address and verify data reading.
Figure 7.4 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 90 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 7 ROM
7.5
Program/Erase Protection
There are three kinds of flash memory program/erase protection; hardware protection, software
protection, and error protection.
7.5.1
Hardware Protection
Hardware protection refers to a state in which programming/erasing of flash memory is forcibly
disabled or aborted because of a transition to reset, subsleep mode or standby mode. Flash
memory control register 1 (FLMCR1), flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2), and erase
block register 1 (EBR1) are initialized. In a reset via the RES pin, the reset state is not entered
unless the RES pin is held low until oscillation stabilizes after powering on. In the case of a reset
during operation, hold the RES pin low for the RES pulse width specified in the AC
Characteristics section.
7.5.2
Software Protection
Software protection can be implemented against programming/erasing of all flash memory blocks
by clearing the SWE bit in FLMCR1. When software protection is in effect, setting the P or E bit
in FLMCR1 does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. By setting the erase block
register 1 (EBR1), erase protection can be set for individual blocks. When EBR1 is set to H'00,
erase protection is set for all blocks.
7.5.3
Error Protection
In error protection, an error is detected when CPU runaway occurs during flash memory
programming/erasing, or operation is not performed in accordance with the program/erase
algorithm, and the program/erase operation is aborted. Aborting the program/erase operation
prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing.
When the following errors are detected during programming/erasing of flash memory, the FLER
bit in FLMCR2 is set to 1, and the error protection state is entered.
•
When the flash memory of the relevant address area is read during programming/erasing
(including vector read and instruction fetch)
•
•
Immediately after exception handling excluding a reset during programming/erasing
When a SLEEP instruction is executed during programming/erasing
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 91 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 7 ROM
The FLMCR1, FLMCR2, and EBR1 settings are retained, however program mode or erase mode
is aborted at the point at which the error occurred. Program mode or erase mode cannot be re-
entered by re-setting the P or E bit. However, PV and EV bit setting is enabled, and a transition
can be made to verify mode. Error protection can be cleared only by a reset.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 92 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 8 RAM
Section 8 RAM
This LSI has 2 kbytes of on-chip high-speed static RAM. The RAM is connected to the CPU by a
16-bit data bus, enabling two-state access by the CPU to both byte data and word data.
Product Classification
RAM Size
2 kbytes
2 kbytes
1 kbyte
RAM Address
Flash memory version
H8/36024F, H8/36014F
H8/36022F, H8/36012F
H8/36024, H8/36014
H8/36023, H8/36013
H8/36022, H8/36012
H8/36011
H'F780 to H'FF7F*
H'F780 to H'FF7F*
H'FB80 to H'FF7F
H'FB80 to H'FF7F
H'FD80 to H'FF7F
H'FD80 to H'FF7F
H'FD80 to H'FF7F
Masked ROM version
1 kbyte
512 bytes
512 bytes
512 bytes
H8/36010
Note:
*
When the E7 or E8 is used, area H'F780 to H'FB7F must not be accessed.
RAM0400A_000020020200
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 93 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 8 RAM
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 94 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 9 I/O Ports
Section 9 I/O Ports
The group of this LSI has thirty general I/O ports and four general input-only ports. Port 8 is a
large current port, which can drive 20 mA (@VOL = 1.5 V) when a low level signal is output. Any
of these ports can become an input port immediately after a reset. They can also be used as I/O
pins of the on-chip peripheral modules or external interrupt input pins, and these functions can be
switched depending on the register settings. The registers for selecting these functions can be
divided into two types: those included in I/O ports and those included in each on-chip peripheral
module. General I/O ports are comprised of the port control register for controlling inputs/outputs
and the port data register for storing output data and can select inputs/outputs in bit units. For
functions in each port, see Appendix B.1, I/O Port Block Diagrams. For the execution of bit
manipulation instructions to the port control register and port data register, see section 2.8.3, Bit
Manipulation Instruction.
9.1
Port 1
Port 1 is a general I/O port also functioning as IRQ interrupt input pins, timer V input pin, and
SCI3 I/O pin. Figure 9.1 shows its pin configuration.
P17/IRQ3/TRGV
P16
P15
Port 1
P14/IRQ0
P12/SCK3_3*
P11
P10
Note: * The SCK3_3 pin is not available in the H8/36014.
Figure 9.1 Port 1 Pin Configuration
Port 1 has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
Port mode register 1 (PMR1)
Port control register 1 (PCR1)
Port data register 1 (PDR1)
Port pull-up control register 1 (PUCR1)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 95 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1.1
Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1)
PMR1 switches the functions of pins in port 1, port 2, and port 7.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
IRQ3
0
R/W
P17/IRQ3/TRGV Pin Function Switch
This bit selects whether pin P17/IRQ3/TRGV is used as
P17 or as IRQ3/TRGV.
0: General I/O port
1: IRQ3/TRGV input pin
Reserved
6, 5
4
All 0
0
These bits are always read as 0.
IRQ0
R/W
P14/IRQ0 Pin Function Switch
This bit selects whether pin P14/IRQ0 is used as P14 or
as IRQ0.
0: General I/O port
1: IRQ0 input pin
3
TXD2
0
R/W
P72/TXD_2 Pin Function Switch
This bit selects whether pin P72/TXD_2 is used as P72 or
as TXD_2.
0: General I/O port
1: TXD_2 output pin
Reserved
2
1
0
0
R/W
R/W
This bit must always be cleared to 0 (setting to 1 is
disabled).
TXD
P22/TXD Pin Function Switch
This bit selects whether pin P22/TXD is used as P22 or
as TXD.
0: General I/O port
1: TXD output pin
Reserved
0
0
This bit is always read as 0.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 96 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1.2
Port Control Register 1 (PCR1)
PCR1 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port 1.
Initial
Bit
7
Bit Name Value
R/W
W
Description
PCR17
PCR16
PCR15
PCR14
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
When the corresponding pin is designated in PMR1 as a
general I/O pin, setting a PCR1 bit to 1 makes the
corresponding pin an output port, while clearing the bit to
0 makes the pin an input port.
6
W
5
W
4
W
Bit 3 is a reserved bit.
3
W
2
PCR12
PCR11
PCR10
1
W
0
W
9.1.3
Port Data Register 1 (PDR1)
PDR1 is a general I/O port data register of port 1.
Initial
Bit
7
Bit Name Value
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Description
P17
P16
P15
P14
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
PDR1 stores output data for port 1 pins.
6
If PDR1 is read while PCR1 bits are set to 1, the value
stored in PDR1 are read. If PDR1 is read while PCR1 bits
are cleared to 0, the pin states are read regardless of the
value stored in PDR1.
5
4
3
Bit 3 is a reserved bit. This bit is always read as 1.
2
P12
P11
P10
R/W
R/W
R/W
1
0
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 97 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1.4
Port Pull-Up Control Register 1 (PUCR1)
PUCR1 controls the pull-up MOS in bit units of the pins set as the input ports.
Initial
Bit
7
Bit Name Value
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Description
PUCR17
PUCR16
PUCR15
PUCR14
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Only bits for which PCR1 is cleared are valid. The pull-up
MOS of P17 to P14 and P12 to P10 pins enter the on-
state when these bits are set to 1, while they enter the
off-state when these bits are cleared to 0.
6
5
4
Bit 3 is a reserved bit. This bit is always read as 1.
3
2
PUCR12
PUCR11
PUCR10
R/W
R/W
R/W
1
0
9.1.5
Pin Functions
The correspondence between the register specification and the port functions is shown below.
P17/IRQ3/TRGV pin
•
Register
Bit Name
PMR1
IRQ3
PCR1
PCR17
Pin Function
Setting value 0
0
1
X
P17 input pin
P17 output pin
1
IRQ3 input/TRGV input pin
Legend X: Don't care.
•
P16 pin
Register
PCR1
Bit Name
Setting value
PCR16
Pin Function
0
1
P16 input pin
P16 output pin
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 98 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 9 I/O Ports
•
P15 pin
Register
PCR1
Bit Name
Setting value
PCR15
Pin Function
P15 input pin
P15 output pin
0
1
•
P14/IRQ0 pin
Register
Bit Name
PMR1
IRQ0
PCR1
PCR14
Pin Function
P14 input pin
P14 output pin
IRQ0 input pin
Setting value 0
0
1
X
1
Legend X: Don't care.
•
P12/SCK3_3* pin
Register
Bit Name
Setting value
SCR3_3*
SMR_3* PCR1
CKE1
CKE0
COM
PCR12 Pin Function
0
0
0
0
P12 input pin
1
P12 output pin
1
X
X
X
SCK3_3 output pin*
SCK3_3 output pin*
SCK3_3 input pin*
0
1
1
X
X
X
Legend X: Don't care.
Note:
*
Not available in the H8/36014.
•
P11 pin
Register
PCR1
Bit Name
Setting value
PCR11
Pin Function
P11 input pin
P11 output pin
0
1
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 99 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 9 I/O Ports
•
P10 pin
Register
PCR1
Bit Name
Setting value
PCR10
Pin Function
P10 input pin
P10 output pin
0
1
9.2
Port 2
Port 2 is a general I/O port also functioning as a SCI3 I/O pin. Each pin of the port 2 is shown in
figure 9.2. The register settings of PMR1 and SCI3 have priority for functions of the pins for both
uses.
P22/TXD
P21/RXD
Port 2
P20/SCK3
Figure 9.2 Port 2 Pin Configuration
Port 2 has the following registers.
•
•
Port control register 2 (PCR2)
Port data register 2 (PDR2)
9.2.1
Port Control Register 2 (PCR2)
PCR2 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port 2.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7 to 3
0
Reserved
2
1
0
PCR22
PCR21
PCR20
W
When each of the port 2 pins P22 to P20 functions as an
general I/O port, setting a PCR2 bit to 1 makes the
corresponding pin an output port, while clearing the bit to
0 makes the pin an input port.
0
W
0
W
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 100 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.2.2
Port Data Register 2 (PDR2)
PDR2 is a general I/O port data register of port 2.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7 to 3
All 1
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
PDR2 stores output data for port 2 pins.
2
1
0
P22
P21
P20
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
If PDR2 is read while PCR2 bits are set to 1, the value
stored in PDR2 is read. If PDR2 is read while PCR2 bits
are cleared to 0, the pin states are read regardless of the
value stored in PDR2.
9.2.3
Pin Functions
The correspondence between the register specification and the port functions is shown below.
P22/TXD pin
•
Register
Bit Name
PMR1
TXD
PCR2
PCR22
Pin Function
P22 input pin
P22 output pin
TXD output pin
Setting Value 0
0
1
X
1
Legend X: Don't care.
•
P21/RXD pin
Register
Bit Name
SCR3
RE
PCR2
PCR21
Pin Function
P21 input pin
P21 output pin
RXD input pin
Setting Value 0
0
1
X
1
Legend X: Don't care.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 101 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 9 I/O Ports
•
P20/SCK3 pin
Register
SCR3
CKE1
0
SMR
COM
0
PCR2
Bit Name
CKE0
PCR20
Pin Function
P20 input pin
Setting Value
0
0
1
P20 output pin
SCK3 output pin
SCK3 output pin
SCK3 input pin
0
0
1
0
1
X
1
X
X
X
X
X
Legend X: Don't care.
9.3
Port 5
Port 5 is a general I/O port also functioning as an SCI3 I/O pins, A/D trigger input pin, and
wakeup interrupt input pins. Each pin of the port 5 is shown in figure 9.3.
P57/TXD_3*
P56/RXD_3*
P55/WKP5/ADTRG
P54/WKP4
Port 5
P53/WKP3
P52/WKP2
P51/WKP1
P50/WKP0
Note: * The TXD_3 and RXD_3 pins are not available in the H8/36014.
Figure 9.3 Port 5 Pin Configuration
Port 5 has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
Port mode register 5 (PMR5)
Port control register 5 (PCR5)
Port data register 5 (PDR5)
Port pull-up control register 5 (PUCR5)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 102 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.3.1
Port Mode Register 5 (PMR5)
PMR5 switches the functions of pins in port 5.
Initial
Bit Bit Name Value R/W
Description
7
6
5
POF57
POF56
WKP5
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
P57 Pin Function Switch
0: General I/O port
1: NMOS open-drain output
P56 Pin Function Switch
0: General I/O port
1: NMOS open-drain output
P55/WKP5/ADTRG Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin P55/WKP5/ADTRG is used as P55 or as
WKP5/ADTRG input.
0: General I/O port
1: WKP5/ADTRG input pin
4
3
2
1
WKP4
WKP3
WKP2
WKP1
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P54/WKP4 Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin P54/WKP4 is used as P54 or as WKP4.
0: General I/O port
1: WKP4 input pin
P53/WKP3 Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin P53/WKP3 is used as P53 or as WKP3.
0: General I/O port
1: WKP3 input pin
P52/WKP2 Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin P52/WKP2 is used as P52 or as WKP2.
0: General I/O port
1: WKP2 input pin
P51/WKP1 Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin P51/WKP1 is used as P51 or as WKP1.
0: General I/O port
1: WKP1 input pin
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 103 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 9 I/O Ports
Initial
Bit Bit Name Value R/W
Description
0
WKP0
0
R/W
P50/WKP0 Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin P50/WKP0 is used as P50 or as WKP0.
0: General I/O port
1: WKP0 input pin
9.3.2
Port Control Register 5 (PCR5)
PCR5 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port 5.
Initial
Bit Bit Name Value R/W
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PCR57
PCR56
PCR55
PCR54
PCR53
PCR52
PCR51
PCR50
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
When each of the port 5 pins P57 to P50 functions as an
general I/O port, setting a PCR5 bit to 1 makes the
corresponding pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0
makes the pin an input port.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 104 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.3.3
Port Data Register 5 (PDR5)
PDR5 is a general I/O port data register of port 5.
Initial
Bit
7
Bit Name Value
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Description
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Stores output data for port 5 pins.
6
If PDR5 is read while PCR5 bits are set to 1, the value
stored in PDR5 are read. If PDR5 is read while PCR5 bits
are cleared to 0, the pin states are read regardless of the
value stored in PDR5.
5
4
3
2
1
0
9.3.4
Port Pull-Up Control Register 5 (PUCR5)
PUCR5 controls the pull-up MOS in bit units of the pins set as the input ports.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7, 6
All 0
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0.
5
4
3
2
1
0
PUCR55
PUCR54
PUCR53
PUCR52
PUCR51
PUCR50
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Only bits for which PCR5 is cleared are valid. The pull-up
MOS of the corresponding pins enter the on-state when
these bits are set to 1, while they enter the off-state when
these bits are cleared to 0.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 105 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.3.5
Pin Functions
The correspondence between the register specification and the port functions is shown below.
•
P57/TXD_3* pin
Register
Bit Name
SMCR*
TXD_3
PCR5
PCR57
Pin Function
P57 input pin
Setting Value 0
0
1
X
P57 output pin
TXD_3 output pin*
1
Legend X: Don't care.
Note:
*
Not available in the H8/36014.
•
P56/RXD_3* pin
Register
Bit Name
SCR3_3*
RE
PCR5
PCR56
Pin Function
P56 input pin
Setting Value 0
0
1
X
P56 output pin
RXD_3 input pin*
1
Legend X: Don't care.
Note:
*
Not available in the H8/36014.
•
P55/WKP5/ADTRG pin
Register
Bit Name
PMR5
WKP5
PCR5
PCR55
Pin Function
Setting Value 0
0
1
X
P55 input pin
P55 output pin
1
WKP5/ADTRG input pin
Legend X: Don't care.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 106 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 9 I/O Ports
•
P54/WKP4 pin
Register
Bit Name
PMR5
WKP4
PCR5
PCR54
Pin Function
P54 input pin
P54 output pin
WKP4 input pin
Setting Value 0
0
1
X
1
Legend X: Don't care.
•
P53/WKP3 pin
Register
Bit Name
PMR5
WKP3
PCR5
PCR53
Pin Function
P53 input pin
P53 output pin
WKP3 input pin
Setting Value 0
0
1
X
1
Legend X: Don't care.
•
P52/WKP2 pin
Register
Bit Name
PMR5
WKP2
PCR5
PCR52
Pin Function
P52 input pin
P52 output pin
WKP2 input pin
Setting Value 0
0
1
X
1
Legend X: Don't care.
•
P51/WKP1 pin
Register
Bit Name
PMR5
WKP1
PCR5
PCR51
Pin Function
P51 input pin
P51 output pin
WKP1 input pin
Setting Value 0
0
1
X
1
Legend X: Don't care.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 107 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 9 I/O Ports
•
P50/WKP0 pin
Register
Bit Name
PMR5
WKP0
PCR5
PCR50
Pin Function
P50 input pin
P50 output pin
WKP0 input pin
Setting Value 0
0
1
X
1
Legend X: Don't care.
9.4
Port 7
Port 7 is a general I/O port also functioning as a timer V I/O pin. Each pin of the port 7 is shown
in figure 9.4. The register setting of TCSRV in timer V has priority for functions of pin
P76/TMOV. The pins, P75/TMCIV and P74/TMRIV, are also functioning as timer V input ports
that are connected to the timer V regardless of the register setting of port 7.
P76/TMOV
P75/TMCIV
P74/TMRIV
Port 7
P73
P72/TXD_2
P71/SCK3_2
P70/SCK3_2
Figure 9.4 Port 7 Pin Configuration
Port 7 has the following registers.
•
•
Port control register 7 (PCR7)
Port data register 7 (PDR7)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 108 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.4.1
Port Control Register 7 (PCR7)
PCR7 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port 7.
Initial
Bit
7
Bit Name Value
R/W
W
Description
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved
6
PCR76
PCR75
PCR74
PCR73
PCR72
PCR71
PCR70
Setting a PCR7 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an
output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an
input port. Note that the TCSRV setting of the timer V has
priority for deciding input/output direction of the
P76/TMOV pin.
5
W
4
W
3
W
2
W
1
W
0
W
9.4.2
Port Data Register 7 (PDR7)
PDR7 is a general I/O port data register of port 7.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
1
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1.
PDR7 stores output data for port 7 pins.
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P76
P75
P74
P73
P72
P71
P70
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
If PDR7 is read while PCR7 bits are set to 1, the value
stored in PDR7 is read. If PDR7 is read while PCR7 bits
are cleared to 0, the pin states are read regardless of the
value stored in PDR7.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 109 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.4.3
Pin Functions
The correspondence between the register specification and the port functions is shown below.
•
P76/TMOV pin
Register
Bit Name
Setting Value 0000
TCSRV
PCR7
OS3 to OS0 PCR76
Pin Function
P76 input pin
0
1
X
P76 output pin
TMOV output pin
Other than
the above
values
Legend X: Don't care.
•
P75/TMCIV pin
Register
Bit Name
PCR7
PCR75
Pin Function
Setting Value 0
1
P75 input/TMCIV input pin
P75 output/TMCIV input pin
•
P74/TMRIV pin
Register
Bit Name
PCR7
PCR74
Pin Function
Setting Value 0
1
P74 input/TMRIV input pin
P74 output/TMRIV input pin
•
P73 pin
Register
Bit Name
PCR7
PCR73
Pin Function
P73 input pin
P73 output pin
Setting Value 0
1
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 110 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 9 I/O Ports
•
P72/TXD_2 pin
Register
Bit Name
PMR1
TXD2
PCR7
PCR72
Pin Function
P72 input pin
Setting Value 0
0
1
X
P72 output pin
TXD_2 output pin
1
Legend X: Don't care.
•
P71/RXD_2 pin
Register
Bit Name
SCR3_2
RE
PCR7
PCR71
Pin Function
P71 input pin
P71 output pin
RXD_2 input pin
Setting Value 0
0
1
X
1
Legend X: Don't care.
•
P70/SCK3_2 pin
Register
Bit Name
SCR3_2
CKE1
SMR_2
COM
0
PCR7
CKE0
PCR70
Pin Function
Setting Value 0
0
0
P70 input pin
1
P70 output pin
1
X
X
X
SCK3_2 output pin
SCK3_2 output pin
SCK3_2 input pin
0
1
X
X
1
X
Legend X: Don't care.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 111 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.5
Port 8
Port 8 is a general I/O port also functioning as a timer W I/O pin. Each pin of the port 8 is shown
in figure 9.5. The register setting of the timer W has priority for functions of the pins P84/FTIOD,
P83/FTIOC, P82/FTIOB, and P81/FTIOA. The P80/FTCI pin also functions as a timer W input
port that is connected to the timer W regardless of the register setting of port 8.
P84/FTIOD
P83/FTIOC
Port 8
P82/FTIOB
P81/FTIOA
P80/FTCI
Figure 9.5 Port 8 Pin Configuration
Port 8 has the following registers.
•
•
Port control register 8 (PCR8)
Port data register 8 (PDR8)
9.5.1
Port Control Register 8 (PCR8)
PCR8 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port 8.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
W
Description
7 to 5
0
Reserved
4
3
2
1
0
PCR84
PCR83
PCR82
PCR81
PCR80
When each of the port 8 pins P84 to P80 functions as an
general I/O port, setting a PCR8 bit to 1 makes the
corresponding pin an output port, while clearing the bit to
0 makes the pin an input port.
0
W
0
W
0
W
0
W
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 112 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.5.2
Port Data Register 8 (PDR8)
PDR8 is a general I/O port data register of port 8.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7 to 5
All 0
Reserved
4
3
2
1
0
P84
P83
P82
P81
P80
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDR8 stores output data for port 8 pins.
If PDR8 is read while PCR8 bits are set to 1, the value
stored in PDR8 is read. If PDR8 is read while PCR8 bits
are cleared to 0, the pin states are read regardless of the
value stored in PDR8.
9.5.3
Pin Functions
The correspondence between the register specification and the port functions is shown below.
P84/FTIOD pin
•
Register
Bit Name
TIOR1
IOD2
PCR8
IOD1
IOD0
PCR84
Pin Function
Setting Value 0
0
0
0
1
X
X
0
1
P84 input/FTIOD input pin
P84 output/FTIOD input pin
FTIOD output pin
0
0
1
0
1
X
1
X
X
FTIOD output pin
P84 input/FTIOD input pin
P84 output/FTIOD input pin
Legend X: Don't care.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 113 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 9 I/O Ports
•
P83/FTIOC pin
Register
Bit Name
TIOR1
IOC2
PCR8
IOC1
IOC0
PCR83
Pin Function
Setting Value 0
0
0
0
1
X
X
0
1
P83 input/FTIOC input pin
P83 output/FTIOC input pin
FTIOC output pin
0
0
1
0
1
X
1
X
X
FTIOC output pin
P83 input/FTIOC input pin
P83 output/FTIOC input pin
Legend X: Don't care.
•
P82/FTIOB pin
Register
Bit Name
TIOR0
IOB2
PCR8
IOB1
IOB0
PCR82
Pin Function
Setting Value 0
0
0
0
1
X
X
0
1
P82 input/FTIOB input pin
P82 output/FTIOB input pin
FTIOB output pin
0
0
1
0
1
X
1
X
X
FTIOB output pin
P82 input/FTIOB input pin
P82 output/FTIOB input pin
Legend X: Don't care.
•
P81/FTIOA pin
Register
Bit Name
TIOR0
IOA2
PCR8
IOA1
IOA0
PCR81
Pin Function
Setting Value 0
0
0
0
1
X
X
0
1
P81 input/FTIOA input pin
P81 output/FTIOA input pin
FTIOA output pin
0
0
1
0
1
X
1
X
X
FTIOA output pin
P81 input/FTIOA input pin
P81 output/FTIOA input pin
Legend X: Don't care.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 114 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 9 I/O Ports
•
P80/FTCI pin
Register
Bit Name
PCR8
PCR80
Pin Function
Setting Value 0
1
P80 input/FTCI input pin
P80 output/FTCI input pin
9.6
Port B
Port B is an input port also functioning as an A/D converter analog input pin. Each pin of the port
B is shown in figure 9.6.
PB3/AN3
PB2/AN2
Port B
PB1/AN1
PB0/AN0
Figure 9.6 Port B Pin Configuration
Port B has the following register.
•
Port data register B (PDRB)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 115 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.6.1
Port Data Register B (PDRB)
PDRB is a general input-only port data register of port B.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
R
Description
7 to 4
Reserved
3
2
1
0
PB3
PB2
PB1
PB0
The input value of each pin is read by reading this
register.
R
However, if a port B pin is designated as an analog input
channel by ADCSR in A/D converter, 0 is read.
R
R
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 116 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 10 Timer V
Section 10 Timer V
Timer V is an 8-bit timer based on an 8-bit counter. Timer V counts external events. Compare-
match signals with two registers can also be used to reset the counter, request an interrupt, or
output a pulse signal with an arbitrary duty cycle. Counting can be initiated by a trigger input at
the TRGV pin, enabling pulse output control to be synchronized to the trigger, with an arbitrary
delay from the trigger input. Figure 10.1 shows a block diagram of timer V.
10.1
Features
•
Choice of seven clock signals is available.
Choice of six internal clock sources (φ/128, φ/64, φ/32, φ/16, φ/8, φ/4) or an external clock.
•
•
Counter can be cleared by compare match A or B, or by an external reset signal. If the count
stop function is selected, the counter can be halted when cleared.
Timer output is controlled by two independent compare match signals, enabling pulse output
with an arbitrary duty cycle, PWM output, and other applications.
•
•
Three interrupt sources: compare match A, compare match B, timer overflow
Counting can be initiated by trigger input at the TRGV pin. The rising edge, falling edge, or
both edges of the TRGV input can be selected.
TIM08V0A_000120030300
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 117 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 10 Timer V
TCRV1
TCORB
Trigger
control
TRGV
TMCIV
ø
Comparator
Clock select
TCNTV
Comparator
TCORA
PSS
Clear
control
TCRV0
TMRIV
Interrupt
request
control
Output
control
TCSRV
TMOV
CMIA
CMIB
OVI
Legend:
TCORA:
TCORB:
TCNTV:
TCSRV:
TCRV0:
TCRV1:
PSS:
Time constant register A
Time constant register B
Timer counter V
Timer control/status register V
Timer control register V0
Timer control register V1
Prescaler S
CMIA:
CMIB:
OVI:
Compare-match interrupt A
Compare-match interrupt B
Overflow interupt
Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of Timer V
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 118 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 10 Timer V
10.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 10.1 shows the timer V pin configuration.
Table 10.1 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbreviation I/O
Function
Timer V output
Timer V clock input
Timer V reset input
Trigger input
TMOV
TMCIV
TMRIV
TRGV
Output
Input
Input
Input
Timer V waveform output
Clock input to TCNTV
External input to reset TCNTV
Trigger input to initiate counting
10.3
Register Descriptions
Time V has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Timer counter V (TCNTV)
Timer constant register A (TCORA)
Timer constant register B (TCORB)
Timer control register V0 (TCRV0)
Timer control/status register V (TCSRV)
Timer control register V1 (TCRV1)
10.3.1 Timer Counter V (TCNTV)
TCNTV is an 8-bit up-counter. The clock source is selected by bits CKS2 to CKS0 in timer
control register V0 (TCRV0). The TCNTV value can be read and written by the CPU at any time.
TCNTV can be cleared by an external reset input signal, or by compare match A or B. The
clearing signal is selected by bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCRV0.
When TCNTV overflows, OVF is set to 1 in timer control/status register V (TCSRV).
TCNTV is initialized to H'00.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 119 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 10 Timer V
10.3.2 Time Constant Registers A and B (TCORA, TCORB)
TCORA and TCORB have the same function.
TCORA and TCORB are 8-bit read/write registers.
TCORA and TCNTV are compared at all times. When the TCORA and TCNTV contents match,
CMFA is set to 1 in TCSRV. If CMIEA is also set to 1 in TCRV0, a CPU interrupt is requested.
Note that they must not be compared during the T3 state of a TCORA write cycle.
Timer output from the TMOV pin can be controlled by the identifying signal (compare match A)
and the settings of bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSRV.
TCORA and TCORB are initialized to H'FF.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 120 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 10 Timer V
10.3.3 Timer Control Register V0 (TCRV0)
TCRV0 selects the input clock signals of TCNTV, specifies the clearing conditions of TCNTV,
and controls each interrupt request.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
CMIEB
CMIEA
OVIE
0
0
0
R/W
Compare Match Interrupt Enable B
When this bit is set to 1, interrupt request from the CMFB
bit in TCSRV is enabled.
6
5
R/W
R/W
Compare Match Interrupt Enable A
When this bit is set to 1, interrupt request from the CMFA
bit in TCSRV is enabled.
Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, interrupt request from the OVF
bit in TCSRV is enabled.
4
3
CCLR1
CCLR0
0
0
R/W
R/W
Counter Clear 1 and 0
These bits specify the clearing conditions of TCNTV.
00: Clearing is disabled
01: Cleared by compare match A
10: Cleared by compare match B
11: Cleared on the rising edge of the TMRIV pin. The
operation of TCNTV after clearing depends on TRGE
in TCRV1.
2
1
0
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock Select 2 to 0
These bits select clock signals to input to TCNTV and the
counting condition in combination with ICKS0 in TCRV1.
Refer to table 10.2.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 121 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 10 Timer V
Table 10.2 Clock Signals to Input to TCNTV and Counting Conditions
TCRV0
Bit 2
CKS2
0
TCRV1
Bit 1
CKS1
0
Bit 0
CKS0
0
Bit 0
ICKS0
Description
0
Clock input prohibited
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4, falling edge
Internal clock: counts on φ/8, falling edge
Internal clock: counts on φ/16, falling edge
Internal clock: counts on φ/32, falling edge
Internal clock: counts on φ/64, falling edge
Internal clock: counts on φ/128, falling edge
Clock input prohibited
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
External clock: counts on rising edge
External clock: counts on falling edge
External clock: counts on rising and falling
edge
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 122 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 10 Timer V
10.3.4 Timer Control/Status Register V (TCSRV)
TCSRV indicates the status flag and controls outputs by using a compare match.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
CMFB
CMFA
OVF
0
0
0
1
R/W
Compare Match Flag B
Setting condition:
When the TCNTV value matches the TCORB value
Clearing condition:
After reading CMFB = 1, cleared by writing 0 to CMFB
Compare Match Flag A
6
5
4
R/W
R/W
Setting condition:
When the TCNTV value matches the TCORA value
Clearing condition:
After reading CMFA = 1, cleared by writing 0 to CMFA
Timer Overflow Flag
Setting condition:
When TCNTV overflows from H'FF to H'00
Clearing condition:
After reading OVF = 1, cleared by writing 0 to OVF
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1.
3
2
OS3
OS2
0
0
R/W
R/W
Output Select 3 and 2
These bits select an output method for the TMOV pin by
the compare match of TCORB and TCNTV.
00: No change
01: 0 output
10: 1 output
11: Output toggles
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 123 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 10 Timer V
Initial
Bit Name Value
Bit
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
Description
OS1
OS0
0
0
Output Select 1 and 0
0
These bits select an output method for the TMOV pin by
the compare match of TCORA and TCNTV.
00: No change
01: 0 output
10: 1 output
11: Output toggles
OS3 and OS2 select the output level for compare match B. OS1 and OS0 select the output level
for compare match A. The two output levels can be controlled independently. After a reset, the
timer output is 0 until the first compare match.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 124 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 10 Timer V
10.3.5 Timer Control Register V1 (TCRV1)
TCRV1 selects the edge at the TRGV pin, enables TRGV input, and selects the clock input to
TCNTV.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7 to 5
All 1
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
TRGV Input Edge Select
4
3
TVEG1
TVEG0
0
0
R/W
R/W
These bits select the TRGV input edge.
00: TRGV trigger input is prohibited
01: Rising edge is selected
10: Falling edge is selected
11: Rising and falling edges are both selected
2
TRGE
0
R/W
TCNT starts counting up by the input of the edge which is
selected by TVEG1 and TVEG0.
0: Disables starting counting-up TCNTV by the input of
the TRGV pin and halting counting-up TCNTV when
TCNTV is cleared by a compare match.
1: Enables starting counting-up TCNTV by the input of
the TRGV pin and halting counting-up TCNTV when
TCNTV is cleared by a compare match.
1
0
1
0
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1.
Internal Clock Select 0
ICKS0
R/W
This bit selects clock signals to input to TCNTV in
combination with CKS2 to CKS0 in TCRV0.
Refer to table 10.2.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 125 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 10 Timer V
10.4
Operation
10.4.1 Timer V Operation
1. According to table 10.2, six internal/external clock signals output by prescaler S can be
selected as the timer V operating clock signals. When the operating clock signal is selected,
TCNTV starts counting-up. Figure 10.2 shows the count timing with an internal clock signal
selected, and figure 10.3 shows the count timing with both edges of an external clock signal
selected.
2. When TCNTV overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00), the overflow flag (OVF) in TCRV0
will be set. The timing at this time is shown in figure 10.4. An interrupt request is sent to the
CPU when OVIE in TCRV0 is 1.
3. TCNTV is constantly compared with TCORA and TCORB. Compare match flag A or B
(CMFA or CMFB) is set to 1 when TCNTV matches TCORA or TCORB, respectively. The
compare-match signal is generated in the last state in which the values match. Figure 10.5
shows the timing. An interrupt request is generated for the CPU when CMIEA or CMIEB in
TCRV0 is 1.
4. When a compare match A or B is generated, the TMOV responds with the output value
selected by bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSRV. Figure 10.6 shows the timing when the output is
toggled by compare match A.
5. When CCLR1 or CCLR0 in TCRV0 is 01 or 10, TCNTV can be cleared by the corresponding
compare match. Figure 10.7 shows the timing.
6. When CCLR1 or CCLR0 in TCRV0 is 11, TCNTV can be cleared by the rising edge of the
input of TMRIV pin. A TMRIV input pulse-width of at least 1.5 system clocks is necessary.
Figure 10.8 shows the timing.
7. When a counter-clearing source is generated with TRGE in TCRV1 set to 1, the counting-up is
halted as soon as TCNTV is cleared. TCNTV resumes counting-up when the edge selected by
TVEG1 or TVEG0 in TCRV1 is input from the TGRV pin.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 126 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 10 Timer V
ø
Internal clock
TCNTV input
clock
N – 1
N
N + 1
TCNTV
Figure 10.2 Increment Timing with Internal Clock
ø
TMCIV
(External clock
input pin)
TCNTV input
clock
N – 1
N
N + 1
TCNTV
Figure 10.3 Increment Timing with External Clock
ø
TCNTV
H'FF
H'00
Overflow signal
OVF
Figure 10.4 OVF Set Timing
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 127 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 10 Timer V
ø
TCNTV
N
N
N+1
TCORA or
TCORB
Compare match
signal
CMFA or
CMFB
Figure 10.5 CMFA and CMFB Set Timing
ø
Compare match
A signal
Timer V output
pin
Figure 10.6 TMOV Output Timing
ø
Compare match
A signal
N
H'00
TCNTV
Figure 10.7 Clear Timing by Compare Match
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 128 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 10 Timer V
ø
TMRIV(External
counter reset
input pin )
TCNTV reset
signal
N – 1
N
H'00
TCNTV
Figure 10.8 Clear Timing by TMRIV Input
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 129 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 10 Timer V
10.5
Timer V Application Examples
10.5.1 Pulse Output with Arbitrary Duty Cycle
Figure 10.9 shows an example of output of pulses with an arbitrary duty cycle.
1. Set bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCRV0 so that TCNTV will be cleared by compare match with
TCORA.
2. Set bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSRV so that the output will go to 1 at compare match with TCORA
and to 0 at compare match with TCORB.
3. Set bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCRV0 and bit ICKS0 in TCRV1 to select the desired clock source.
4. With these settings, a waveform is output without further software intervention, with a period
determined by TCORA and a pulse width determined by TCORB.
TCNTV value
H'FF
Counter cleared
TCORA
TCORB
H'00
Time
TMOV
Figure 10.9 Pulse Output Example
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 130 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 10 Timer V
10.5.2 Pulse Output with Arbitrary Pulse Width and Delay from TRGV Input
The trigger function can be used to output a pulse with an arbitrary pulse width at an arbitrary
delay from the TRGV input, as shown in figure 10.10. To set up this output:
1. Set bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCRV0 so that TCNTV will be cleared by compare match with
TCORB.
2. Set bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSRV so that the output will go to 1 at compare match with TCORA
and to 0 at compare match with TCORB.
3. Set bits TVEG1 and TVEG0 in TCRV1 and set TRGE to select the falling edge of the TRGV
input.
4. Set bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCRV0 and bit ICKS0 in TCRV1 to select the desired clock source.
5. After these settings, a pulse waveform will be output without further software intervention,
with a delay determined by TCORA from the TRGV input, and a pulse width determined by
(TCORB – TCORA).
TCNTV value
H'FF
Counter cleared
TCORB
TCORA
H'00
Time
TRGV
TMOV
Compare match A
Compare match B
Compare match A
Compare match B
clears TCNTV and
halts count-up
clears TCNTV and
halts count-up
Figure 10.10 Example of Pulse Output Synchronized to TRGV Input
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 131 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 10 Timer V
10.6
Usage Notes
The following types of contention or operation can occur in timer V operation.
1. Writing to registers is performed in the T3 state of a TCNTV write cycle. If a TCNTV clear
signal is generated in the T3 state of a TCNTV write cycle, as shown in figure 10.11, clearing
takes precedence and the write to the counter is not carried out. If counting-up is generated in
the T3 state of a TCNTV write cycle, writing takes precedence.
2. If a compare match is generated in the T3 state of a TCORA or TCORB write cycle, the write
to TCORA or TCORB takes precedence and the compare match signal is inhibited. Figure
10.12 shows the timing.
3. If compare matches A and B occur simultaneously, any conflict between the output selections
for compare match A and compare match B is resolved by the following priority: toggle
output > output 1 > output 0.
4. Depending on the timing, TCNTV may be incremented by a switch between different internal
clock sources. When TCNTV is internally clocked, an increment pulse is generated from the
falling edge of an internal clock signal, that is divided system clock (φ). Therefore, as shown
in figure 10.3 the switch is from a high clock signal to a low clock signal, the switchover is
seen as a falling edge, causing TCNTV to increment. TCNTV can also be incremented by a
switch between internal and external clocks.
TCNTV write cycle by CPU
T1
T2
T3
ø
Address
TCNTV address
Internal write signal
Counter clear signal
TCNTV
N
H'00
Figure 10.11 Contention between TCNTV Write and Clear
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 132 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 10 Timer V
TCORA write cycle by CPU
T1 T2 T3
ø
Address
TCORA address
Internal write signal
TCNTV
TCORA
N
N
N+1
M
TCORA write data
Compare match signal
Inhibited
Figure 10.12 Contention between TCORA Write and Compare Match
Clock before
switching
Clock after
switching
Count clock
TCNTV
N
N+1
N+2
Write to CKS1 and CKS0
Figure 10.13 Internal Clock Switching and TCNTV Operation
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 133 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 10 Timer V
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 134 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
Section 11 Timer W
The timer W has a 16-bit timer having output compare and input capture functions. The timer W
can count external events and output pulses with an arbitrary duty cycle by compare match
between the timer counter and four general registers. Thus, it can be applied to various systems.
11.1
Features
•
Selection of five counter clock sources: four internal clocks (φ, φ/2, φ/4, and φ/8) and an
external clock (external events can be counted)
•
•
Capability to process up to four pulse outputs or four pulse inputs
Four general registers:
Independently assignable output compare or input capture functions
Usable as two pairs of registers; one register of each pair operates as a buffer for the output
compare or input capture register
•
Four selectable operating modes :
Waveform output by compare match
Selection of 0 output, 1 output, or toggle output
Input capture function
Rising edge, falling edge, or both edges
Counter clearing function
Counters can be cleared by compare match
PWM mode
Up to three-phase PWM output can be provided with desired duty ratio.
Any initial timer output value can be set
Five interrupt sources
•
•
Four compare match/input capture interrupts and an overflow interrupt.
Table 11.1 summarizes the timer W functions, and figure 11.1 shows a block diagram of the timer
W.
TIM08W0A_000020020200
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 135 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
Table 11.1 Timer W Functions
Input/Output Pins
FTIOB FTIOC
Item
Counter
FTIOA
FTIOD
Count clock
Internal clocks: φ, φ/2, φ/4, φ/8
External clock: FTCI
General registers
(output compare/input
capture registers)
Period
specified in
GRA
GRA
GRB
GRC (buffer GRD (buffer
register for
GRA in
register for
GRB in
buffer mode) buffer mode)
Counter clearing function GRA
compare
GRA
compare
match
—
—
—
match
Initial output value
setting function
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
—
—
Buffer function
Yes
Yes
Compare
match output
0
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Toggle
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Input capture function
PWM mode
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Interrupt sources
Overflow
Compare
Compare
Compare
Compare
match/input match/input match/input match/input
capture capture capture capture
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 136 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
FTIOA
Internal clock: ø
ø/2
Clock
selector
FTIOB
FTIOC
FTIOD
IRRTW
ø/4
ø/8
Control logic
External clock: FTCI
Comparator
Internal
data bus
Legend:
TMRW: Timer mode register W (8 bits)
TCRW: Timer control register W (8 bits)
TIERW: Timer interrupt enable register W (8 bits)
TSRW: Timer status register W (8 bits)
TIOR:
Timer I/O control register (8 bits)
TCNT: Timer counter (16 bits)
GRA:
GRB:
GRC:
GRD:
General register A (input capture/output compare register: 16 bits)
General register B (input capture/output compare register: 16 bits)
General register C (input capture/output compare register: 16 bits)
General register D (input capture/output compare register: 16 bits)
IRRTW: Timer W interrupt request
Figure 11.1 Timer W Block Diagram
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 137 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
11.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 11.2 summarizes the timer W pins.
Table 11.2 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbreviation Input/Output
Function
External clock input
FTCI
Input
External clock input pin
Input capture/output
compare A
FTIOA
Input/output
Output pin for GRA output compare
or input pin for GRA input capture
Input capture/output
compare B
FTIOB
FTIOC
FTIOD
Input/output
Input/output
Input/output
Output pin for GRB output compare,
input pin for GRB input capture, or
PWM output pin in PWM mode
Input capture/output
compare C
Output pin for GRC output compare,
input pin for GRC input capture, or
PWM output pin in PWM mode
Input capture/output
compare D
Output pin for GRD output compare,
input pin for GRD input capture, or
PWM output pin in PWM mode
11.3
Register Descriptions
The timer W has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Timer mode register W (TMRW)
Timer control register W (TCRW)
Timer interrupt enable register W (TIERW)
Timer status register W (TSRW)
Timer I/O control register 0 (TIOR0)
Timer I/O control register 1 (TIOR1)
Timer counter (TCNT)
General register A (GRA)
General register B (GRB)
General register C (GRC)
General register D (GRD)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 138 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
11.3.1 Timer Mode Register W (TMRW)
TMRW selects the general register functions and the timer output mode.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
CTS
0
R/W
Counter Start
The counter operation is halted when this bit is 0, while it
can be performed when this bit is 1.
6
5
1
0
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1.
Buffer Operation B
Selects the GRD function.
BUFEB
R/W
0: GRD operates as an input capture/output compare
register
1: GRD operates as the buffer register for GRB
Buffer Operation A
4
BUFEA
0
R/W
Selects the GRC function.
0: GRC operates as an input capture/output compare
register
1: GRC operates as the buffer register for GRA
Reserved
3
2
1
0
This bit is always read as 1.
PWM Mode D
PWMD
R/W
Selects the output mode of the FTIOD pin.
0: FTIOD operates normally (output compare output)
1: PWM output
1
0
PWMC
PWMB
0
0
R/W
R/W
PWM Mode C
Selects the output mode of the FTIOC pin.
0: FTIOC operates normally (output compare output)
1: PWM output
PWM Mode B
Selects the output mode of the FTIOB pin.
0: FTIOB operates normally (output compare output)
1: PWM output
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 139 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
11.3.2 Timer Control Register W (TCRW)
TCRW selects the timer counter clock source, selects a clearing condition, and specifies the timer
output levels.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
CCLR
0
R/W
Counter Clear
The TCNT value is cleared by compare match A when
this bit is 1. When it is 0, TCNT operates as a free-
running counter.
6
5
4
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock Select 2 to 0
Select the TCNT clock source.
000: Internal clock: counts on φ
001: Internal clock: counts on φ/2
010: Internal clock: counts on φ/4
011: Internal clock: counts on φ/8
1XX: Counts on rising edges of the external event (FTCI)
When the internal clock source (φ) is selected, subclock
sources are counted in subactive and subsleep modes.
3
2
1
TOD
TOC
TOB
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Timer Output Level Setting D
Sets the output value of the FTIOD pin until the first
compare match D is generated.
0: Output value is 0*
1: Output value is 1*
Timer Output Level Setting C
Sets the output value of the FTIOC pin until the first
compare match C is generated.
0: Output value is 0*
1: Output value is 1*
Timer Output Level Setting B
Sets the output value of the FTIOB pin until the first
compare match B is generated.
0: Output value is 0*
1: Output value is 1*
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 140 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
0
TOA
0
R/W
Timer Output Level Setting A
Sets the output value of the FTIOA pin until the first
compare match A is generated.
0: Output value is 0*
1: Output value is 1*
Legend X: Don't care.
Note: * The change of the setting is immediately reflected in the output value.
11.3.3 Timer Interrupt Enable Register W (TIERW)
TIERW controls the timer W interrupt request.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
OVIE
0
R/W
Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, FOVI interrupt requested by OVF
flag in TSRW is enabled.
6 to 4
3
All 1
0
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt Enable D
IMIED
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, IMID interrupt requested by
IMFD flag in TSRW is enabled.
2
1
0
IMIEC
IMIEB
IMIEA
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt Enable C
When this bit is set to 1, IMIC interrupt requested by
IMFC flag in TSRW is enabled.
Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt Enable B
When this bit is set to 1, IMIB interrupt requested by
IMFB flag in TSRW is enabled.
Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt Enable A
When this bit is set to 1, IMIA interrupt requested by
IMFA flag in TSRW is enabled.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 141 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
11.3.4 Timer Status Register W (TSRW)
TSRW shows the status of interrupt requests.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
OVF
0
R/W
Timer Overflow Flag
[Setting condition]
When TCNT overflows from H'FFFF to H'0000
[Clearing condition]
Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF
Reserved
6 to 4
3
All 1
0
These bits are always read as 1.
Input Capture/Compare Match Flag D
[Setting conditions]
IMFD
R/W
•
TCNT = GRD when GRD functions as an output
compare register
•
The TCNT value is transferred to GRD by an input
capture signal when GRD functions as an input
capture register
[Clearing condition]
Read IMFD when IMFD = 1, then write 0 in IMFD
Input Capture/Compare Match Flag C
[Setting conditions]
2
IMFC
0
R/W
•
TCNT = GRC when GRC functions as an output
compare register
•
The TCNT value is transferred to GRC by an input
capture signal when GRC functions as an input
capture register
[Clearing condition]
Read IMFC when IMFC = 1, then write 0 in IMFC
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 142 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
1
IMFB
0
R/W
Input Capture/Compare Match Flag B
[Setting conditions]
•
TCNT = GRB when GRB functions as an output
compare register
•
The TCNT value is transferred to GRB by an input
capture signal when GRB functions as an input
capture register
[Clearing condition]
Read IMFB when IMFB = 1, then write 0 in IMFB
Input Capture/Compare Match Flag A
[Setting conditions]
0
IMFA
0
R/W
•
TCNT = GRA when GRA functions as an output
compare register
•
The TCNT value is transferred to GRA by an input
capture signal when GRA functions as an input
capture register
[Clearing condition]
Read IMFA when IMFA = 1, then write 0 in IMFA
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 143 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
11.3.5 Timer I/O Control Register 0 (TIOR0)
TIOR0 selects the functions of GRA and GRB, and specifies the functions of the FTIOA and
FTIOB pins.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
1
0
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1.
I/O Control B2
6
IOB2
R/W
Selects the GRB function.
0: GRB functions as an output compare register
1: GRB functions as an input capture register
I/O Control B1 and B0
5
4
IOB1
IOB0
0
0
R/W
R/W
When IOB2 = 0,
00: No output at compare match
01: 0 output to the FTIOB pin at GRB compare match
10: 1 output to the FTIOB pin at GRB compare match
11: Output toggles to the FTIOB pin at GRB compare
match
When IOB2 = 1,
00: Input capture at rising edge at the FTIOB pin
01: Input capture at falling edge at the FTIOB pin
1X: Input capture at rising and falling edges of the FTIOB
pin
3
2
1
0
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1.
I/O Control A2
IOA2
R/W
Selects the GRA function.
0: GRA functions as an output compare register
1: GRA functions as an input capture register
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 144 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
Initial
Bit
1
Bit Name Value
R/W
R/W
R/W
Description
IOA1
IOA0
0
0
I/O Control A1 and A0
When IOA2 = 0,
0
00: No output at compare match
01: 0 output to the FTIOA pin at GRA compare match
10: 1 output to the FTIOA pin at GRA compare match
11: Output toggles to the FTIOA pin at GRA compare
match
When IOA2 = 1,
00: Input capture at rising edge of the FTIOA pin
01: Input capture at falling edge of the FTIOA pin
1X: Input capture at rising and falling edges of the FTIOA
pin
Legend X: Don't care.
11.3.6 Timer I/O Control Register 1 (TIOR1)
TIOR1 selects the functions of GRC and GRD, and specifies the functions of the FTIOC and
FTIOD pins.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
1
0
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1.
I/O Control D2
6
IOD2
R/W
Selects the GRD function.
0: GRD functions as an output compare register
1: GRD functions as an input capture register
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 145 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
Initial
Bit Name Value
Bit
5
R/W
R/W
R/W
Description
IOD1
IOD0
0
0
I/O Control D1 and D0
4
When IOD2 = 0,
00: No output at compare match
01: 0 output to the FTIOD pin at GRD compare match
10: 1 output to the FTIOD pin at GRD compare match
11: Output toggles to the FTIOD pin at GRD compare
match
When IOD2 = 1,
00: Input capture at rising edge at the FTIOD pin
01: Input capture at falling edge at the FTIOD pin
1X: Input capture at rising and falling edges at the FTIOD
pin
3
2
1
0
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1.
IOC2
R/W
I/O Control C2
Selects the GRC function.
0: GRC functions as an output compare register
1: GRC functions as an input capture register
I/O Control C1 and C0
1
0
IOC1
IOC0
0
0
R/W
R/W
When IOC2 = 0,
00: No output at compare match
01: 0 output to the FTIOC pin at GRC compare match
10: 1 output to the FTIOC pin at GRC compare match
11: Output toggles to the FTIOC pin at GRC compare
match
When IOC2 = 1,
00: Input capture to GRC at rising edge of the FTIOC pin
01: Input capture to GRC at falling edge of the FTIOC pin
1X: Input capture to GRC at rising and falling edges of
the FTIOC pin
Legend X: Don't care.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 146 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
11.3.7 Timer Counter (TCNT)
TCNT is a 16-bit readable/writable up-counter. The clock source is selected by bits CKS2 to
CKS0 in TCRW. TCNT can be cleared to H'0000 through a compare match with GRA by setting
the CCLR in TCRW to 1. When TCNT overflows (changes from H'FFFF to H'0000), the OVF
flag in TSRW is set to 1. If OVIE in TIERW is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt request is
generated. TCNT must always be read or written in 16-bit units; 8-bit access is not allowed.
TCNT is initialized to H'0000 by a reset.
11.3.8 General Registers A to D (GRA to GRD)
Each general register is a 16-bit readable/writable register that can function as either an output-
compare register or an input-capture register. The function is selected by settings in TIOR0 and
TIOR1.
When a general register is used as an input-compare register, its value is constantly compared with
the TCNT value. When the two values match (a compare match), the corresponding flag (IMFA,
IMFB, IMFC, or IMFD) in TSRW is set to 1. An interrupt request is generated at this time, when
IMIEA, IMIEB, IMIEC, or IMIED is set to 1. Compare match output can be selected in TIOR.
When a general register is used as an input-capture register, an external input-capture signal is
detected and the current TCNT value is stored in the general register. The corresponding flag
(IMFA, IMFB, IMFC, or IMFD) in TSRW is set to 1. If the corresponding interrupt-enable bit
(IMIEA, IMIEB, IMIEC, or IMIED) in TSRW is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt request is
generated. The edge of the input-capture signal is selected in TIOR.
GRC and GRD can be used as buffer registers of GRA and GRB, respectively, by setting BUFEA
and BUFEB in TMRW.
For example, when GRA is set as an output-compare register and GRC is set as the buffer register
for GRA, the value in the buffer register GRC is sent to GRA whenever compare match A is
generated.
When GRA is set as an input-capture register and GRC is set as the buffer register for GRA, the
value in TCNT is transferred to GRA and the value in the buffer register GRC is transferred to
GRA whenever an input capture is generated.
GRA to GRD must be written or read in 16-bit units; 8-bit access is not allowed. GRA to GRD are
initialized to H'FFFF by a reset.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 147 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
11.4
Operation
The timer W has the following operating modes.
•
•
Normal Operation
PWM Operation
11.4.1 Normal Operation
TCNT performs free-running or periodic counting operations. After a reset, TCNT is set as a free-
running counter. When the CTS bit in TMRW is set to 1, TCNT starts incrementing the count.
When the count overflows from H'FFFF to H'0000, the OVF flag in TSRW is set to 1. If the OVIE
in TIERW is set to 1, an interrupt request is generated. Figure 11.2 shows free-running counting.
TCNT value
H'FFFF
H'0000
CTS bit
Time
Flag cleared
by software
OVF
Figure 11.2 Free-Running Counter Operation
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 148 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
Periodic counting operation can be performed when GRA is set as an output compare register and
bit CCLR in TCRW is set to 1. When the count matches GRA, TCNT is cleared to H'0000, the
IMFA flag in TSRW is set to 1. If the corresponding IMIEA bit in TIERW is set to 1, an interrupt
request is generated. TCNT continues counting from H'0000. Figure 11.3 shows periodic
counting.
TCNT value
GRA
H'0000
CTS bit
Time
Flag cleared
by software
IMFA
Figure 11.3 Periodic Counter Operation
By setting a general register as an output compare register, compare match A, B, C, or D can cause
the output at the FTIOA, FTIOB, FTIOC, or FTIOD pin to output 0, output 1, or toggle. Figure
11.4 shows an example of 0 and 1 output when TCNT operates as a free-running counter, 1 output
is selected for compare match A, and 0 output is selected for compare match B. When signal is
already at the selected output level, the signal level does not change at compare match.
TCNT value
H'FFFF
GRA
GRB
Time
No change
No change
H'0000
FTIOA
FTIOB
No change
No change
Figure 11.4 0 and 1 Output Example (TOA = 0, TOB = 1)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 149 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
Figure 11.5 shows an example of toggle output when TCNT operates as a free-running counter,
and toggle output is selected for both compare match A and B.
TCNT value
H'FFFF
GRA
GRB
Time
H'0000
FTIOA
FTIOB
Toggle output
Toggle output
Figure 11.5 Toggle Output Example (TOA = 0, TOB = 1)
Figure 11.6 shows another example of toggle output when TCNT operates as a periodic counter,
cleared by compare match A. Toggle output is selected for both compare match A and B.
TCNT value
Counter cleared by compare match with GRA
H'FFFF
GRA
GRB
Time
H'0000
FTIOA
Toggle
output
Toggle
output
FTIOB
Figure 11.6 Toggle Output Example (TOA = 0, TOB = 1)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 150 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
The TCNT value can be captured into a general register (GRA, GRB, GRC, or GRD) when a
signal level changes at an input-capture pin (FTIOA, FTIOB, FTIOC, or FTIOD). Capture can
take place on the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges. By using the input-capture function, the
pulse width and periods can be measured. Figure 11.7 shows an example of input capture when
both edges of FTIOA and the falling edge of FTIOB are selected as capture edges. TCNT operates
as a free-running counter.
TCNT value
H'FFFF
H'F000
H'AA55
H'55AA
H'1000
H'0000
Time
FTIOA
GRA
H'1000
H'F000
H'55AA
FTIOB
GRB
H'AA55
Figure 11.7 Input Capture Operating Example
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 151 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
Figure 11.8 shows an example of buffer operation when the GRA is set as an input-capture
register and GRC is set as the buffer register for GRA. TCNT operates as a free-running counter,
and FTIOA captures both rising and falling edge of the input signal. Due to the buffer operation,
the GRA value is transferred to GRC by input-capture A and the TCNT value is stored in GRA.
TCNT value
H'FFFF
H'DA91
H'5480
H'0245
H'0000
Time
FTIOA
H'0245
H'5480
H'0245
H'DA91
H'5480
GRA
GRC
Figure 11.8 Buffer Operation Example (Input Capture)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 152 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
11.4.2 PWM Operation
In PWM mode, PWM waveforms are generated by using GRA as the period register and GRB,
GRC, and GRD as duty registers. PWM waveforms are output from the FTIOB, FTIOC, and
FTIOD pins. Up to three-phase PWM waveforms can be output. In PWM mode, a general register
functions as an output compare register automatically. The output level of each pin depends on the
corresponding timer output level set bit (TOB, TOC, and TOD) in TCRW. When TOB is 1, the
FTIOB output goes to 1 at compare match A and to 0 at compare match B. When TOB is 0, the
FTIOB output goes to 0 at compare match A and to 1 at compare match B. Thus the compare
match output level settings in TIOR0 and TIOR1 are ignored for the output pin set to PWM mode.
If the same value is set in the cycle register and the duty register, the output does not change when
a compare match occurs.
Figure 11.9 shows an example of operation in PWM mode. The output signals go to 1 and TCNT
is cleared at compare match A, and the output signals go to 0 at compare match B, C, and D (TOB,
TOC, and TOD = 1: initial output values are set to 1).
TCNT value
Counter cleared by compare match A
GRA
GRB
GRC
GRD
H'0000
Time
FTIOB
FTIOC
FTIOD
Figure 11.9 PWM Mode Example (1)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 153 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
Figure 11.10 shows another example of operation in PWM mode. The output signals go to 0 and
TCNT is cleared at compare match A, and the output signals go to 1 at compare match B, C, and
D (TOB, TOC, and TOD = 0: initial output values are set to 1).
TCNT value
Counter cleared by compare match A
GRA
GRB
GRC
GRD
H'0000
Time
FTIOB
FTIOC
FTIOD
Figure 11.10 PWM Mode Example (2)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 154 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
Figure 11.11 shows an example of buffer operation when the FTIOB pin is set to PWM mode and
GRD is set as the buffer register for GRB. TCNT is cleared by compare match A, and FTIOB
outputs 1 at compare match B and 0 at compare match A.
Due to the buffer operation, the FTIOB output level changes and the value of buffer register GRD
is transferred to GRB whenever compare match B occurs. This procedure is repeated every time
compare match B occurs.
TCNT value
GRA
H'0520
H'0450
H'0200
GRB
Time
H'0000
GRD
H'0200
H'0450
H'0520
H'0200
H'0450
H'0520
GRB
FTIOB
Figure 11.11 Buffer Operation Example (Output Compare)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 155 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
Figures 11.12 and 11.13 show examples of the output of PWM waveforms with duty cycles of 0%
and 100%.
TCNT value
Write to GRB
GRA
GRB
Write to GRB
H'0000
Time
Duty 0%
FTIOB
Output does not change when cycle register
and duty register compare matches occur
simultaneously.
TCNT value
Write to GRB
GRA
Write to GRB
Write to GRB
Duty 100%
GRB
H'0000
Time
FTIOB
Output does not change when cycle register
and duty register compare matches occur
simultaneously.
TCNT value
Write to GRB
GRA
Write to GRB
Write to GRB
Time
GRB
H'0000
Duty 100%
Duty 0%
FTIOB
Figure 11.12 PWM Mode Example
(TOB, TOC, and TOD = 0: initial output values are set to 0)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 156 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
TCNT value
Write to GRB
GRA
GRB
Write to GRB
H'0000
Time
Duty 100%
FTIOB
Output does not change when cycle register
and duty register compare matches occur
simultaneously.
TCNT value
Write to GRB
GRA
Write to GRB
Write to GRB
Duty 0%
GRB
H'0000
Time
FTIOB
Output does not change when cycle register
and duty register compare matches occur
simultaneously.
TCNT value
Write to GRB
GRA
Write to GRB
Write to GRB
Time
GRB
H'0000
Duty 0%
Duty 100%
FTIOB
Figure 11.13 PWM Mode Example
(TOB, TOC, and TOD = 1: initial output values are set to 1)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 157 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
11.5
Operation Timing
11.5.1 TCNT Count Timing
Figure 11.14 shows the TCNT count timing when the internal clock source is selected. Figure
11.15 shows the timing when the external clock source is selected. The pulse width of the external
clock signal must be at least two system clock (φ) cycles; shorter pulses will not be counted
correctly.
φ
Internal
clock
Rising edge
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N
N+1
N+2
Figure 11.14 Count Timing for Internal Clock Source
φ
External
clock
Rising edge
Rising edge
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N
N+1
N+2
Figure 11.15 Count Timing for External Clock Source
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 158 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
11.5.2 Output Compare Output Timing
The compare match signal is generated in the last state in which TCNT and GR match (when
TCNT changes from the matching value to the next value). When the compare match signal is
generated, the output value selected in TIOR is output at the compare match output pin (FTIOA,
FTIOB, FTIOC, or FTIOD).
When TCNT matches GR, the compare match signal is generated only after the next counter clock
pulse is input.
Figure 11.16 shows the output compare timing.
φ
TCNT input
clock
N
N
N+1
TCNT
GRA to GRD
Compare
match signal
FTIOA to FTIOD
Figure 11.16 Output Compare Output Timing
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 159 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
11.5.3 Input Capture Timing
Input capture on the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected through settings in
TIOR0 and TIOR1. Figure 11.17 shows the timing when the falling edge is selected. The pulse
width of the input capture signal must be at least two system clock (φ) cycles; shorter pulses will
not be detected correctly.
ø
Input capture
input
Input capture
signal
N–1
N
N+1
N
N+2
TCNT
GRA to GRD
Figure 11.17 Input Capture Input Signal Timing
11.5.4 Timing of Counter Clearing by Compare Match
Figure 11.18 shows the timing when the counter is cleared by compare match A. When the GRA
value is N, the counter counts from 0 to N, and its cycle is N + 1.
φ
Compare
match signal
N
N
H'0000
TCNT
GRA
Figure 11.18 Timing of Counter Clearing by Compare Match
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 160 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
11.5.5 Buffer Operation Timing
Figures 11.19 and 11.20 show the buffer operation timing.
φ
Compare
match signal
N
N+1
TCNT
M
GRC, GRD
GRA, GRB
M
Figure 11.19 Buffer Operation Timing (Compare Match)
φ
Input capture
signal
N
N+1
TCNT
GRA, GRB
M
N
N+1
N
GRC, GRD
M
Figure 11.20 Buffer Operation Timing (Input Capture)
11.5.6 Timing of IMFA to IMFD Flag Setting at Compare Match
If a general register (GRA, GRB, GRC, or GRD) is used as an output compare register, the
corresponding IMFA, IMFB, IMFC, or IMFD flag is set to 1 when TCNT matches the general
register.
The compare match signal is generated in the last state in which the values match (when TCNT is
updated from the matching count to the next count). Therefore, when TCNT matches a general
register, the compare match signal is generated only after the next TCNT clock pulse is input.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 161 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
Figure 11.21 shows the timing of the IMFA to IMFD flag setting at compare match.
φ
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N
N
N+1
GRA to GRD
Compare
match signal
IMFA to IMFD
IRRTW
Figure 11.21 Timing of IMFA to IMFD Flag Setting at Compare Match
11.5.7 Timing of IMFA to IMFD Setting at Input Capture
If a general register (GRA, GRB, GRC, or GRD) is used as an input capture register, the
corresponding IMFA, IMFB, IMFC, or IMFD flag is set to 1 when an input capture occurs. Figure
11.22 shows the timing of the IMFA to IMFD flag setting at input capture.
φ
Input capture
signal
TCNT
N
GRA to GRD
IMFA to IMFD
IRRTW
N
Figure 11.22 Timing of IMFA to IMFD Flag Setting at Input Capture
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 162 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
11.5.8 Timing of Status Flag Clearing
When the CPU reads a status flag while it is set to 1, then writes 0 in the status flag, the status flag
is cleared. Figure 11.23 shows the status flag clearing timing.
TSRW write cycle
T1
T2
φ
TSRW address
Address
Write signal
IMFA to IMFD
IRRTW
Figure 11.23 Timing of Status Flag Clearing by CPU
11.6
Usage Notes
The following types of contention or operation can occur in timer W operation.
1. The pulse width of the input clock signal and the input capture signal must be at least two
system clock (φ) cycles; shorter pulses will not be detected correctly.
2. Writing to registers is performed in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle.
If counter clear signal occurs in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, clearing of the counter
takes priority and the write is not performed, as shown in figure 11.24. If counting-up is
generated in the TCNT write cycle to contend with the TCNT counting-up, writing takes
precedence.
3. Depending on the timing, TCNT may be incremented by a switch between different internal
clock sources. When TCNT is internally clocked, an increment pulse is generated from the
rising edge of an internal clock signal, that is divided system clock (φ). Therefore, as shown in
figure 11.25 the switch is from a low clock signal to a high clock signal, the switchover is seen
as a rising edge, causing TCNT to increment.
4. If timer W enters module standby mode while an interrupt request is generated, the interrupt
request cannot be cleared. Before entering module standby mode, disable interrupt requests.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 163 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
TCNT write cycle
T1 T2
φ
TCNT address
Address
Write signal
Counter clear
signal
N
H'0000
TCNT
Figure 11.24 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear
Previous clock
New clock
Count clock
N
N+1
N+2
N+3
TCNT
The change in signal level at clock switching is
assumed to be a rising edge, and TCNT
increments the count.
Figure 11.25 Internal Clock Switching and TCNT Operation
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 164 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
5. The TOA to TOD bits in TCRW decide the value of the FTIO pin, which is output until the
first compare match occurs. Once a compare match occurs and this compare match changes the
values of FTIOA to FTIOD output, the values of the FTIOA to FTIOD pin output and the
values read from the TOA to TOD bits may differ. Moreover, when the writing to TCRW and
the generation of the compare match A to D occur at the same timing, the writing to TCRW
has the priority. Thus, output change due to the compare match is not reflected to the FTIOA
to FTIOD pins. Therefore, when bit manipulation instruction is used to write to TCRW, the
values of the FTIOA to FTIOD pin output may result in an unexpected result. When TCRW is
to be written to while compare match is operating, stop the counter once before accessing to
TCRW, read the port 8 state to reflect the values of FTIOA to FTIOD output, to TOA to TOD,
and then restart the counter. Figure 11.26 shows an example when the compare match and the
bit manipulation instruction to TCRW occur at the same timing.
TCRW has been set to H'06. Compare match B and compare match C are used. The FTIOB pin is in the 1 output state,
and is set to the toggle output or the 0 output by compare match B.
When BCLR#2, @TCRW is executed to clear the TOC bit (the FTIOC signal is low) and compare match B occurs
at the same timing as shown below, the H'02 writing to TCRW has priority and compare match B does not drive the FTIOB signal low;
the FTIOB signal remains high.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
TCRW
Set value
CCLR
0
CKS2
0
CKS1
0
CKS0
0
TOD
0
TOC
1
TOB
1
TOA
0
BCLR#2, @TCRW
(1) TCRW read operation: Read H'06
(2) Modify operation: Modify H'06 to H'02
(3) Write operation to TCRW: Write H'02
φ
TCRW
write signal
Compare match
signal B
FTIOB pin
Expected output
Remains high because the 1 writing to TOB has priority
Figure 11.26 When Compare Match and Bit Manipulation Instruction to TCRW
Occur at the Same Timing
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 165 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 11 Timer W
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 166 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
The watchdog timer is an 8-bit timer that can generate an internal reset signal for this LSI if a
system crash prevents the CPU from writing to the timer counter, thus allowing it to overflow.
The block diagram of the watchdog timer is shown in figure 12.1.
CLK
PSS
Internal
oscillator
TCSRWD
TCWD
ø
TMWD
Legend:
Internal reset
signal
TCSRWD: Timer control/status register WD
TCWD:
PSS:
Timer counter WD
Prescaler S
TMWD:
Timer mode register WD
Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of Watchdog Timer
12.1
Features
•
Selectable from nine counter input clocks.
Eight clock sources (φ/64, φ/128, φ/256, φ/512, φ/1024, φ/2048, φ/4096, and φ/8192) or the
internal oscillator can be selected as the timer-counter clock. When the internal oscillator is
selected, it can operate as the watchdog timer in any operating mode.
•
Reset signal generated on counter overflow
An overflow period of 1 to 256 times the selected clock can be set.
WDT0110A_000020020200
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 167 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.2
Register Descriptions
The watchdog timer has the following registers.
•
•
•
Timer control/status register WD (TCSRWD)
Timer counter WD (TCWD)
Timer mode register WD (TMWD)
12.2.1 Timer Control/Status Register WD (TCSRWD)
TCSRWD performs the TCSRWD and TCWD write control. TCSRWD also controls the
watchdog timer operation and indicates the operating state. TCSRWD must be rewritten by using
the MOV instruction. The bit manipulation instruction cannot be used to change the setting value.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
B6WI
1
R/W
Bit 6 Write Inhibit
The TCWE bit can be written only when the write value of
the B6WI bit is 0.
This bit is always read as 1.
6
TCWE
0
R/W
Timer Counter WD Write Enable
TCWD can be written when the TCWE bit is set to 1.
When writing data to this bit, the value for bit 7 must be 0.
Bit 4 Write Inhibit
5
4
B4WI
1
0
R/W
R/W
The TCSRWE bit can be written only when the write
value of the B4WI bit is 0. This bit is always read as 1.
TCSRWE
Timer Control/Status Register WD Write Enable
The WDON and WRST bits can be written when the
TCSRWE bit is set to 1.
When writing data to this bit, the value for bit 5 must be 0.
Bit 2 Write Inhibit
3
B2WI
1
R/W
This bit can be written to the WDON bit only when the
write value of the B2WI bit is 0.
This bit is always read as 1.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 168 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
2
WDON
0
R/W
Watchdog Timer On
TCWD starts counting up when WDON is set to 1 and
halts when WDON is cleared to 0.
[Setting condition]
When 1 is written to the WDON bit while writing 0 to the
B2WI bit when the TCSRWE bit=1
[Clearing condition]
•
•
Reset by RES pin
When 0 is written to the WDON bit while writing 0 to
the B2WI when the TCSRWE bit=1
1
0
B0WI
1
0
R/W
R/W
Bit 0 Write Inhibit
This bit can be written to the WRST bit only when the
write value of the B0WI bit is 0. This bit is always read as
1.
WRST
Watchdog Timer Reset
[Setting condition]
When TCWD overflows and an internal reset signal is
generated
[Clearing condition]
•
•
Reset by RES pin
When 0 is written to the WRST bit while writing 0 to
the B0WI bit when the TCSRWE bit=1
12.2.2 Timer Counter WD (TCWD)
TCWD is an 8-bit readable/writable up-counter. When TCWD overflows from H'FF to H'00, the
internal reset signal is generated and the WRST bit in TCSRWD is set to 1. TCWD is initialized to
H'00.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 169 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.2.3 Timer Mode Register WD (TMWD)
TMWD selects the input clock.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7 to 4
All 1
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
Clock Select 3 to 0
3
2
1
0
CKS3
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Select the clock to be input to TCWD.
1000: Internal clock: counts on φ/64
1001: Internal clock: counts on φ/128
1010: Internal clock: counts on φ/256
1011: Internal clock: counts on φ/512
1100: Internal clock: counts on φ/1024
1101: Internal clock: counts on φ/2048
1110: Internal clock: counts on φ/4096
1111: Internal clock: counts on φ8192
0XXX: Internal oscillator
For the internal oscillator overflow periods, see section
18, Electrical Characteristics.
Legend X: Don't care.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 170 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.3
Operation
The watchdog timer is provided with an 8-bit counter. If 1 is written to WDON while writing 0 to
B2WI when the TCSRWE bit in TCSRWD is set to 1, TCWD begins counting up. (To operate
the watchdog timer, two write accesses to TCSRWD are required.) When a clock pulse is input
after the TCWD count value has reached H'FF, the watchdog timer overflows and an internal reset
signal is generated. The internal reset signal is output for a period of 256 φosc clock cycles. TCWD
is a writable counter, and when a value is set in TCWD, the count-up starts from that value. An
overflow period in the range of 1 to 256 input clock cycles can therefore be set, according to the
TCWD set value.
Figure 12.2 shows an example of watchdog timer operation.
Example: With 30ms overflow period when φ = 4 MHz
4 × 106
8192
× 30 × 10–3 = 14.6
Therefore, 256 – 15 = 241 (H'F1) is set in TCW.
TCWD overflow
H'FF
H'F1
TCWD
count value
H'00
Start
H'F1 written
to TCWD
H'F1 written to TCWD
Reset generated
Internal reset
signal
256 φosc clock cycles
Figure 12.2 Watchdog Timer Operation Example
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 171 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 172 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
This LSI includes a serial communication interface 3 (SCI3). The SCI3 can handle both
asynchronous and clocked synchronous serial communication. In asynchronous mode, serial data
communication can be carried out using standard asynchronous communication chips such as a
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) or an Asynchronous Communication
Interface Adapter (ACIA). A function is also provided for serial communication between
processors (multiprocessor communication function).
Table 13.1 shows the SCI3 channel configuration and figure 13.1 shows a block diagram of the
SCI3. Since pin functions are identical for each of the two channels (SCI3 and SCI3_2), separate
explanations are not given in this section.
13.1
Features
•
•
Choice of asynchronous or clocked synchronous serial communication mode
Full-duplex communication capability
The transmitter and receiver are mutually independent, enabling transmission and reception to
be executed simultaneously.
Double-buffering is used in both the transmitter and the receiver, enabling continuous
transmission and continuous reception of serial data.
•
•
•
On-chip baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected
External clock or on-chip baud rate generator can be selected as a transfer clock source.
Six interrupt sources
Transmit-end, transmit-data-empty, receive-data-full, overrun error, framing error, and parity
error.
Asynchronous mode
•
•
•
•
•
Data length: 7 or 8 bits
Stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits
Parity: Even, odd, or none
Receive error detection: Parity, overrun, and framing errors
Break detection: Break can be detected by reading the RXD pin level directly in the case of a
framing error
SCI0010A_000120030300
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 173 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
Clocked synchronous mode
•
•
Data length: 8 bits
Receive error detection: Overrun errors
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 174 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
Table 13.1 Channel Configuration
Channel
Channel 1*1
Abbreviation
Pin
Register
SMR
Register Address
H'FFA8
H'FFA9
H'FFAA
H'FFAB
H'FFAC
H'FFAD
SCI3
SCK3
RXD
TXD
BRR
SCR3
TDR
SSR
RDR
RSR
TSR
Channel 2
SCI3_2
SCK3_2
RXD_2
TXD_2
SMR_2
BRR_2
SCR3_2
TDR_2
SSR_2
RDR_2
RSR_2
TSR_2
SMR_3
BRR_3
SCR3_3
TDR_3
SSR_3
RDR_3
RSR_3
TSR_3
SMCR
H'F740
H'F741
H'F742
H'F743
H'F744
H'F745
Channel 3*2
SCI3_3
SCK3_3*3
RXD_3
TXD_3
H'F600
H'F601
H'F602
H'F603
H'F604
H'F605
H'F608
Notes: 1. The channel 1 of the SCI3 is used in on-board programming mode by boot mode.
2. The SCI3_3 function is incorporated in the H8/36024.
3. When this pin is used as the SCI3_3 function with the emulator used, the corresponding
PCR value must be cleared to 0.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 175 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
External
clock
Internal clock (ø/64, ø/16, ø/4, ø)
BRR
SCK3
Baud rate generator
BRC
Clock
SMR
SCR3
SSR
Transmit/receive
control circuit
TXD
RXD
TSR
RSR
TDR
RDR
Interrupt request
(TEI, TXI, RXI, ERI)
Legend:
RSR:
Receive shift register
RDR:
TSR:
TDR:
Receive data register
Transmit shift register
Transmit data register
Serial mode register
SMR:
SCR3: Serial control register 3
SSR:
BRR:
BRC:
Serial status register
Bit rate register
Bit rate counter
Figure 13.1 Block Diagram of SCI3
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 176 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
13.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 13.2 shows the SCI3 pin configuration.
Table 13.2 Pin Configuration
Pin Name
Abbreviation
SCK3
I/O
Function
SCI3 clock
I/O
SCI3 clock input/output
SCI3 receive data input
SCI3 receive data input
RXD
Input
SCI3 transmit data output TXD
Output
SCI3 transmit data output
13.3
Register Descriptions
The SCI3 has the following registers for each channel.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Receive Shift Register (RSR)
Receive Data Register (RDR)
Transmit Shift Register (TSR)
Transmit Data Register (TDR)
Serial Mode Register (SMR)
Serial Control Register 3 (SCR3)
Serial Status Register (SSR)
Bit Rate Register (BRR)
SCI3_3 Module Control Register (SMCR)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 177 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
13.3.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR)
RSR is a shift register that is used to receive serial data input from the RXD pin and convert it into
parallel data. When one frame of data has been received, it is transferred to RDR automatically.
RSR cannot be directly accessed by the CPU.
13.3.2 Receive Data Register (RDR)
RDR is an 8-bit register that stores received data. When the SCI3 has received one frame of serial
data, it transfers the received serial data from RSR to RDR, where it is stored. After this, RSR is
receive-enabled. As RSR and RDR function as a double buffer in this way, continuous receive
operations are possible. After confirming that the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, read RDR only
once. RDR cannot be written to by the CPU. RDR is initialized to H'00.
13.3.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR)
TSR is a shift register that transmits serial data. To perform serial data transmission, the SCI3 first
transfers transmit data from TDR to TSR automatically, then sends the data that starts from the
LSB to the TXD pin. TSR cannot be directly accessed by the CPU.
13.3.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR)
TDR is an 8-bit register that stores data for transmission. When the SCI3 detects that TSR is
empty, it transfers the transmit data written in TDR to TSR and starts transmission. The double-
buffered structure of TDR and TSR enables continuous serial transmission. If the next transmit
data has already been written to TDR during transmission of one-frame data, the SCI3 transfers
the written data to TSR to continue transmission. To achieve reliable serial transmission, write
transmit data to TDR only once after confirming that the TDRE bit in SSR is set to 1. TDR is
initialized to H'FF.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 178 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
13.3.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR)
SMR is used to set the SCI3’s serial transfer format and select the baud rate generator clock
source.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
COM
CHR
PE
0
0
0
R/W
Communication Mode
0: Asynchronous mode
1: Clocked synchronous mode
Character Length (enabled only in asynchronous mode)
0: Selects 8 bits as the data length.
1: Selects 7 bits as the data length.
Parity Enable (enabled only in asynchronous mode)
6
5
R/W
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, the parity bit is added to transmit
data before transmission, and the parity bit is checked in
reception.
4
3
PM
0
0
R/W
R/W
Parity Mode (enabled only when the PE bit is 1 in
asynchronous mode)
0: Selects even parity.
1: Selects odd parity.
STOP
Stop Bit Length (enabled only in asynchronous mode)
Selects the stop bit length in transmission.
0: 1 stop bit
1: 2 stop bits
For reception, only the first stop bit is checked, regardless
of the value in the bit. If the second stop bit is 0, it is
treated as the start bit of the next transmit character.
2
MP
0
R/W
Multiprocessor Mode
When this bit is set to 1, the multiprocessor
communication function is enabled. The PE bit and PM
bit settings are invalid in multiprocessor mode. In clocked
synchronous mode, clear this bit to 0.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 179 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
Initial
Bit
1
Bit Name Value
R/W
R/W
R/W
Description
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
Clock Select 0 and 1
0
These bits select the clock source for the baud rate
generator.
00: φ clock (n = 0)
01: φ/4 clock (n = 1)
10: φ/16 clock (n = 2)
11: φ/64 clock (n = 3)
For the relationship between the bit rate register setting
and the baud rate, see section 13.3.8, Bit Rate Register
(BRR). n is the decimal representation of the value of n in
BRR (see section 13.3.8, Bit Rate Register (BRR)).
13.3.6 Serial Control Register 3 (SCR3)
SCR3 is a register that enables or disables SCI3 transfer operations and interrupt requests, and is
also used to select the transfer clock source. For details on interrupt requests, refer to section 13.7,
Interrupts.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
TIE
0
R/W
Transmit Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, the TXI interrupt request is
enabled.
6
RIE
0
R/W
Receive Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, RXI and ERI interrupt requests
are enabled.
5
4
TE
RE
0
0
R/W
R/W
Transmit Enable
When this bit s set to 1, transmission is enabled.
Receive Enable
When this bit is set to 1, reception is enabled.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 180 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
3
MPIE
0
R/W
Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (enabled only when the
MP bit in SMR is 1 in asynchronous mode)
When this bit is set to 1, receive data in which the
multiprocessor bit is 0 is skipped, and setting of the
RDRF, FER, and OER status flags in SSR is disabled.
On receiving data in which the multiprocessor bit is 1, this
bit is automatically cleared and normal reception is
resumed. For details, refer to section 13.6, Multiprocessor
Communication Function.
2
TEIE
0
R/W
Transmit End Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, TEI interrupt request is enabled.
Clock Enable 0 and 1
1
0
CKE1
CKE0
0
0
R/W
R/W
Selects the clock source.
•
Asynchronous mode
00: On-chip baud rate generator
01: On-chip baud rate generator
Outputs a clock of the same frequency as the bit rate
from the SCK3 pin.
10: External clock
Inputs a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate
from the SCK3 pin.
11:Reserved
•
Clocked synchronous mode
00: On-chip clock (SCK3 pin functions as clock output)
01:Reserved
10: External clock (SCK3 pin functions as clock input)
11:Reserved
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 181 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
13.3.7 Serial Status Register (SSR)
SSR is a register containing status flags of the SCI3 and multiprocessor bits for transfer. 1 cannot
be written to flags TDRE, RDRF, OER, PER, and FER; they can only be cleared.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
TDRE 1
R/W
Transmit Data Register Empty
Indicates whether TDR contains transmit data.
[Setting conditions]
•
•
When the TE bit in SCR3 is 0
When data is transferred from TDR to TSR
[Clearing conditions]
•
•
When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
When the transmit data is written to TDR
6
RDRF
0
R/W
Receive Data Register Full
Indicates that the received data is stored in RDR.
[Setting condition]
•
When serial reception ends normally and receive data
is transferred from RSR to RDR
[Clearing conditions]
•
•
When 0 is written to RDRF after reading RDRF = 1
When data is read from RDR
5
4
OER
FER
0
0
R/W
R/W
Overrun Error
[Setting condition]
•
When an overrun error occurs in reception
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written to OER after reading OER = 1
•
Framing Error
[Setting condition]
•
When a framing error occurs in reception
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written to FER after reading FER = 1
•
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 182 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
3
PER
0
R/W
Parity Error
[Setting condition]
•
When a parity error is detected during reception
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written to PER after reading PER = 1
•
2
TEND
1
R
Transmit End
[Setting conditions]
•
•
When the TE bit in SCR3 is 0
When TDRE = 1 at transmission of the last bit of a 1-
frame serial transmit character
[Clearing conditions]
•
•
When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
When the transmit data is written to TDR
1
0
MPBR
MPBT
0
0
R
Multiprocessor Bit Receive
MPBR stores the multiprocessor bit in the receive
character data. When the RE bit in SCR3 is cleared to 0,
its state is retained.
R/W
Multiprocessor Bit Transfer
MPBT stores the multiprocessor bit to be added to the
transmit character data.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 183 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
13.3.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR)
BRR is an 8-bit register that adjusts the bit rate. The initial value of BRR is H'FF. Table 13.3
shows the relationship between the N setting in BRR and the n setting in bits CKS1 and CKS0 of
SMR in asynchronous mode. Table 13.4 shows the maximum bit rate for each frequency in
asynchronous mode. The values shown in both tables 13.3 and 13.4 are values in active (high-
speed) mode. Table 13.5 shows the relationship between the N setting in BRR and the n setting in
bits CKS1 and CKS0 of SMR in clocked synchronous mode. The values shown in table 13.5 are
values in active (high-speed) mode. The N setting in BRR and error for other operating
frequencies and bit rates can be obtained by the following formulas:
[Asynchronous Mode]
φ
× 106 – 1
N =
64 × 22n–1 × B
φ × 106
(N + 1) × B × 64 × 22n–1
Error (%) =
– 1 × 100
[Clocked Synchronous Mode]
φ
× 106 – 1
N =
8 × 22n–1 × B
[Legend]
B: Bit rate (bit/s)
N: BRR setting for baud rate generator (0 ≤ N ≤ 255)
φ: Operating frequency (MHz)
n: CSK1 and CSK0 settings in SMR (0 ≤ n ≤ 3)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 184 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
Table 13.3 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (1)
Operating Frequency φ (MHz)
2
2.097152
Error
(%)
2.4576
Error
(%)
3
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
n
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
N
110
141 0.03
103 0.16
207 0.16
103 0.16
148 –0.04
108 0.21
217 0.21
108 0.21
174 –0.26
127 0.00
255 0.00
127 0.00
212 0.03
155 0.16
150
300
77
0.16
600
155 0.16
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
31250
38400
51
25
12
6
0.16
54
26
13
6
–0.70
1.14
63
31
15
7
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
22.88
0.00
77
38
19
9
0.16
0.16
–2.34
–2.34
–2.34
0.00
—
0.16
0.16
–2.48
–2.48
13.78
4.86
–6.99
8.51
2
2
3
4
1
0.00
1
1
2
1
–18.62
1
–14.67
1
—
Operating Frequency φ (MHz)
4.9152
Error
3.6864
Error
4
5
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
n
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
N
(%)
n
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
(%)
n
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
110
64
0.70
70
0.03
86
0.31
88
64
–0.25
0.16
150
191 0.00
95 0.00
191 0.00
207 0.16
103 0.16
207 0.16
103 0.16
255 0.00
127 0.00
255 0.00
127 0.00
300
129 0.16
64 0.16
129 0.16
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
31250
38400
Legend
95
47
23
11
5
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
—
51
25
12
6
0.16
0.16
0.16
–6.99
0.00
8.51
63
31
15
7
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
–1.70
0.00
64
32
15
7
0.16
–1.36
1.73
1.73
0.00
1.73
—
2
3
4
4
0.00
2
3
3
: A setting is available but error occurs
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 185 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
Table 13.3 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (2)
Operating Frequency φ (MHz)
6
6.144
7.3728
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
n
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
110
106
77
155
77
155
77
38
19
9
–0.44
0.16
108
79
159
79
159
79
39
19
9
0.08
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
2.40
0.00
130
95
191
95
191
95
47
23
11
6
–0.07
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
5.33
0.00
150
300
0.16
600
0.16
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
31250
38400
0.16
0.16
0.16
–2.34
–2.34
0.00
5
5
4
–2.34
4
5
Operating Frequency φ (MHz)
8
9.8304
10
12
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
n
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
2
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
2
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
110
141 0.03
103 0.16
207 0.16
103 0.16
207 0.16
103 0.16
174 –0.26
127 0.00
255 0.00
127 0.00
255 0.00
127 0.00
177 –0.25
129 0.16
212 0.03
155 0.16
150
300
64
129 0.16
64 0.16
129 0.16
0.16
77
155 0.16
77 0.16
155 0.16
0.16
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
31250
38400
Legend
51
25
12
7
0.16
0.16
0.16
0.00
-6.99
63
31
15
9
0.00
0.00
0.00
–1.70
0.00
64
32
15
9
0.16
–1.36
1.73
0.00
1.73
77
38
19
11
9
0.16
0.16
–2.34
0.00
6
7
7
–2.34
: A setting is available but error occurs.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 186 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
Table 13.3 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (3)
Operating Frequency φ (MHz)
12.888
N
14
14.7456
16
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
n
2
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
n
2
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
—
N
n
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
110
217 0.08
159 0.00
248 –0.17
181 0.16
64
0.70
70
0.03
150
191 0.00
95 0.00
191 0.00
95 0.00
191 0.00
207 0.16
103 0.16
207 0.16
103 0.16
207 0.16
103 0.16
300
79
159 0.00
79 0.00
159 0.00
0.00
90
181 0.16
90 0.16
181 0.16
0.16
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
31250
38400
79
39
19
11
9
0.00
0.00
0.00
2.40
0.00
90
45
22
13
—
0.16
–0.93
–0.93
0.00
—
95
47
23
14
11
0.00
0.00
0.00
–1.70
0.00
51
25
15
12
0.16
0.16
0.00
0.16
Operating Frequency φ (MHz)
18 20
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
n
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
N
110
79
–0.12
0.16
0.16
0.16
0.16
0.16
0.16
–0.96
1.02
0.00
–2.34
88
64
–0.25
0.16
0.16
0.16
0.16
0.16
0.16
0.16
–1.36
0.00
1.73
150
233
116
233
116
233
116
58
300
129
64
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
31250
38400
Legend
129
64
129
64
28
32
17
19
14
15
—: A setting is available but error occurs.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 187 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
Table 13.4 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode)
Maximum Bit
φ (MHz) Rate (bit/s)
Maximum Bit
Rate (bit/s)
n
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
φ (MHz)
8
n
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
62500
250000
307200
312500
375000
384000
437500
460800
500000
537600
562500
625000
2.097152 65536
9.8304
10
2.4576
3
76800
93750
12
3.6864
4
115200
125000
153600
156250
187500
192000
230400
12.288
14
4.9152
5
14.7456
16
6
17.2032
18
6.144
7.3728
20
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 188 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
Table 13.5 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
(1)
Operating Frequency φ (MHz)
2
4
8
10
16
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
3
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
—
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
—
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
N
n
N
110
250
500
1k
70
124
249
124
199
99
49
19
9
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
—
—
—
—
249
124
249
99
49
24
9
249
124
249
99
199
99
39
19
9
124
249
124
199
99
199
79
39
19
7
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
249
124
249
99
199
99
159
79
39
15
7
2.5k
5k
1
10k
0
25k
0
50k
0
100k
250k
500k
1M
4
0
1
3
0
0*
1
3
0
4
0*
1
—
—
0
—
—
0*
3
2M
0*
1
2.5M
4M
—
0*
Legend
Blank : No setting is available.
—
: A setting is available but error occurs.
: Continuous transfer is not possible.
*
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 189 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
Table 13.5 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
(2)
Operating Frequency φ (MHz)
18
20
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
n
—
—
3
N
110
250
500
1k
—
—
3
—
—
—
—
140
69
112
224
112
179
89
44
17
8
155
77
124
249
124
199
99
49
19
9
3
3
2.5k
5k
2
2
1
1
10k
1
1
25k
0
0
50k
0
0
100k
250k
500k
1M
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
4
2M
—
—
—
—
—
0
—
2.5M
4M
—
1
—
—
—
Legend
Blank : No setting is available.
—
: A setting is available but error occurs.
: Continuous transfer is not possible.
*
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 190 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
13.3.9 SCI3_3 Module Control Register (SMCR)
SMCR controls the SCI3_3 and module standby function.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 4
All 1
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
Reserved
3, 2
1
All 1
0
These bits are always read as 1. When the emulator is
used, these bits must be cleared to 0.
TXD_3
R/W
TXD_3 Output Select
Selects the function of the P57/TXD_3 pin.
0: General I/O port
1: TXD_3 output pin
0
MSTS3_3
0
R/W
SCI3_3 Module Standby
When this bit is set to 1, the SCI3_3 enters the standby
state.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 191 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
13.4
Operation in Asynchronous Mode
Figure 13.2 shows the general format for asynchronous serial communication. One character (or
frame) consists of a start bit (low level), followed by data (in LSB-first order), a parity bit (high or
low level), and finally stop bits (high level). Inside the SCI3, the transmitter and receiver are
independent units, enabling full-duplex. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-
buffered structure, so data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling
continuous data transfer.
LSB
MSB
1
Serial
data
Parity
bit
Start
bit
Mark state
Transmit/receive data
7 or 8 bits
Stop bit
1 bit
1 bit,
1 or
or none
2 bits
One unit of transfer data (character or frame)
Figure 13.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication
13.4.1 Clock
Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input at
the SCK3 pin can be selected as the SCI3’s serial clock, according to the setting of the COM bit in
SMR and the CKE0 and CKE1 bits in SCR3. When an external clock is input at the SCK3 pin, the
clock frequency should be 16 times the bit rate used.
When the SCI3 is operated on an internal clock, the clock can be output from the SCK3 pin. The
frequency of the clock output in this case is equal to the bit rate, and the phase is such that the
rising edge of the clock is in the middle of the transmit data, as shown in figure 13.3.
Clock
1
1
0
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 0/1
1 character (frame)
Serial data
Figure 13.3 Relationship between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase
(Asynchronous Mode)(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 192 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
13.4.2 SCI3 Initialization
Before transmitting and receiving data, you should first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR3 to 0,
then initialize the SCI3 as described below. When the operating mode, or transfer format, is
changed for example, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 before making the change using the
following procedure. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the TDRE flag is set to 1. Note that clearing
the RE bit to 0 does not initialize the contents of the RDRF, PER, FER, and OER flags, or the
contents of RDR. When the external clock is used in asynchronous mode, the clock must be
supplied even during initialization.
[1] Set the clock selection in SCR3.
Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and
MPIE, and bits TE and RE, to 0.
Start initialization
When the clock output is selected in
asynchronous mode, clock is output
immediately after CKE1 and CKE0
settings are made. When the clock
output is selected at reception in clocked
synchronous mode, clock is output
immediately after CKE1, CKE0, and RE
are set to 1.
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR3 to 0
Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR3
Set data transfer format in SMR
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2] Set the data transfer format in SMR.
Set value in BRR
Wait
[3] Write a value corresponding to the bit
rate to BRR. Not necessary if an
external clock is used.
No
1-bit interval elapsed?
Yes
[4] Wait at least one bit interval, then set the
TE bit or RE bit in SCR3 to 1. RE
settings enable the RXD pin to be used.
For transmission, set the TXD bit in
PMR1 to 1 to enable the TXD output pin
to be used. Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE,
and MPIE bits, depending on whether
interrupts are required. In asynchronous
mode, the bits are marked at
Set TE and RE bits in
SCR3 to 1, and set RIE, TIE, TEIE,
and MPIE bits. For transmit (TE=1),
also set the TxD bit in PMR1.
[4]
transmission and idled at reception to
wait for the start bit.
<Initialization completion>
Figure 13.4 Sample SCI3 Initialization Flowchart
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 193 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
13.4.3 Data Transmission
Figure 13.5 shows an example of operation for transmission in asynchronous mode. In
transmission, the SCI3 operates as described below.
1. The SCI3 monitors the TDRE flag in SSR. If the flag is cleared to 0, the SCI3 recognizes that
data has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR.
2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI3 sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts
transmission. If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a TXI interrupt request is generated.
Continuous transmission is possible because the TXI interrupt routine writes next transmit data
to TDR before transmission of the current transmit data has been completed.
3. The SCI3 checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit.
4. If the TDRE flag is 0, the data is transferred from TDR to TSR, the stop bit is sent, and then
serial transmission of the next frame is started.
5. If the TDRE flag is 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the “mark
state” is entered, in which 1 is output. If the TEIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, a TEI
interrupt request is generated.
6. Figure 13.6 shows a sample flowchart for transmission in asynchronous mode.
Start
bit
Transmit
data
Parity Stop Start
Transmit
data
Parity Stop
Mark
state
bit
bit bit
bit
bit
Serial
data
1
0
D0 D1
D7 0/1
1
0
D0 D1
1 frame
D7 0/1
1
1
1 frame
TDRE
TEND
LSI
TXI interrupt
TDRE flag
cleared to 0
TXI interrupt request generated
TEI interrupt request
generated
operation request
generated
User
processing
Data written
to TDR
Figure 13.5 Example of SCI3 Transmission in Asynchronous Mode
(8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 194 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
Start transmission
[1] Read SSR and check that the
TDRE flag is set to 1, then write
transmit data to TDR. When data is
written to TDR, the TDRE flag is
automaticaly cleared to 0.
[1]
Read TDRE flag in SSR
[2] To continue serial transmission,
read 1 from the TDRE flag to
confirm that writing is possible,
then write data to TDR. When data
is written to TDR, the TDRE flag is
automaticaly cleared to 0.
No
TDRE = 1
Yes
Write transmit data to TDR
[3] To output a break in serial
transmission, after setting PCR to 1
and PDR to 0, clear TxD in PMR1
to 0, then clear the TE bit in SCR3
to 0.
Yes
[2]
All data transmitted?
No
Read TEND flag in SSR
No
No
TEND = 1
Yes
[3]
Break output?
Yes
Clear PDR to 0 and
set PCR to 1
Clear TE bit in SCR3 to 0
<End>
Figure 13.6 Sample Serial Transmission Data Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 195 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
13.4.4 Serial Data Reception
Figure 13.7 shows an example of operation for reception in asynchronous mode. In serial
reception, the SCI3 operates as described below.
1. The SCI3 monitors the communication line. If a start bit is detected, the SCI3 performs
internal synchronization, receives receive data in RSR, and checks the parity bit and stop bit.
2. If an overrun error occurs (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag
is still set to 1), the OER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, an
ERI interrupt request is generated. Receive data is not transferred to RDR.
3. If a parity error is detected, the PER bit in SSR is set to 1 and receive data is transferred to
RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated.
4. If a framing error is detected (when the stop bit is 0), the FER bit in SSR is set to 1 and receive
data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt
request is generated.
5. If reception is completed successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is
transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt request is
generated. Continuous reception is possible because the RXI interrupt routine reads the receive
data transferred to RDR before reception of the next receive data has been completed.
Start
bit
Receive
data
Parity Stop Start
Receive
data
Parity Stop Mark state
bit
bit bit
bit
bit
(idle state)
Serial
data
1
0
D0 D1
D7 0/1
1
0
D0 D1
1 frame
D7 0/1
0
1
1 frame
RDRF
FER
LSI
operation
RXI request RDRF
cleared to 0
0 stop bit
detected
ERI request in
response to
framing error
User
processing
RDR data read
Framing error
processing
Figure 13.7 Example of SCI3 Reception in Asynchronous Mode
(8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 196 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
Table 13.6 shows the states of the SSR status flags and receive data handling when a receive error
is detected. If a receive error is detected, the RDRF flag retains its state before receiving data.
Reception cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the OER,
FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 13.8 shows a sample flow chart
for serial data reception.
Table 13.6 SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling
SSR Status Flag
RDRF* OER
FER
0
PER
Receive Data
Lost
Receive Error Type
Overrun error
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
Transferred to RDR
Transferred to RDR
Lost
Framing error
0
Parity error
1
Overrun error + framing error
Overrun error + parity error
Framing error + parity error
0
Lost
1
Transferred to RDR
Lost
1
Overrun error + framing error +
parity error
Note: * The RDRF flag retains the state it had before data reception.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 197 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
Start reception
[1] Read the OER, PER, and FER flags in
SSR to identify the error. If a receive
error occurs, performs the appropriate
error processing.
[2] Read SSR and check that RDRF = 1,
then read the receive data in RDR.
The RDRF flag is cleared automatically.
[3] To continue serial reception, before the
stop bit for the current frame is
Read OER, PER, and
[1]
FER flags in SSR
Yes
OER+PER+FER = 1
[4]
received, read the RDRF flag and read
RDR.
No
Error processing
The RDRF flag is cleared automatically.
[4] If a receive error occurs, read the OER,
PER, and FER flags in SSR to identify
the error. After performing the
(Continued on next page)
[2]
Read RDRF flag in SSR
appropriate error processing, ensure
that the OER, PER, and FER flags are
all cleared to 0. Reception cannot be
resumed if any of these flags are set to
1. In the case of a framing error, a
break can be detected by reading the
value of the input port corresponding to
the RxD pin.
No
RDRF = 1
Yes
Read receive data in RDR
Yes
All data received?
No
[3]
(A)
Clear RE bit in SCR3 to 0
<End>
Figure 13.8 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode)(1)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 198 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
[4]
Error processing
No
OER = 1
Yes
Overrun error processing
No
FER = 1
Yes
Yes
Break?
No
Framing error processing
No
PER = 1
Yes
Parity error processing
(A)
Clear OER, PER, and
FER flags in SSR to 0
<End>
Figure 13.8 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode)(2)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 199 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
13.5
Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode
Figure 13.9 shows the general format for clocked synchronous communication. In clocked
synchronous mode, data is transmitted or received synchronous with clock pulses. A single
character in the transmit data consists of the 8-bit data starting from the LSB. In clocked
synchronous serial communication, data on the transmission line is output from one falling edge of
the synchronization clock to the next. In clocked synchronous mode, the SCI3 receives data in
synchronous with the rising edge of the synchronization clock. After 8-bit data is output, the
transmission line holds the MSB state. In clocked synchronous mode, no parity or multiprocessor
bit is added. Inside the SCI3, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-
duplex communication through the use of a common clock. Both the transmitter and the receiver
also have a double-buffered structure, so data can be read or written during transmission or
reception, enabling continuous data transfer.
8-bit
One unit of transfer data (character or frame)
*
*
Synchronization
clock
LSB
Bit 0
MSB
Bit 7
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Serial data
Don’t care
Note: * High except in continuous transfer
Don’t care
Figure 13.9 Data Format in Clocked Synchronous Communication
13.5.1 Clock
Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external
synchronization clock input at the SCK3 pin can be selected, according to the setting of the COM
bit in SMR and CKE0 and CKE1 bits in SCR3. When the SCI3 is operated on an internal clock,
the synchronization clock is output from the SCK3 pin. Eight synchronization clock pulses are
output in the transfer of one character, and when no transfer is performed the clock is fixed high.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 200 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
13.5.2 SCI3 Initialization
Before transmitting and receiving data, the SCI3 should be initialized as described in a sample
flowchart in figure 13.4.
13.5.3 Serial Data Transmission
Figure 13.10 shows an example of SCI3 operation for transmission in clocked synchronous mode.
In serial transmission, the SCI3 operates as described below.
1. The SCI3 monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if the flag is 0, the SCI3 recognizes that data
has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR.
2. The SCI3 sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmission. If the TIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at
this time, a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) is generated.
3. 8-bit data is sent from the TXD pin synchronized with the output clock when output clock
mode has been specified, and synchronized with the input clock when use of an external clock
has been specified. Serial data is transmitted sequentially from the LSB (bit 0), from the TXD
pin.
4. The SCI3 checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the MSB (bit 7).
5. If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR to TSR, and serial transmission
of the next frame is started.
6. If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, and the TDRE flag maintains
the output state of the last bit. If the TEIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, a TEI interrupt
request is generated.
7. The SCK3 pin is fixed high at the end of transmission.
Figure 13.11 shows a sample flow chart for serial data transmission. Even if the TDRE flag is
cleared to 0, transmission will not start while a receive error flag (OER, FER, or PER) is set to 1.
Make sure that the receive error flags are cleared to 0 before starting transmission.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 201 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
Serial
clock
Serial
data
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
1 frame
1 frame
TDRE
TEND
LSI
TXI interrupt
TDRE flag
cleared
to 0
TXI interrupt request generated
TEI interrupt request
generated
operation request
generated
User
processing
Data written
to TDR
Figure 13.10 Example of SCI3 Transmission in Clocked Synchronous Mode
Start transmission
[1] Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is
set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR.
When data is written to TDR, the TDRE flag
[1]
Read TDRE flag in SSR
is automatically cleared to 0 and clocks are
output to start the data transmission.
[2] To continue serial transmission, be sure to
read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that
writing is possible, then write data to TDR.
When data is written to TDR, the TDRE flag
is automatically cleared to 0.
No
TDRE = 1
Yes
Write transmit data to TDR
Yes
All data transmitted?
No
[2]
Read TEND flag in SSR
No
TEND = 1
Yes
Clear TE bit in SCR3 to 0
<End>
Figure 13.11 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 202 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
13.5.4 Serial Data Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
Figure 13.12 shows an example of SCI3 operation for reception in clocked synchronous mode. In
serial reception, the SCI3 operates as described below.
1. The SCI3 performs internal initialization synchronous with a synchronization clock input or
output, starts receiving data.
2. The SCI3 stores the receive data in RSR.
3. If an overrun error occurs (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag
in SSR is still set to 1), the OER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this
time, an ERI interrupt request is generated, receive data is not transferred to RDR, and the
RDRF flag remains to be set to 1.
4. If reception is completed successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is
transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt request is
generated.
Serial
clock
Serial
data
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
1 frame
1 frame
RDRF
OER
LSI
RXI interrupt RDRF flag
RXI interrupt request generated
ERI interrupt request
operation
request
generated
cleared
to 0
generated by
overrun error
User
processing
RDR data read
RDR data has
not been read
(RDRF = 1)
Overrun error
processing
Figure 13.12 Example of SCI3 Reception in Clocked Synchronous Mode
Reception cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the OER,
FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 13.13 shows a sample flow
chart for serial data reception.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 203 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
Start reception
[1] Read the OER flag in SSR to determine if
there is an error. If an overrun error has
occurred, execute overrun error processing.
[2] Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is
set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR.
When data is read from RDR, the RDRF
flag is automatically cleared to 0.
[1]
Read OER flag in SSR
Yes
OER = 1
[4]
[3] To continue serial reception, before the
MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received,
reading the RDRF flag and reading RDR
should be finished. When data is read from
RDR, the RDRF flag is automatically
cleared to 0.
No
Error processing
(Continued below)
Read RDRF flag in SSR
[2]
[4] If an overrun error occurs, read the OER
flag in SSR, and after performing the
appropriate error processing, clear the OER
flag to 0. Reception cannot be resumed if
the OER flag is set to 1.
No
RDRF = 1
Yes
Read receive data in RDR
Yes
All data received?
No
[3]
Clear RE bit in SCR3 to 0
<End>
[4]
Error processing
Overrun error processing
Clear OER flag in SSR to 0
<End>
Figure 13.13 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 204 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
13.5.5 Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception
Figure 13.14 shows a sample flowchart for simultaneous serial transmit and receive operations.
The following procedure should be used for simultaneous serial data transmit and receive
operations. To switch from transmit mode to simultaneous transmit and receive mode, after
checking that the SCI3 has finished transmission and the TDRE and TEND flags are set to 1, clear
TE to 0. Then simultaneously set TE and RE to 1 with a single instruction. To switch from receive
mode to simultaneous transmit and receive mode, after checking that the SCI3 has finished
reception, clear RE to 0. Then after checking that the RDRF and receive error flags (OER, FER,
and PER) are cleared to 0, simultaneously set TE and RE to 1 with a single instruction.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 205 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
Start transmission/reception
[1] Read SSR and check that the TDRE
flag is set to 1, then write transmit
data to TDR.
When data is written to TDR, the
TDRE flag is automatically cleared to
0.
Read TDRE flag in SSR
[1]
No
[2] Read SSR and check that the RDRF
flag is set to 1, then read the receive
data in RDR.
TDRE = 1
Yes
When data is read from RDR, the
RDRF flag is automatically cleared to
0.
Write transmit data to TDR
Read OER flag in SSR
[3] To continue serial transmission/
reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of
the current frame is received, finish
reading the RDRF flag, reading RDR.
Also, before the MSB (bit 7) of the
current frame is transmitted, read 1
from the TDRE flag to confirm that
writing is possible. Then write data to
TDR.
Yes
OER = 1
No
[4]
Error processing
[2]
When data is written to TDR, the
TDRE flag is automatically cleared to
0. When data is read from RDR, the
RDRF flag is automatically cleared to
0.
Read RDRF flag in SSR
[4] If an overrun error occurs, read the
OER flag in SSR, and after
performing the appropriate error
processing, clear the OER flag to 0.
Transmission/reception cannot be
resumed if the OER flag is set to 1.
For overrun error processing, see
figure 13.13.
No
RDRF = 1
Yes
Read receive data in RDR
Yes
All data received?
No
[3]
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0
<End>
Figure 13.14 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations
(Clocked Synchronous Mode)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 206 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
13.6
Multiprocessor Communication Function
Use of the multiprocessor communication function enables data transfer between a number of
processors sharing communication lines by asynchronous serial communication using the
multiprocessor format, in which a multiprocessor bit is added to the transfer data. When
multiprocessor communication is performed, each receiving station is addressed by a unique ID
code. The serial communication cycle consists of two component cycles; an ID transmission cycle
that specifies the receiving station, and a data transmission cycle. The multiprocessor bit is used to
differentiate between the ID transmission cycle and the data transmission cycle. If the
multiprocessor bit is 1, the cycle is an ID transmission cycle; if the multiprocessor bit is 0, the
cycle is a data transmission cycle. Figure 13.15 shows an example of inter-processor
communication using the multiprocessor format. The transmitting station first sends the ID code
of the receiving station with which it wants to perform serial communication as data with a 1
multiprocessor bit added. It then sends transmit data as data with a 0 multiprocessor bit added.
When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received, the receiving station compares that data with its
own ID. The station whose ID matches then receives the data sent next. Stations whose IDs do not
match continue to skip data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is again received.
The SCI3 uses the MPIE bit in SCR3 to implement this function. When the MPIE bit is set to 1,
transfer of receive data from RSR to RDR, error flag detection, and setting the SSR status flags,
RDRF, FER, and OER, to 1, are inhibited until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received. On
reception of a receive character with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the MPBR bit in SSR is set to 1 and
the MPIE bit is automatically cleared, thus normal reception is resumed. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is
set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt is generated.
When the multiprocessor format is selected, the parity bit setting is rendered invalid. All other bit
settings are the same as those in normal asynchronous mode. The clock used for multiprocessor
communication is the same as that in normal asynchronous mode.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 207 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
Transmitting
station
Serial transmission line
Receiving
station A
Receiving
station B
Receiving
station C
Receiving
station D
(ID = 01)
(ID = 02)
(ID = 03)
(ID = 04)
Serial
data
H'01
H'AA
(MPB = 1)
(MPB = 0)
ID transmission cycle = Data transmission cycle =
receiving station
specification
Data transmission to
receiving station specified by ID
Legend
MPB: Multiprocessor bit
Figure 13.15 Example of Inter-Processor Communication Using Multiprocessor Format
(Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A)
13.6.1 Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission
Figure 13.16 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data transmission. For an ID
transmission cycle, set the MPBT bit in SSR to 1 before transmission. For a data transmission
cycle, clear the MPBT bit in SSR to 0 before transmission. All other SCI3 operations are the same
as those in asynchronous mode.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 208 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
Start transmission
[1] Read SSR and check that the TDRE
flag is set to 1, set the MPBT bit in
SSR to 0 or 1, then write transmit
data to TDR. When data is written to
TDR, the TDRE flag is automatically
cleared to 0.
[1]
Read TDRE flag in SSR
No
TDRE = 1
Yes
[2] To continue serial transmission, be
sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to
confirm that writing is possible, then
write data to TDR. When data is
written to TDR, the TDRE flag is
automatically cleared to 0.
Set MPBT bit in SSR
[3] To output a break in serial
transmission, set the port PCR to 1,
clear PDR to 0, then clear the TE bit
in SCR3 to 0.
Write transmit data to TDR
Yes
[2]
All data transmitted?
No
Read TEND flag in SSR
No
No
TEND = 1
Yes
Break output?
Yes
[3]
Clear PDR to 0 and set PCR to 1
Clear TE bit in SCR3 to 0
<End>
Figure 13.16 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 209 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
13.6.2 Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception
Figure 13.17 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data reception. If the MPIE bit in
SCR3 is set to 1, data is skipped until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is sent. On receiving data
with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the receive data is transferred to RDR. An RXI interrupt request is
generated at this time. All other SCI3 operations are the same as those in asynchronous mode.
Figure 13.18 shows an example of SCI3 operation for multiprocessor format reception.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 210 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
[1] Set the MPIE bit in SCR3 to 1.
[2] Read OER and FER in SSR to check for
errors. Receive error processing is performed
in cases where a receive error occurs.
[3] Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is
set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR
and compare it with this station’s ID.
If the data is not this station’s ID, set the MPIE
bit to 1 again.
Start reception
Set MPIE bit in SCR3 to 1
[1]
[2]
Read OER and FER flags in SSR
Yes
FER+OER = 1
When data is read from RDR, the RDRF flag
is automatically cleared to 0.
No
Read RDRF flag in SSR
[3]
[4] Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is
set to 1, then read the data in RDR.
[5] If a receive error occurs, read the OER and
FER flags in SSR to identify the error. After
performing the appropriate error processing,
ensure that the OER and FER flags are all
cleared to 0.
No
No
RDRF = 1
Yes
Read receive data in RDR
Reception cannot be resumed if either of
these flags is set to 1.
This station’s ID?
Yes
In the case of a framing error, a break can be
detected by reading the RxD pin value.
Read OER and FER flags in SSR
Yes
FER+OER = 1
No
Read RDRF flag in SSR
[4]
[5]
No
RDRF = 1
Error processing
Yes
(Continued on
next page)
Read receive data in RDR
Yes
All data received?
No
[A]
Clear RE bit in SCR3 to 0
<End>
Figure 13.17 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 211 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
[5]
Error processing
No
OER = 1
Yes
Overrun error processing
No
FER = 1
Yes
Yes
Break?
No
[A]
Framing error processing
Clear OER, and
FER flags in SSR to 0
<End>
Figure 13.17 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (2)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 212 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
Start
bit
Receive
data (ID1)
Stop Start
bit bit
Receive data
(Data1)
Stop Mark state
bit
(idle state)
MPB
1
MPB
0
Serial
data
1
0
D0 D1
D7
1
0
D0 D1
1 frame
D7
1
1
1 frame
MPIE
RDRF
RDR
value
ID1
LSI
operation
RXI interrupt
request
MPIE cleared
to 0
RDRF flag
cleared
to 0
RXI interrupt request
is not generated, and
RDR retains its state
User
processing
RDR data read
When data is not
this station's ID,
MPIE is set to 1
again
(a) When data does not match this receiver's ID
Start
bit
Receive
data (ID2)
Stop Start
bit bit
Receive data
(Data2)
Stop Mark state
bit
(idle state)
MPB
1
MPB
0
Serial
data
1
0
D0 D1
D7
1
0
D0 D1
1 frame
D7
1
1
1 frame
MPIE
RDRF
RDR
value
ID1
ID2
Data2
LSI
operation
RXI interrupt
request
MPIE cleared
to 0
RDRF flag
cleared
to 0
RXI interrupt RDRF flag
request
cleared
to 0
User
processing
RDR data read
When data is
this station's
ID, reception
is continued
RDR data read
MPIE set to 1
again
(b) When data matches this receiver's ID
Figure 13.18 Example of SCI3 Reception Using Multiprocessor Format
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 213 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
13.7
Interrupts
SCI3 creates the following six interrupt requests: transmission end, transmit data empty, receive
data full, and receive errors (overrun error, framing error, and parity error). Table 13.7 shows the
interrupt sources.
Table 13.7 SCI3 Interrupt Requests
Interrupt Requests
Receive Data Full
Transmit Data Empty
Transmission End
Receive Error
Abbreviation
Interrupt Sources
RXI
TXI
TEI
ERI
Setting RDRF in SSR
Setting TDRE in SSR
Setting TEND in SSR
Setting OER, FER, and PER in SSR
The initial value of the TDRE flag in SSR is 1. Thus, when the TIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 before
transferring the transmit data to TDR, a TXI interrupt request is generated even if the transmit data
is not ready. The initial value of the TEND flag in SSR is 1. Thus, when the TEIE bit in SCR3 is
set to 1 before transferring the transmit data to TDR, a TEI interrupt request is generated even if
the transmit data has not been sent. It is possible to make use of the most of these interrupt
requests efficiently by transferring the transmit data to TDR in the interrupt routine. To prevent the
generation of these interrupt requests (TXI and TEI), set the enable bits (TIE and TEIE) that
correspond to these interrupt requests to 1, after transferring the transmit data to TDR.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 214 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
13.8
Usage Notes
13.8.1 Break Detection and Processing
When framing error detection is performed, a break can be detected by reading the RXD pin value
directly. In a break, the input from the RXD pin becomes all 0s, setting the FER flag, and possibly
the PER flag. Note that as the SCI3 continues the receive operation after receiving a break, even if
the FER flag is cleared to 0, it will be set to 1 again.
13.8.2 Mark State and Break Sending
When TE is 0, the TXD pin is used as an I/O port whose direction (input or output) and level are
determined by PCR and PDR. This can be used to set the TXD pin to mark state (high level) or
send a break during serial data transmission. To maintain the communication line at mark state
until TE is set to 1, set both PCR and PDR to 1. As TE is cleared to 0 at this point, the TXD pin
becomes an I/O port, and 1 is output from the TXD pin. To send a break during serial
transmission, first set PCR to 1 and clear PDR to 0, and then clear TE to 0. When TE is cleared to
0, the transmitter is initialized regardless of the current transmission state, the TXD pin becomes
an I/O port, and 0 is output from the TXD pin.
13.8.3 Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Clocked Synchronous Mode Only)
Transmission cannot be started when a receive error flag (OER, PER, or FER) is set to 1, even if
the TDRE flag is cleared to 0. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before starting
transmission. Note also that receive error flags cannot be cleared to 0 even if the RE bit is cleared
to 0.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 215 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)
13.8.4 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode
In asynchronous mode, the SCI3 operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 16 times the
transfer rate. In reception, the SCI3 samples the falling edge of the start bit using the basic clock,
and performs internal synchronization. Receive data is latched internally at the rising edge of the
8th pulse of the basic clock as shown in figure 13.19. Thus, the reception margin in asynchronous
mode is given by formula (1) below.
1
D – 0.5
N
M = (0.5 –
) –
– (L – 0.5) F × 100(%)
2N
... Formula (1)
[Legend\
N: Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 16)
D: Clock duty (D = 0.5 to 1.0)
L: Frame length (L = 9 to 12)
F: Absolute value of clock rate deviation
Assuming values of F (absolute value of clock rate deviation) = 0 and D (clock duty) = 0.5 in
formula (1), the reception margin can be given by the formula.
M = {0.5 – 1/(2 × 16)} × 100 [%] = 46.875%
However, this is only the computed value, and a margin of 20% to 30% should be allowed for in
system design.
16 clocks
8 clocks
0
7
15
0
7
15 0
Internal basic
clock
Receive data
(RxD)
Start bit
D0
D1
Synchronization
sampling timing
Data sampling
timing
Figure 13.19 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 216 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 14 A/D Converter
Section 14 A/D Converter
This LSI includes a successive approximation type 10-bit A/D converter that allows up to four
analog input channels to be selected. The block diagram of the A/D converter is shown in figure
14.1.
14.1
Features
•
•
•
•
10-bit resolution
Four input channels
Conversion time: at least 3.5 µs per channel (at 20 MHz operation)
Two operating modes
Single mode: Single-channel A/D conversion
Scan mode: Continuous A/D conversion on 1 to 4 channels
Four data registers
•
Conversion results are held in a 16-bit data register for each channel
Sample and hold function
•
•
Two conversion start methods
Software
External trigger signal
•
Interrupt request
An A/D conversion end interrupt request (ADI) can be generated
ADCMS32A_000020020200
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 217 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 14 A/D Converter
Module data bus
Internal data bus
AVCC
A
D
D
R
A
A
D
D
R
B
A
D
D
R
C
A
D
D
R
D
A
D
C
S
R
A
D
C
R
10-bit D/A
+
ø/4
ø/8
AN0
AN1
AN2
AN3
Control circuit
Comparator
Sample-and-
hold circuit
ADI
interrupt request
ADTRG
Legend
ADCR : A/D control register
ADCSR : A/D control/status register
ADDRA : A/D data register A
ADDRB : A/D data register B
ADDRC : A/D data register C
ADDRD : A/D data register D
Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 218 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 14 A/D Converter
14.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 14.1 summarizes the input pins used by the A/D converter.
Table 14.1 Pin Configuration
Pin Name
Symbol
AVCC
I/O
Function
Analog power supply pin
Analog input pin 0
Analog input pin 1
Analog input pin 2
Analog input pin 3
A/D external trigger input pin
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Analog block power supply pin
Analog input pins
AN0
AN1
AN2
AN3
ADTRG
External trigger input pin for starting A/D
conversion
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 219 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 14 A/D Converter
14.3
Register Description
The A/D converter has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
•
•
A/D data register A (ADDRA)
A/D data register B (ADDRB)
A/D data register C (ADDRC)
A/D data register D (ADDRD)
A/D control/status register (ADCSR)
A/D control register (ADCR)
14.3.1 A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD)
There are four 16-bit read-only ADDR registers; ADDRA to ADDRD, used to store the results of
A/D conversion. The ADDR registers, which store a conversion result for each channel, are
shown in table 14.2.
The converted 10-bit data is stored in bits 6 to 15. The lower 6 bits are always read as 0.
The data bus between the CPU and the A/D converter is 8 bits wide. The upper byte can be read
directly from the CPU, however the lower byte should be read via a temporary register. The
temporary register contents are transferred from the ADDR when the upper byte data is read.
Therefore byte access to ADDR should be done by reading the upper byte first then the lower one.
Word access is also possible. ADDR is initialized to H'0000.
Table 14.2 Analog Input Channels and Corresponding ADDR Registers
Analog Input Channel
A/D Data Register to Be Stored Results of A/D Conversion
AN0
AN1
AN2
AN3
ADDRA
ADDRB
ADDRC
ADDRD
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 220 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 14 A/D Converter
14.3.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR)
ADCSR consists of the control bits and conversion end status bits of the A/D converter.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
ADF
0
R/W
A/D End Flag
[Setting conditions]
•
•
When A/D conversion ends in single mode
When A/D conversion ends on all the channels
selected in scan mode
[Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written after reading ADF = 1
•
6
5
ADIE
0
0
R/W
R/W
A/D Interrupt Enable
A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) request enabled by
ADF when 1 is set
ADST
A/D Start
Setting this bit to 1 starts A/D conversion. In single mode,
this bit is cleared to 0 automatically when conversion on
the specified channel is complete. In scan mode,
conversion continues sequentially on the specified
channels until this bit is cleared to 0 by software, a reset,
or a transition to standby mode.
4
3
SCAN
CKS
0
0
R/W
R/W
Scan Mode
Selects single mode or scan mode as the A/D conversion
operating mode.
0: Single mode
1: Scan mode
Clock Select
Selects the A/D conversions time
0: Conversion time = 134 states (max.)
1: Conversion time = 70 states (max.)
Clear the ADST bit to 0 before switching the conversion
time.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 221 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 14 A/D Converter
Initial
Bit Name Value
Bit
2
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Description
CH2
CH1
CH0
0
0
0
Channel Select 0 to 2
Select analog input channels.
1
0
When SCAN = 0
X00: AN0
When SCAN = 1
X00: AN0
X01: AN1
X01: AN0 to AN1
X10: AN0 to AN2
X11: AN0 to AN3
X10: AN2
X11: AN3
Legend X: Don't care.
14.3.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR)
ADCR enables A/D conversion started by an external trigger signal.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
TRGE
0
R/W
Trigger Enable
A/D conversion is started at the falling edge and the rising
edge of the external trigger signal (ADTRG) when this bit
is set to 1.
The selection between the falling edge and rising edge of
the external trigger pin (ADTRG) conforms to the WPEG5
bit in the interrupt edge select register 2 (IEGR2)
6 to 1
0
—
—
All 1
0
—
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
Reserved
R/W
Do not set this bit to 1, though the bit is readable/writable.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 222 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 14 A/D Converter
14.4
Operation
The A/D converter operates by successive approximation with 10-bit resolution. It has two
operating modes; single mode and scan mode. When changing the operating mode or analog input
channel, in order to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the bit ADST to 0 in ADCSR. The
ADST bit can be set at the same time as the operating mode or analog input channel is changed.
14.4.1 Single Mode
In single mode, A/D conversion is performed once for the analog input on the specified single
channel as follows:
1. A/D conversion is started from the first channel when the ADST bit in ADCSR is set to 1,
according to software or external trigger input.
2. When A/D conversion is completed, the result is transferred to the corresponding A/D data
register to the channel.
3. On completion of conversion, the ADF bit in ADCSR is set to 1. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at
this time, an ADI interrupt request is generated.
4. The ADST bit remains set to 1 during A/D conversion. When A/D conversion ends, the
ADST bit is automatically cleared to 0 and the A/D converter enters the wait state.
14.4.2 Scan Mode
In scan mode, A/D conversion is performed sequentially for the analog input on the specified
channels (four channels maximum) as follows:
1. When the ADST bit is set to 1 by software, or external trigger input, A/D conversion starts on
the first channel in the group.
2. When A/D conversion for each channel is completed, the result is sequentially transferred to
the A/D data register corresponding to each channel.
3. When conversion of all the selected channels is completed, the ADF flag in ADCSR is set to 1.
If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an ADI interrupt is requested. Conversion of the first
channel in the group starts again.
4. The ADST bit is not automatically cleared to 0. Steps [2] to [3] are repeated as long as the
ADST bit remains set to 1. When the ADST bit is cleared to 0, A/D conversion stops.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 223 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 14 A/D Converter
14.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time
The A/D converter has a built-in sample-and-hold circuit. The A/D converter samples the analog
input when the A/D conversion start delay time (tD) has passed after the ADST bit is set to 1, then
starts conversion. Figure 14.2 shows the A/D conversion timing. Table 14.3 shows the A/D
conversion time.
As indicated in figure 14.2, the A/D conversion time includes tD and the input sampling time. The
length of tD varies depending on the timing of the write access to ADCSR. The total conversion
time therefore varies within the ranges indicated in table 14.3.
In scan mode, the values given in table 14.3 apply to the first conversion time. In the second and
subsequent conversions, the conversion time is 128 states (fixed) when CKS = 0 and 66 states
(fixed) when CKS = 1.
(1)
ø
Address
(2)
Write signal
Input sampling
timing
ADF
tD
tSPL
tCONV
Legend
(1)
(2)
tD
: ADCSR write cycle
: ADCSR address
: A/D conversion start delay
tSPL : Input sampling time
tCONV : A/D conversion time
Figure 14.2 A/D Conversion Timing
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 224 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 14 A/D Converter
Table 14.3 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode)
CKS = 0
CKS = 1
Item
Symbol
Min
6
Typ
—
Max
9
Min
4
Typ
—
Max
5
A/D conversion start delay tD
Input sampling time
A/D conversion time
tSPL
tCONV
—
31
—
—
69
15
—
131
—
134
—
70
Note: All values represent the number of states.
14.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing
A/D conversion can also be started by an external trigger input. When the TRGE bit is set to 1 in
ADCR, external trigger input is enabled at the ADTRG pin. A falling edge at the ADTRG input
pin sets the ADST bit to 1 in ADCSR, starting A/D conversion. Other operations, in both single
and scan modes, are the same as when the bit ADST has been set to 1 by software. Figure 14.3
shows the timing.
ø
ADTRG
Internal trigger signal
ADST
A/D conversion
Figure 14.3 External Trigger Input Timing
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 225 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 14 A/D Converter
14.5
A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions
This LSI's A/D conversion accuracy definitions are given below.
•
•
•
Resolution
The number of A/D converter digital output codes
Quantization error
The deviation inherent in the A/D converter, given by 1/2 LSB (see figure 14.4).
Offset error
The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic
when the digital output changes from the minimum voltage value 0000000000 to 0000000001
(see figure 14.5).
•
•
•
Full-scale error
The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic
when the digital output changes from 1111111110 to 1111111111 (see figure 14.5).
Nonlinearity error
The error with respect to the ideal A/D conversion characteristics between zero voltage and
full-scale voltage. Does not include offset error, full-scale error, or quantization error.
Absolute accuracy
The deviation between the digital value and the analog input value. Includes offset error, full-
scale error, quantization error, and nonlinearity error.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 226 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 14 A/D Converter
Digital output
Ideal A/D conversion
characteristic
111
110
101
100
011
010
001
Quantization error
000
1
2
8
3
8
4
8
5
8
6
8
7
8
FS
8
Analog
input voltage
Figure 14.4 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions (1)
Full-scale error
Digital output
Ideal A/D conversion
characteristic
Nonlinearity
error
Actual A/D conversion
characteristic
FS
Analog
input voltage
Offset error
Figure 14.5 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions (2)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 227 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 14 A/D Converter
14.6
Usage Notes
14.6.1 Permissible Signal Source Impedance
This LSI's analog input is designed such that conversion accuracy is guaranteed for an input signal
for which the signal source impedance is 5 kΩ or less. This specification is provided to enable the
A/D converter's sample-and-hold circuit input capacitance to be charged within the sampling time;
if the sensor output impedance exceeds 5 kΩ, charging may be insufficient and it may not be
possible to guarantee A/D conversion accuracy. However, for A/D conversion in single mode with
a large capacitance provided externally, the input load will essentially comprise only the internal
input resistance of 10 kΩ, and the signal source impedance is ignored. However, as a low-pass
filter effect is obtained in this case, it may not be possible to follow an analog signal with a large
differential coefficient (e.g., 5 mV/µs or greater) (see figure 14.6). When converting a high-speed
analog signal or converting in scan mode, a low-impedance buffer should be inserted.
14.6.2 Influences on Absolute Accuracy
Adding capacitance results in coupling with GND, and therefore noise in GND may adversely
affect absolute accuracy. Be sure to make the connection to an electrically stable GND.
Care is also required to ensure that filter circuits do not interfere with digital signals or act as
antennas on the mounting board.
This LSI
A/D converter
Sensor output
impedance
equivalent circuit
10 kΩ
to 5 kΩ
Sensor input
Cin
15 pF
=
Low-pass
filter
20 pF
C to 0.1 µF
Figure 14.6 Analog Input Circuit Example
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 228 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 15 Power-On Reset and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits (Optional)
Section 15 Power-On Reset and Low-Voltage Detection
Circuits (Optional)
This LSI can include a power-on reset circuit and low-voltage detection circuit as optional circuits.
The low-voltage detection circuit consists of two circuits: LVDI (interrupt by low voltage detect)
and LVDR (reset by low voltage detect) circuits.
This circuit is used to prevent abnormal operation (runaway execution) from occurring due to the
power supply voltage fall and to recreate the state before the power supply voltage fall when the
power supply voltage rises again.
Even if the power supply voltage falls, the unstable state when the power supply voltage falls
below the guaranteed operating voltage can be removed by entering standby mode when
exceeding the guaranteed operating voltage and during normal operation. Thus, system stability
can be improved. If the power supply voltage falls more, the reset state is automatically entered. If
the power supply voltage rises again, the reset state is held for a specified period, then active mode
is automatically entered.
Figure 15.1 is a block diagram of the power-on reset circuit and the low-voltage detection circuit.
15.1
Features
•
•
Power-on reset circuit
Uses an external capacitor to generate an internal reset signal when power is first supplied.
Low-voltage detection circuit
LVDR: Monitors the power-supply voltage, and generates an internal reset signal when the
voltage falls below a specified value.
LVDI: Monitors the power-supply voltage, and generates an interrupt when the voltage falls
below or rises above respective specified values.
Two pairs of detection levels for reset generation voltage are available: when only the LVDR
circuit is used, or when the LVDI and LVDR circuits are both used.
LVI0000A_000020030300
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 229 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 15 Power-On Reset and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits (Optional)
φ
OVF
CK
PSS
R
R
S
RES
Internal reset
signal
Q
Noise canceler
Power-on reset circuit
Noise canceler
LVDCR
Vreset
Vint
+
Ladder
resistor
Vcc
−
LVDRES
+
Interrupt
control
circuit
LVDSR
−
LVDINT
Reference
voltage
generator
Interrupt
request
Low-voltage detection circuit
Legend
PSS:
Prescaler S
LVDCR: Low-voltage-detection control register
LVDSR: Low-voltage-detection status register
LVDRES: Low-voltage-detection reset signal
LVDINT: Low-voltage-detection interrupt signal
Vreset:
Vint:
Reset detection voltage
Power-supply fall/rise detection voltage
Figure 15.1 Block Diagram of Power-On Reset Circuit and Low-Voltage Detection Circuit
15.2
Register Descriptions
The low-voltage detection circuit has the following registers.
•
•
Low-voltage-detection control register (LVDCR)
Low-voltage-detection status register (LVDSR)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 230 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 15 Power-On Reset and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits (Optional)
15.2.1 Low-Voltage-Detection Control Register (LVDCR)
LVDCR is used to enable or disable the low-voltage detection circuit, set the detection levels for
the LVDR function, enable or disable the LVDR function, and enable or disable generation of an
interrupt when the power-supply voltage rises above or falls below the respective levels.
Table 15.1 shows the relationship between the LVDCR settings and select functions. LVDCR
should be set according to table 15.1.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
LVDE
0*
R/W
LVD Enable
0: The low-voltage detection circuit is not used (In
standby mode)
1: The low-voltage detection circuit is used
Reserved
6 to 4
3
All 1
These bits are always read as 1, and cannot be modified.
LVDR Detection Level Select
LVDSEL
0*
R/W
0: Reset detection voltage is 2.3 V (typ.)
1: Reset detection voltage is 3.6 V (typ.)
When the falling or rising voltage detection interrupt is
used, reset detection voltage of 2.3 V (typ.) should be
used. When only a reset detection interrupt is used, reset
detection voltage of 3.6 V (typ.) should be used.
2
1
LVDRE
LVDDE
0*
R/W
R/W
LVDR Enable
0: Disables the LVDR function
1: Enables the LVDR function
Voltage-Fall-Interrupt Enable
0
0: Interrupt on the power-supply voltage falling below the
selected detection level disabled
1: Interrupt on the power-supply voltage falling below the
selected detection level enabled
0
LVDUE
0
R/W
Voltage-Rise-Interrupt Enable
0: Interrupt on the power-supply voltage rising above the
selected detection level disabled
1: Interrupt on the power-supply voltage rising above the
selected detection level enabled
Note:
*
Not initialized by LVDR but initialized by a power-on reset or WDT reset.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 231 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 15 Power-On Reset and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits (Optional)
Table 15.1 LVDCR Settings and Select Functions
LVDCR Settings
Select Functions
Low-Voltage- Low-Voltage-
Detection
Falling
Detection
Rising
Power-On
Reset
LVDE
LVDSEL LVDRE LVDDE
LVDUE
LVDR
Interrupt
Interrupt
0
1
1
1
1
*
1
0
0
0
*
1
0
0
1
*
0
1
1
1
*
0
0
1
1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Legend * means invalid.
15.2.2 Low-Voltage-Detection Status Register (LVDSR)
LVDSR indicates whether the power-supply voltage falls below or rises above the respective
specified values.
Initial
Bit
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7 to 2
All 1
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1, and cannot be modified.
LVD Power-Supply Voltage Fall Flag
[Setting condition]
1
0
LVDDF
0*
R/W
R/W
When the power-supply voltage falls below Vint (D) (typ. =
3.7 V)
[Clearing condition]
Writing 0 to this bit after reading it as 1
LVD Power-Supply Voltage Rise Flag
[Setting condition]
LVDUF
0*
When the power supply voltage falls below Vint (D) while
the LVDUE bit in LVDCR is set to 1, then rises above Vint
(U) (typ. = 4.0 V) before falling below Vreset1 (typ. = 2.3 V)
[Clearing condition]
Writing 0 to this bit after reading it as 1
Note:
*
Initialized by LVDR.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 232 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 15 Power-On Reset and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits (Optional)
15.3
Operation
15.3.1 Power-On Reset Circuit
Figure 15.2 shows the timing of the operation of the power-on reset circuit. As the power-supply
voltage rises, the capacitor which is externally connected to the RES pin is gradually charged via
the on-chip pull-up resistor (typ. 150 kΩ). Since the state of the RES pin is transmitted within the
chip, the prescaler S and the entire chip are in their reset states. When the level on the RES pin
reaches the specified value, the prescaler S is released from its reset state and it starts counting.
The OVF signal is generated to release the internal reset signal after the prescaler S has counted
131,072 clock (φ) cycles. The noise cancellation circuit of approximately 100 ns is incorporated to
prevent the incorrect operation of the chip by noise on the RES pin.
To achieve stable operation of this LSI, the power supply needs to rise to its full level and settles
within the specified time. The maximum time required for the power supply to rise and settle after
power has been supplied (t ) is determined by the oscillation frequency (fOSC) and capacitance
which is connected to RESPWpOinN (CRES). If tPWON means the time required to reach 90 % of power
supply voltage, the power supply circuit should be designed to satisfy the following formula.
tPWON (ms) ≤ 90 × CRES (µF) + 162/fOSC (MHz)
(tPWON ≤ 3000 ms, CRES ≥ 0.22 µF, and fOSC = 10 in 2-MHz to 10-MHz operation)
Note that the power supply voltage (Vcc) must fall below Vpor = 100 mV and rise after charge on
the RES pin is removed. To remove charge on the RES pin, it is recommended that the diode
should be placed near Vcc. If the power supply voltage (Vcc) rises from the point above Vpor, a
power-on reset may not occur.
tPWON
Vpor
Vcc
Vss
RES
Vss
PSS-reset
signal
OVF
Internal reset
signal
131,072 cycles
PSS counter starts Reset released
Figure 15.2 Operational Timing of Power-On Reset Circuit
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 233 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 15 Power-On Reset and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits (Optional)
15.3.2 Low-Voltage Detection Circuit
(1) LVDR (Reset by Low Voltage Detect) Circuit
Figure 15.3 shows the timing of the LVDR function. The LVDR enters the module-standby state
after a power-on reset is canceled. To operate the LVDR, set the LVDE bit in LVDCR to 1, wait
for 50 µs (tLVDON) until the reference voltage and the low-voltage-detection power supply have
stabilized by a software timer, etc., then set the LVDRE bit in LVDCR to 1. After that, the output
settings of ports must be made. To cancel the low-voltage detection circuit, first the LVDRE bit
should be cleared to 0 and then the LVDE bit should be cleared to 0. The LVDE and LVDRE bits
must not be cleared to 0 simultaneously because incorrect operation may occur.
When the power-supply voltage falls below the Vreset voltage (typ. = 2.3 V or 3.6 V), the LVDR
clears the LVDRES signal to 0, and resets the prescaler S. The low-voltage detection reset state
remains in place until a power-on reset is generated. When the power-supply voltage rises above
the Vreset voltage again, the prescaler S starts counting. It counts 131,072 clock (φ) cycles, and
then releases the internal reset signal. In this case, the LVDE, LVDSEL, and LVDRE bits in
LVDCR are not initialized.
Note that if the power supply voltage (Vcc) falls below VLVDRmin = 1.0 V and then rises from that
point, the low-voltage detection reset may not occur.
If the power supply voltage (Vcc) falls below Vpor = 100 mV, a power-on reset occurs.
V
CC
Vreset
VLVDRmin
VSS
LVDRES
PSS-reset
signal
OVF
Internal reset
signal
131,072 cycles
PSS counter starts Reset released
Figure 15.3 Operational Timing of LVDR Circuit
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 234 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 15 Power-On Reset and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits (Optional)
(2) LVDI (Interrupt by Low Voltage Detect) Circuit
Figure 15.4 shows the timing of LVDI functions. The LVDI enters the module-standby state after
a power-on reset is canceled. To operate the LVDI, set the LVDE bit in LVDCR to 1, wait for 50
µs (tLVDON) until the reference voltage and the low-voltage-detection power supply have stabilized
by a software timer, etc., then set the LVDDE and LVDUE bits in LVDCR to 1. After that, the
output settings of ports must be made. To cancel the low-voltage detection circuit, first the
LVDDE and LVDUE bits should all be cleared to 0 and then the LVDE bit should be cleared to 0.
The LVDE bit must not be cleared to 0 at the same timing as the LVDDE and LVDUE bits
because incorrect operation may occur.
When the power-supply voltage falls below Vint (D) (typ. = 3.7 V) voltage, the LVDI clears the
LVDINT signal to 0 and the LVDDF bit in LVDSR is set to 1. If the LVDDE bit is 1 at this time,
an IRQ0 interrupt request is simultaneously generated. In this case, the necessary data must be
saved in the external EEPROM, etc, and a transition must be made to standby mode or subsleep
mode. Until this processing is completed, the power supply voltage must be higher than the lower
limit of the guaranteed operating voltage.
When the power-supply voltage does not fall below Vreset1 (typ. = 2.3 V) voltage but rises above
Vint (U) (typ. = 4.0 V) voltage, the LVDI sets the LVDINT signal to 1. If the LVDUE bit is 1 at
this time, the LVDUF bit in LVDSR is set to 1 and an IRQ0 interrupt request is simultaneously
generated.
If the power supply voltage (Vcc) falls below Vreset1 (typ. = 2.3 V) voltage, the LVDR function
is performed.
Vint (U)
Vint (D)
Vcc
Vreset1
VSS
LVDINT
LVDDE
LVDDF
LVDUE
LVDUF
IRQ0 interrupt generated IRQ0 interrupt generated
Figure 15.4 Operational Timing of LVDI Circuit
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 235 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 15 Power-On Reset and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits (Optional)
(3) Procedures for Clearing Settings when Using LVDR and LVDI
To operate or release the low-voltage detection circuit normally, follow the procedure described
below. Figure 15.5 shows the timing for the operation and release of the low-voltage detection
circuit.
1. To operate the low-voltage detection circuit, set the LVDE bit in LVDCR to 1.
2. Wait for 50 µs (tLVDON) until the reference voltage and the low-voltage-detection power supply
have stabilized by a software timer, etc. Then, clear the LVDDF and LVDUF bits in LVDSR
to 0 and set the LVDRE, LVDDE, and LVDUE bits in LVDCR to 1, as required.
3. To release the low-voltage detection circuit, start by clearing all of the LVDRE, LVDDE, and
LVDUE bits to 0. Then clear the LVDE bit to 0. The LVDE bit must not be cleared to 0 at the
same timing as the LVDRE, LVDDE, and LVDUE bits because incorrect operation may occur.
LVDE
LVDRE
LVDDE
LVDUE
tLVDON
Figure 15.5 Timing for Operation/Release of Low-Voltage Detection Circuit
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 236 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 16 Power Supply Circuit
Section 16 Power Supply Circuit
This LSI incorporates an internal power supply step-down circuit. Use of this circuit enables the
internal power supply to be fixed at a constant level of approximately 3.0 V, independently of the
voltage of the power supply connected to the external VCC pin. As a result, the current consumed
when an external power supply is used at 3.0 V or above can be held down to virtually the same
low level as when used at approximately 3.0 V. If the external power supply is 3.0 V or below, the
internal voltage will be practically the same as the external voltage. It is, of course, also possible to
use the same level of external power supply voltage and internal power supply voltage without
using the internal power supply step-down circuit.
16.1
When Using Internal Power Supply Step-Down Circuit
Connect the external power supply to the VCC pin, and connect a capacitance of approximately 0.1
µF between VCL and VSS, as shown in figure 16.1. The internal step-down circuit is made effective
simply by adding this external circuit. In the external circuit interface, the external power supply
voltage connected to VCC and the GND potential connected to VSS are the reference levels. For
example, for port input/output levels, the VCC level is the reference for the high level, and the VSS
level is that for the low level. The A/D converter analog power supply is not affected by the
internal step-down circuit.
VCC
VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V
Step-down circuit
VCL
Stabilization
capacitance
(approx. 0.1 µF)
Internal
power
supply
Internal
logic
VSS
Figure 16.1 Power Supply Connection when Internal Step-Down Circuit is Used
PSCKT00A_000020020200
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 237 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 16 Power Supply Circuit
16.2
When Not Using Internal Power Supply Step-Down Circuit
When the internal power supply step-down circuit is not used, connect the external power supply
to the VCL pin and VCC pin, as shown in figure 16.2. The external power supply is then input directly
to the internal power supply. The permissible range for the power supply voltage is 3.0 V to 3.6 V.
Operation cannot be guaranteed if a voltage outside this range (less than 3.0 V or more than 3.6 V)
is input.
VCC
VCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V
Step-down circuit
Internal
VCL
Internal
logic
power
supply
VSS
Figure 16.2 Power Supply Connection when Internal Step-Down Circuit is Not Used
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 238 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 17 List of Registers
Section 17 List of Registers
The register list gives information on the on-chip I/O register addresses, how the register bits are
configured, and the register states in each operating mode. The information is given as shown
below.
1. Register addresses (address order)
•
•
•
•
Registers are listed from the lower allocation addresses.
Registers are classified by functional modules.
The data bus width is indicated.
The number of access states is indicated.
2. Register bits
•
•
•
Bit configurations of the registers are described in the same order as the register addresses.
Reserved bits are indicated by in the bit name column.
When registers consist of 16 bits, bits are described from the MSB side.
3. Register states in each operating mode
•
•
Register states are described in the same order as the register addresses.
The register states described here are for the basic operating modes. If there is a specific reset
for an on-chip peripheral module, refer to the section on that on-chip peripheral module.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 239 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 17 List of Registers
17.1
Register Addresses (Address Order)
The data bus width indicates the numbers of bits by which the register is accessed.
The number of access states indicates the number of states based on the specified reference clock.
Abbre-
viation
Module Data Bus Access
Register Name
Bit No Address Name
Width
State
Serial mode register_3
Bit rate register_3
Serial control register 3_3
Transmit data register_3
Serial status register_3
Receive data register_3
SMR_3
BRR_3
SCR3_3
TDR_3
SSR_3
RDR_3
8
H'F600
H'F601
H'F602
H'F603
H'F604
H'F605
SCI3_3
SCI3_3
SCI3_3
SCI3_3
SCI3_3
SCI3_3
SCI3_3
8
8
3
3
8
8
8
3
8
8
3
8
8
3
8
8
3
H'F606,
H'F607
SCI3_3 module control register
SMCR
8
8
H'F608
H'F730
SCI3_3
LVDC*1
8
8
3
2
Low-voltage-detection control
register
LVDCR
Low-voltage-detection status
register
LVDSR
8
H'F731
LVDC*1
8
2
Serial mode register_2
Bit rate register_2
SMR_2
BRR_2
SCR3_2
TDR_2
SSR_2
RDR_2
TMRW
TCRW
8
H'F740
H'F741
H'F742
H'F743
H'F744
H'F745
H'FF80
H'FF81
H'FF82
H'FF83
H'FF84
H'FF85
H'FF86
H'FF88
SCI3_2
SCI3_2
SCI3_2
SCI3_2
SCI3_2
SCI3_2
Timer W
Timer W
Timer W
Timer W
Timer W
Timer W
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
8
Serial control register 3_2
Transmit data register_2
Serial status register_2
Receive data register_2
Timer mode register W
Timer control register W
8
8
8
8
8
8
Timer interrupt enable register W TIERW
8
Timer status register W
Timer I/O control register 0
Timer I/O control register 1
Timer counter
TSRW
TIOR0
TIOR1
TCNT
GRA
8
8
8
16
16
Timer W 16*2
Timer W 16*2
General register A
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 240 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 17 List of Registers
Abbre-
viation
Module Data Bus Access
Register Name
Bit No Address Name
Width
State
General register B
General register C
General register D
GRB
GRC
GRD
16
16
16
8
H'FF8A
H'FF8C
H'FF8E
H'FF90
H'FF91
H'FF93
H'FF9B
H'FFA0
H'FFA1
H'FFA2
H'FFA3
H'FFA4
H'FFA5
H'FFA8
H'FFA9
H'FFAA
H'FFAB
H'FFAC
H'FFAD
H'FFB0
Timer W 16*2
Timer W 16*2
Timer W 16*2
2
2
2
Flash memory control register 1 FLMCR1
Flash memory control register 2 FLMCR2
ROM
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
2
8
ROM
2
Erase block register 1
Flash memory enable register
Timer control register V0
Timer control/status register V
Timer constant register A
Timer constant register B
Timer counter V
EBR1
FENR
TCRV0
TCSRV
TCORA
TCORB
TCNTV
TCRV1
SMR
8
ROM
2
8
ROM
2
8
Timer V
Timer V
Timer V
Timer V
Timer V
Timer V
SCI3
3
8
3
8
3
8
3
8
3
Timer control register V1
Serial mode register
8
3
8
3
Bit rate register
BRR
8
SCI3
3
Serial control register 3
Transmit data register
Serial status register
SCR3
TDR
8
SCI3
3
8
SCI3
3
SSR
8
SCI3
3
Receive data register
A/D data register A
RDR
8
SCI3
3
ADDRA
16
A/D
3
converter
A/D data register B
A/D data register C
A/D data register D
A/D control/status register
A/D control register
ADDRB
ADDRC
ADDRD
ADCSR
ADCR
16
16
16
8
H'FFB2
H'FFB4
H'FFB6
H'FFB8
H'FFB9
A/D
converter
8
8
8
8
8
3
3
3
3
3
A/D
converter
A/D
converter
A/D
converter
8
A/D
converter
Timer control/status register WD TCSRWD
Timer counter WD TCWD
8
8
H'FFC0
H'FFC1
WDT*3
WDT*3
8
8
2
2
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 241 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 17 List of Registers
Abbre-
viation
Module Data Bus Access
Register Name
Bit No Address Name
Width
State
Timer mode register WD
Address break control register
TMWD
8
8
H'FFC2
H'FFC8
WDT*3
8
8
2
2
ABRKCR
Address
break
Address break status register
Break address register H
Break address register L
Break data register H
ABRKSR
BARH
BARL
8
8
8
8
8
H'FFC9
H'FFCA
H'FFCB
Address
break
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
2
Address
break
Address
break
BDRH
BDRL
H'FFCC Address
break
Break data register L
H'FFCD Address
break
Port pull-up control register 1
Port pull-up control register 5
Port data register 1
PUCR1
PUCR5
PDR1
PDR2
PDR5
PDR7
PDR8
PDRB
PMR1
PMR5
PCR1
PCR2
PCR5
PCR7
PCR8
SYSCR1
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
H'FFD0
H'FFD1
H'FFD4
H'FFD5
H'FFD8
H'FFDA
H'FFDB
I/O port
I/O port
I/O port
I/O port
I/O port
I/O port
I/O port
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Port data register 2
Port data register 5
Port data register 7
Port data register 8
Port data register B
H'FFDD I/O port
Port mode register 1
Port mode register 5
Port control register 1
Port control register 2
Port control register 5
Port control register 7
Port control register 8
System control register 1
H'FFE0
H'FFE1
H'FFE4
H'FFE5
H'FFE8
H'FFEA
H'FFEB
H'FFF0
I/O port
I/O port
I/O port
I/O port
I/O port
I/O port
I/O port
Power-
down
System control register 2
SYSCR2
IEGR1
8
8
H'FFF1
H'FFF2
Power-
down
8
2
2
Interrupt edge select register 1
Interrupts 8
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 242 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 17 List of Registers
Abbre-
viation
Module Data Bus Access
Register Name
Bit No Address Name
Width
State
Interrupt edge select register 2
Interrupt enable register 1
Interrupt flag register 1
IEGR2
IENR1
IRR1
8
8
8
8
8
H'FFF3
H'FFF4
H'FFF6
H'FFF8
H'FFF9
Interrupts 8
2
2
2
2
2
Interrupts 8
Interrupts 8
Interrupts 8
Wake-up interrupt flag register
IWPR
Module standby control register 1 MSTCR1
Power-
down
8
Module standby control register 2 MSTCR2
8
H'FFFA
Power-
down
8
2
Notes: 1. LVDC: Low-voltage detection circuits (optional)
2. Only word access can be used.
3. WDT: Watchdog timer
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 243 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 17 List of Registers
17.2
Register Bits
Register bit names of the on-chip peripheral modules are described below.
Each line covers eight bits, and 16-bit registers are shown as 2 lines.
Register
Name
Module
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
PE
Bit 4
PM
Bit 3
STOP
BRR3
MPIE
TDR3
PER
RDR3
−
Bit 2
MP
Bit 1
Bit 0
SMR_3
BRR_3
SCR3_3
TDR_3
SSR_3
RDR_3
SMCR
LVDCR
LVDSR
SMR_2
BRR_2
SCR3_2
TDR_2
SSR_2
RDR_2
TMRW
TCRW
TIERW
TSRW
TIOR0
TIOR1
TCNT
COM
BRR7
TIE
CHR
BRR6
RIE
CKS1
BRR1
CKE1
TDR1
MPBR
RDR1
CKS0
BRR0
CKE0
TDR0
MPBT
RDR0
SCI3_3
BRR5
TE
BRR4
RE
BRR2
TEIE
TDR2
TEND
RDR2
−
TDR7
TDRE
RDR7
−
TDR6
RDRF
RDR6
−
TDR5
OER
RDR5
−
TDR4
FER
RDR4
−
TXD_3 MSTS3_3
LVDE
−
−
−
−
LVDSEL LVDRE LVDDE LVDUE
LVDC
(optional)
−
−
−
−
−
LVDDF LVDUF
COM
BRR7
TIE
CHR
BRR6
RIE
PE
PM
STOP
BRR3
MPIE
TDR3
PER
RDR3
—
MP
CKS1
BRR1
CKE1
TDR1
MPBR
RDR1
CKS0
BRR0
CKE0
TDR0
MPBT
RDR0
SCI3_2
BRR5
TE
BRR4
RE
BRR2
TEIE
TDR2
TEND
RDR2
PWMD
TOC
IMIEC
IMFC
IOA2
IOC2
TDR7
TDRE
RDR7
CTS
CCLR
OVIE
OVF
—
TDR6
RDRF
RDR6
—
TDR5
OER
RDR5
TDR4
FER
RDR4
BUFEB BUFEA
PWMC PWMB
Timer W
CKS2
—
CKS1
—
CKS0
—
TOD
IMIED
IMFD
—
TOB
TOA
IMIEB
IMFB
IOA1
IOC1
IMIEA
IMFA
IOA0
IOC0
—
—
—
IOB2
IOD2
IOB1
IOD1
IOB0
IOD0
—
—
TCNT15 TCNT14 TCNT13 TCNT12 TCNT11 TCNT10 TCNT9 TCNT8
TCNT7 TCNT6 TCNT5 TCNT4 TCNT3 TCNT2 TCNT1 TCNT0
GRA15 GRA14 GRA13 GRA12 GRA11 GRA10 GRA9
GRA7 GRA6 GRA5 GRA4 GRA3 GRA2 GRA1
GRB15 GRB14 GRB13 GRB12 GRB11 GRB10 GRB9
GRB7 GRB6 GRB5 GRB4 GRB3 GRB2 GRB1
GRA
GRB
GRA8
GRA0
GRB8
GRB0
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 244 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 17 List of Registers
Register
Name
Module
Name
Bit 7
GRC15 GRC14 GRC13 GRC12
GRC7 GRC6 GRC5 GRC4
GRD15 GRD14 GRD13 GRD12
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
GRC11 GRC10 GRC9
GRC3 GRC2 GRC1
GRD11 GRD10 GRD9
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
GRC8
GRC0
GRD8
GRD0
P
GRC
Timer W
GRD
GRD7
—
GRD6
SWE
—
GRD5
ESU
—
GRD4
PSU
—
GRD3
EV
GRD2
PV
GRD1
E
FLMCR1
ROM
FLMCR2 FLER
—
—
—
—
EBR1
FENR
TCRV0
TCSRV
TCORA
TCORB
TCNTV
TCRV1
SMR
—
—
—
EB4
—
EB3
—
EB2
—
EB1
—
EB0
—
FLSHE
CMIEB
CMFB
—
—
CMIEA
CMFA
OVIE
OVF
CCLR1
—
CCLR0 CKS2
OS3 OS2
CKS1
OS1
CKS0
OS0
Timer V
TCORA7 TCORA6 TCORA5 TCORA4 TCORA3 TCORA2 TCORA1 TCORA0
TCORB7 TCORB6 TCORB5 TCORB4 TCORB3 TCORB2 TCORB1 TCORB0
TCNTV7 TCNTV6 TCNTV5 TCNTV4 TCNTV3 TCNTV2 TCNTV1 TCNTV0
—
—
—
TVEG1
PM
TVEG0 TRGE
—
ICKS0
CKS0
BRR0
CKE0
TDR0
MPBT
RDR0
AD2
—
COM
BRR7
TIE
CHR
BRR6
RIE
PE
STOP
BRR3
MPIE
TDR3
PER
RDR3
AD5
—
MP
CKS1
BRR1
CKE1
TDR1
MPBR
RDR1
AD3
—
SCI3
BRR
BRR5
TE
BRR4
RE
BRR2
TEIE
TDR2
TEND
RDR2
AD4
—
SCR3
TDR
TDR7
TDRE
RDR7
AD9
AD1
AD9
AD1
AD9
AD1
AD9
AD1
ADF
TRGE
TDR6
RDRF
RDR6
AD8
AD0
AD8
AD0
AD8
AD0
AD8
AD0
ADIE
—
TDR5
OER
RDR5
AD7
—
TDR4
FER
RDR4
AD6
—
SSR
RDR
ADDRA
A/D converter
ADDRB
ADDRC
ADDRD
AD7
—
AD6
—
AD5
—
AD4
—
AD3
—
AD2
—
AD7
—
AD6
—
AD5
—
AD4
—
AD3
—
AD2
—
AD7
—
AD6
—
AD5
—
AD4
—
AD3
—
AD2
—
ADCSR
ADCR
ADST
—
SCAN
—
CKS
—
CH2
—
CH1
—
CH0
—
TCSRWD B6WI
TCWE
B4WI
TCSRWE B2WI
WDON
B0WI
WRST
WDT*
TCWD
TMWD
TCWD7 TCWD6 TCWD5 TCWD4 TCWD3 TCWD2 TCWD1 TCWD0
CKS3 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0
—
—
—
—
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 245 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 17 List of Registers
Register
Module
Name
Name
ABRKCR RTINTE CSEL1 CSEL0
ABRKSR ABIF ABIE
BARH7
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
ACMP2 ACMP1 ACMP0 DCMP1 DCMP0 Address
break
—
—
—
—
—
—
BARH
BARL
BDRH
BDRL
PUCR1
PUCR5
PDR1
PDR2
PDR5
PDR7
PDR8
PDRB
PMR1
PMR5
PCR1
PCR2
PCR5
PCR7
PCR8
BARH6 BARH5 BARH4 BARH3 BARH2 BARH1 BARH0
BARL6 BARL5 BARL4 BARL3 BARL2 BARL1 BARL0
BDRH6 BDRH5 BDRH4 BDRH3 BDRH2 BDRH1 BDRH0
BARL7
BDRH7
BDRL7
BDRL6 BDRL5
BDRL4
BDRL3
—
BDRL2
BDRL1
BDRL0
PUCR17 PUCR16 PUCR15 PUCR14
PUCR12 PUCR11 PUCR10 I/O port
—
—
PUCR55 PUCR54 PUCR53 PUCR52 PUCR51 PUCR50
P17
—
P16
—
P15
—
P14
—
P12
P11
P10
—
—
P22
P21
P20
P57
—
P56
P76
—
P55
P75
—
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
P74
P73
P72
P71
P70
—
P84
P83
P82
P81
P80
—
—
—
—
PB3
TXD2
WKP3
—
PB2
PB1
PB0
IRQ3
POF57
PCR17
—
—
—
IRQ0
WKP4
PCR14
—
—
TXD
WKP1
PCR11
PCR21
PCR51
PCR71
PCR81
—
—
POF56 WKP5
PCR16 PCR15
WKP2
PCR12
PCR22
PCR52
PCR72
PCR82
—
WKP0
PCR10
PCR20
PCR50
PCR70
PCR80
—
—
—
—
PCR57
—
PCR56 PCR55
PCR76 PCR75
PCR54
PCR74
PCR84
STS0
MA2
—
PCR53
PCR73
PCR83
—
—
—
—
SYSCR1 SSBY
SYSCR2 SMSEL
STS2
—
STS1
DTON
—
Power-down
Interrupts
MA1
IEG3
MA0
—
—
—
IEGR1
IEGR2
IENR1
IRR1
—
—
—
IEG0
—
—
WPEG5 WPEG4 WPEG3 WPEG2 WPEG1 WPEG0
IENDT
IRRDT
—
—
IENWP
—
—
IEN3
—
—
IEN0
IRRI0
IWPF0
—
—
—
IRRI3
IWPF3
—
—
IWPR
—
IWPF5
IWPF4
IWPF2
IWPF1
MSTCR1
—
—
MSTS3 MSTAD MSTWD MSTTW MSTTV
Power-down
MSTCR2 MSTS3_2 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
Note:
*
WDT: Watchdog timer
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 246 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 17 List of Registers
17.3
Register States in Each Operating Mode
Register
Name
Reset
Active
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Sleep
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Subsleep Standby
Module
SMR_3
BRR_3
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
—
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
—
SCI3_3
SCR3_3 Initialized
TDR_3
SSR_3
RDR_3
SMCR
LVDCR
LVDSR
SMR_2
BRR_2
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
LVDC (optional)
SCI3_2
—
—
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
—
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
—
SCR3_2 Initialized
TDR_2
SSR_2
RDR_2
TMRW
TCRW
TIERW
TSRW
TIOR0
TIOR1
TCNT
GRA
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Timer W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
GRB
—
—
GRC
—
—
GRD
—
—
FLMCR1 Initialized
FLMCR2 Initialized
Initialized
—
Initialized
—
ROM
EBR1
FENR
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
—
Initialized
—
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 247 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 17 List of Registers
Register
Name
TCRV0
TCSRV
TCORA
TCORB
TCNTV
TCRV1
SMR
Reset
Active
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Sleep
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Subsleep Standby
Module
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
—
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
—
Timer V
SCI3
BRR
SCR3
TDR
SSR
RDR
ADDRA
ADDRB
ADDRC
ADDRD
ADCSR
ADCR
A/D converter
TCSRWD Initialized
WDT*
TCWD
TMWD
Initialized
Initialized
—
—
—
—
ABRKCR Initialized
ABRKSR Initialized
—
—
Address Break
—
—
BARH
BARL
BDRH
BDRL
PUCR1
PUCR5
PDR1
PDR2
PDR5
PDR7
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
I/O port
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 248 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 17 List of Registers
Register
Name
Reset
Active
—
Sleep
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Subsleep Standby
Module
PDR8
PDRB
PMR1
PMR5
PCR1
PCR2
PCR5
PCR7
PCR8
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
I/O port
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SYSCR1 Initialized
SYSCR2 Initialized
—
Power-down
Interrupts
—
IEGR1
IEGR2
IENR1
IRR1
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
—
—
—
—
IWPR
—
MSTCR1 Initialized
MSTCR2 Initialized
—
Power-down
—
Note: is not initialized
WDT: Watchdog timer
*
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 249 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 17 List of Registers
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 250 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
18.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 18.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Item
Symbol
VCC
Value
Unit
V
Note
Power supply voltage
Analog power supply voltage
–0.3 to +7.0
–0.3 to +7.0
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
–0.3 to AVCC +0.3
–20 to +75
*
AVCC
VIN
V
Input voltage
Ports other than Port B
Port B
V
V
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Topr
Tstg
°C
°C
–55 to +125
Note:
*
Permanent damage may result if maximum ratings are exceeded. Normal operation
should be under the conditions specified in Electrical Characteristics. Exceeding these
values can result in incorrect operation and reduced reliability.
18.2
Electrical Characteristics (F-ZTATTM Version)
18.2.1 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Ranges
(1) Power Supply Voltage and Oscillation Frequency Range
øOSC (MHz)
20.0
10.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.5
VCC (V)
• AVCC = 3.3 V to 5.5 V
• Active mode
• Sleep mode
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 251 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
(2) Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range
ø (MHz)
20.0
10.0
1.0
3.0
4.0
5.5
VCC (V)
• AVCC = 3.3 V to 5.5 V
• Active mode
• Sleep mode
(When MA2 = 0 in SYSCR2)
ø (kHz)
3125
1250
78.125
3.0
4.0
5.5
VCC (V)
• AVCC = 3.3 V to 5.5 V
• Active mode
• Sleep mode
(When MA2 = 1 in SYSCR2)
(3) Analog Power Supply Voltage and A/D Converter Accuracy Guarantee Range
ø (MHz)
20.0
10.0
2.0
3.3
4.0
5.5 AVCC (V)
• VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V
• Active mode
• Sleep mode
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 252 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
(4) Range of Power Supply Voltage and Oscillation Frequency when Low-Voltage
Detection Circuit is Used
φosc (MHz)
20.0
16.0
2.0
Vcc(V)
3.0
4.5
5.5
Operation guarantee range
Operation guarantee range except
A/D conversion accuracy
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 253 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
18.2.2 DC Characteristics
Table 18.2 DC Characteristics (1)
V
CC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C unless otherwise indicated.
Values
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition
Min
Typ Max
Unit Notes
Input high VIH
voltage
RES, NMI
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC × 0.8
—
VCC + 0.3
V
WKP0 to WKP5,
IRQ0, IRQ3,
ADTRG,TMRIV,
TMCIV, FTCI,
FTIOA to FTIOD,
SCK3, SCK3_2,
SCK3_3*1, TRGV
VCC × 0.9
—
VCC + 0.3
VCC + 0.3
RXD, RXD_2,
RXD_3*1,
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC × 0.7
—
—
V
P12 to P10,
P17 to P14,
P22 to P20,
P57 to P50,
P76 to P70,
P84 to P80
VCC × 0.8
VCC + 0.3
PB3 to PB0
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC × 0.7
VCC × 0.8
—
—
—
—
—
AVCC + 0.3
AVCC + 0.3
VCC + 0.3
VCC + 0.3
VCC × 0.2
V
V
V
OSC1
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC – 0.5
VCC – 0.3
Input low VIL
voltage
RES, NMI
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V –0.3
WKP0 to WKP5,
IRQ0, IRQ3,
ADTRG,TMRIV,
TMCIV, FTCI,
FTIOA to FTIOD,
SCK3, SCK3_2,
SCK3_3*1, TRGV
–0.3
—
—
VCC × 0.1
VCC × 0.3
RXD, RXD_2,
RXD_3*1,
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V –0.3
V
P12 to P10,
P17 to P14,
P22 to P20,
P57 to P50,
P76 to P70,
P84 to P80
PB3 to PB0
–0.3
—
VCC × 0.2
OSC1
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V –0.3
–0.3
—
—
0.5
0.3
V
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 254 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
Values
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit Notes
Output
high
voltage
VOH
P12 to P10,
P17 to P14,
P22 to P20,
P57 to P50,
P76 to P70,
P84 to P80
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
–IOH = 1.5 mA
V
CC – 1.0 —
—
V
–IOH = 0.1 mA
VCC – 0.5 —
—
Output
low
voltage
VOL
P12 to P10,
P17 to P14,
P22 to P20,
P57 to P50,
P76 to P70
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
IOL = 1.6 mA
—
—
0.6
V
V
I
OL = 0.4 mA
—
—
—
—
0.4
1.5
P84 to P80
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
IOL = 20.0 mA
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
IOL = 10.0 mA
—
—
—
—
1.0
0.4
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
IOL = 1.6 mA
IOL = 0.4 mA
—
—
—
—
0.4
1.0
Input/
| IIL
|
OSC1, RES, NMI
WKP0, WKP5,
IRQ0, IRQ3,
V
IN = 0.5 V to
µA
output
leakage
current
(VCC – 0.5 V)
ADTRG, TRGV,
TMRIV, TMCIV,
FTCI, FTIOA to
FTIOD, RXD,
RXD_2, RXD_3*1,
SCK3, SCK3_2,
SCK3_3*1
P12 to P10,
P17 to P14,
P22 to P20,
P57 to P50,
P76 to P70,
P84 to P80
V
IN = 0.5 V to
—
—
1.0
µA
(VCC – 0.5 V)
PB3 to PB0
VIN = 0.5 V to
(AVCC – 0.5 V)
—
—
1.0
µA
µA
Pull-up
MOS
–Ip
P12 to P10,
P17 to P14,
P55 to P50
VCC = 5.0 V,
50.0
—
—
300.0
—
V
IN = 0.0 V
VCC = 3.0 V,
IN = 0.0 V
current
60.0
Reference
value
V
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 255 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
Values
Typ
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition
Min
Max
Unit Notes
Input
capaci-
tance
Cin
All input pins
except power
supply pins
f = 1 MHz,
VIN = 0.0 V,
Ta = 25°C
—
—
15.0
pF
2
Active
mode
current
consump-
tion
IOPE1
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
Active mode 1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
15.0
8.0
1.8
1.2
11.5
6.5
1.7
1.1
—
30.0
—
mA
mA
mA
mA
µA
*
V
CC = 5.0 V,
fOSC = 20 MHz
2
*
Active mode 1
CC = 3.0 V,
OSC = 10 MHz
V
Reference
value
f
2
*
IOPE2
Active mode 2
CC = 5.0 V,
OSC = 20 MHz
3.0
—
V
f
2
*
Active mode 2
CC = 3.0 V,
OSC = 10 MHz
V
Reference
value
f
2
*
Sleep
mode
current
consump-
tion
ISLEEP1
ISLEEP2
ISTBY
Sleep mode 1
CC = 5.0 V,
OSC = 20 MHz
22.5
—
V
f
2
*
Sleep mode 1
CC = 3.0 V,
OSC = 10 MHz
V
Reference
value
f
2
*
Sleep mode 2
CC = 5.0 V,
OSC = 20 MHz
2.7
—
V
f
2
*
Sleep mode 2
CC = 3.0 V,
OSC = 10 MHz
V
Reference
value
f
2
*
Standby
mode
5.0
current
consump-
tion
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 256 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
Values
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit Notes
RAM data VRAM
retaining
VCC
2.0
—
—
V
voltage
Notes: 1. The SCK3_3 and RXD_3 pins are not available in the H8/36014.
2. Pin states during current consumption measurement are given below (excluding current
in the pull-up MOS transistors and output buffers).
Mode
RES Pin
Internal State
Other Pins
Oscillator Pins
Active mode 1
Active mode 2
VCC
Operates
VCC
Main clock:
ceramic or crystal
resonator
Operates
(φOSC/64)
Sleep mode 1
Sleep mode 2
VCC
Only timers operate
VCC
Only timers operate
(φOSC/64)
Standby mode
VCC
CPU and timers
both stop
VCC
Main clock:
ceramic or crystal
resonator
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 257 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
Table 18.2 DC Characteristics (2)
V
CC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise indicated.
Values
Applicable
Item
Symbol
Pins
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Condition
Allowable output low IOL
current (per pin)
Output pins
except port 8
VCC = 4.0 V to
5.5 V
—
—
2.0
mA
Port 8
Port 8
—
—
—
—
—
—
20.0
10.0
0.5
mA
mA
mA
Output pins
except port 8
Allowable output low ∑IOL
current (total)
Output pins
except port 8
VCC = 4.0 V to
5.5 V
—
—
40.0
mA
Port 8
—
—
—
—
80.0
20.0
mA
mA
Output pins
except port 8
Port 8
—
—
—
—
40.0
2.0
mA
mA
Allowable output high I –IOH
current (per pin)
I
All output pins
VCC = 4.0 V to
5.5 V
—
—
—
—
0.2
mA
mA
Allowable output high I –∑IOH
current (total)
I
All output pins
VCC = 4.0 V to
5.5 V
30.0
—
—
8.0
mA
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 258 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
18.2.3 AC Characteristics
Table 18.3 AC Characteristics
V
CC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Typ
Applicable
Symbol Pins
Reference
Unit Figure
Item
Test Condition
Min
Max
1
*
System clock
oscillation
fOSC
OSC1,
OSC2
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 2.0
—
20.0
MHz
frequency
2.0
1
—
—
—
—
10.0
64
MHz
tOSC
µs
2
*
System clock (φ)
cycle time
tcyc
—
2
12.8
—
Instruction cycle
time
tcyc
Oscillation
stabilization time
(crystal resonator)
trc
OSC1,
OSC2
—
—
—
—
10.0
5.0
ms
ms
Oscillation
stabilization time
(ceramic resonator)
trc
OSC1,
OSC2
External clock
high width
tCPH
tCPL
tCPr
tCPf
OSC1
OSC1
OSC1
OSC1
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 20.0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Figure 18.1
40.0
—
External clock
low width
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 20.0
—
40.0
—
External clock
rise time
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V —
10.0
15.0
10.0
15.0
—
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V —
—
External clock
fall time
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 259 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
Values
Typ
Applicable
Symbol Pins
Reference
Unit Figure
Item
Test Condition
Min
Max
RES pin low
tREL
RES
At power-on and in trc
modes other than
those below
—
—
ms
ns
tcyc
Figure 18.2
width
In active mode and 200
sleep mode
operation
—
—
—
—
Input pin high
width
tIH
NMI,
2
Figure 18.3
IRQ0, IRQ3,
WKP0 to
WKP5,
TMCIV,
TMRIV,
TRGV,
ADTRG,
FTCI,
FTIOA to
FTIOD
Input pin low
width
tIL
NMI,
2
—
—
tcyc
IRQ0, IRQ3,
WKP0 to
WKP5,
TMCIV,
TMRIV,
TRGV,
ADTRG,
FTCI,
FTIOA to
FTIOD
Notes: 1. When an external clock is input, the minimum system clock oscillator frequency is
1.0 MHz.
2. Determined by MA2 to MA0 in system control register 2 (SYSCR2).
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 260 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
Table 18.4 Serial Interface (SCI3) Timing
V
CC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Typ Max Unit
Applicable
Symbol Pins
Reference
Figure
Item
Test Condition
Min
Input
clock
cycle
Asynchro-
nous
tScyc
SCK3,
SCK3_2,
4
—
—
tcyc
Figure 18.4
Clocked
synchro-
nous
SCK3_3*
6
—
—
tcyc
Input clock pulse
width
tSCKW
SCK3,
SCK3_2,
SCK3_3*
0.4
—
0.6 tScyc
Transmit data delay
time (clocked
synchronous)
tTXD
TXD,
TXD_2,
TXD_3*
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
—
—
—
—
1
1
tcyc
tcyc
Figure 18.5
Receive data setup
time (clocked
synchronous)
tRXS
RXD,
RXD_2,
RXD_3*
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 50.0
100.0
—
—
—
—
ns
ns
Receive data hold
time (clocked
synchronous)
tRXH
RXD,
RXD_2,
RXD_3*
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 50.0
100.0
—
—
—
—
ns
ns
Note:
*
The SCK3_3, RXD_3, and TXD_3 pins are not available in the H8/36014.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 261 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
18.2.4 A/D Converter Characteristics
Table 18.5 A/D Converter Characteristics
V
CC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Applicable Test
Item
Symbol Pins
Condition
Min
Typ Max
Unit Notes
1
*
Analog power supply AVCC
voltage
AVCC
3.3
VCC 5.5
V
Analog input voltage AVIN
AN3 to
AN0
VSS – 0.3
—
—
AVCC + 0.3 V
Analog power supply AIOPE
current
AVCC
AVCC = 5.0 V —
fOSC
20 MHz
2.0
—
mA
=
2
*
AISTOP1
AVCC
AVCC
—
50
µA
Reference
value
3
*
AISTOP2
—
—
—
—
5.0
µA
pF
Analog input
capacitance
CAIN
AN3 to
AN0
30.0
Allowable signal
source impedance
RAIN
AN3 to
AN0
—
—
10
—
5.0
10
—
kΩ
bit
tcyc
Resolution (data
length)
10
Conversion time
(single mode)
AVCC = 3.3 V 134
to 5.5 V
Nonlinearity error
Offset error
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
7.5
7.5
7.5
0.5
8.0
—
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
tcyc
Full-scale error
Quantization error
Absolute accuracy
Conversion time
(single mode)
AVCC = 4.0 V 70
to 5.5 V
Nonlinearity error
Offset error
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
7.5
7.5
7.5
0.5
8.0
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
Full-scale error
Quantization error
Absolute accuracy
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 262 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
Values
Applicable Test
Symbol Pins Condition
Item
Min
Typ Max
Unit Notes
Conversion time
(single mode)
AVCC = 4.0 V 134
to 5.5 V
—
—
tcyc
Nonlinearity error
Offset error
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
3.5
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
3.5
3.5
0.5
4.0
Full-scale error
Quantization error
Absolute accuracy
Notes: 1. Set AVCC = VCC when the A/D converter is not used.
2. AISTOP1 is the current in active and sleep modes while the A/D converter is idle.
3. AISTOP2 is the current at reset and in standby and subsleep modes while the A/D
converter is idle.
18.2.5 Watchdog Timer Characteristics
Table 18.6 Watchdog Timer Characteristics
V
CC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Applicable Test
Item
Symbol
Pins
Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit Notes
On-chip
oscillator
overflow
time
tOVF
0.2
0.4
—
s
*
Note:
*
Shows the time to count from 0 to 255, at which point an internal reset is generated,
when the internal oscillator is selected.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 263 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
18.2.6 Flash Memory Characteristics
Table 18.7 Flash Memory Characteristics
VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Test
Item
Symbol Condition
Min
Typ
Max
200
1200
—
Unit
ms
Programming time (per 128 bytes)*1*2*4
Erase time (per block) *1*3*6
Reprogramming count
tP
—
7
tE
—
100
10000
—
ms
NWEC
x
1000
1
Times
µs
Programming Wait time after SWE
—
bit setting*1
Wait time after PSU
y
50
—
—
µs
bit setting*1
Wait time after P bit setting
*1*4
z1
z2
z3
1 ≤ n ≤ 6
28
198
8
30
32
µs
µs
µs
7 ≤ n ≤ 1000
200
10
202
12
Additional-
programming
Wait time after P bit clear*1
α
β
5
5
—
—
—
—
µs
µs
Wait time after PSU
bit clear*1
Wait time after PV
γ
ε
4
2
—
—
—
—
µs
µs
bit setting*1
Wait time after
dummy write*1
Wait time after PV bit clear*1
η
θ
2
—
—
—
—
µs
µs
Wait time after SWE
100
bit clear*1
Maximum
N
—
—
1000
Times
programming count*1*4*5
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 264 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
Values
Test
Item
Symbol Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Erase
Wait time after SWE
x
y
z
1
—
—
µs
bit setting*1
Wait time after ESU
100
10
—
—
—
µs
bit setting*1
Wait time after E bit
100
ms
setting*1*6
Wait time after E bit clear*1
α
β
10
10
—
—
—
—
µs
µs
Wait time after ESU
bit clear*1
Wait time after EV
γ
ε
20
2
—
—
—
—
µs
µs
bit setting*1
Wait time after
dummy write*1
Wait time after EV bit clear*1
η
θ
4
—
—
—
—
µs
µs
Wait time after SWE
100
bit clear*1
Maximum erase count*1*6*7
N
—
—
120
Times
Notes: 1. Make the time settings in accordance with the program/erase algorithms.
2. The programming time for 128 bytes. (Indicates the total time for which the P bit in flash
memory control register 1 (FLMCR1) is set. The program-verify time is not included.)
3. The time required to erase one block. (Indicates the time for which the E bit in flash
memory control register 1 (FLMCR1) is set. The erase-verify time is not included.)
4. Programming time maximum value (tP (max.)) = wait time after P bit setting (z) ×
maximum programming count (N)
5. Set the maximum programming count (N) according to the actual set values of z1, z2,
and z3, so that it does not exceed the programming time maximum value (tP (max.)).
The wait time after P bit setting (z1, z2) should be changed as follows according to the
value of the programming count (n).
Programming count (n)
1 ≤ n ≤ 6
z1 = 30 µs
7 ≤ n ≤ 1000 z2 = 200 µs
6. Erase time maximum value (tE (max.)) = wait time after E bit setting (z) × maximum
erase count (N)
7. Set the maximum erase count (N) according to the actual set value of (z), so that it
does not exceed the erase time maximum value (tE (max.)).
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 265 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
18.2.7 Power-Supply-Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics (Optional)
Table 18.8 Power-Supply-Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics
VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C, unless otherwise indicated.
Values
Test
Item
Symbol
Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Power-supply falling detection
voltage
Vint (D)
LVDSEL = 0
3.3
3.7
—
V
Power-supply rising detection
voltage
Vint (U)
LVDSEL = 0
—
4.0
4.5
V
Reset detection voltage 1*1
Reset detection voltage 2*2
Vreset1
Vreset2
VLVDRmin
LVDSEL = 0
LVDSEL = 1
—
2.3
3.6
—
2.7
4.2
—
V
V
V
3.0
1.0
Lower-limit voltage of LVDR
operation*3
LVD stabilization time
tLVDON
ISTBY
50
—
—
—
µs
Current consumption in standby
mode
LVDE = 1,
Vcc = 5.0 V,
When a 32-
kHz crystal
resonator is
not used
350
µA
Notes: 1. This voltage should be used when the falling and rising voltage detection function is
used.
2. Select the low-voltage reset 2 when only the low-voltage detection reset is used.
3. When the power-supply voltage (Vcc) falls below VLVDRmin = 1.0 V and then rises, a reset
may not occur. Therefore sufficient evaluation is required.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 266 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
18.2.8 Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics (Optional)
Table 18.9 Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics
VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C, unless otherwise indicated.
Values
Test
Item
Symbol
RRES
Condition
Min
100
—
Typ
150
—
Max
—
Unit
kΩ
Pull-up resistance of RES pin
Power-on reset start voltage*
Vpor
100
mV
Note:
*
The power-supply voltage (Vcc) must fall below Vpor = 100 mV and then rise after
charge of the RES pin is removed completely. In order to remove charge of the RES
pin, it is recommended that the diode be placed in the Vcc side. If the power-supply
voltage (Vcc) rises from the point over 100 mV, a power-on reset may not occur.
18.3
Electrical Characteristics (Masked ROM Version)
18.3.1 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Ranges
(1) Power Supply Voltage and Oscillation Frequency Range
øOSC (MHz)
20.0
10.0
2.0
2.7
4.0
5.5
VCC (V)
• AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V
• Active mode
• Sleep mode
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 267 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
(2) Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range
ø (MHz)
20.0
10.0
1.0
2.7
4.0
5.5
VCC (V)
• AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V
• Active mode
• Sleep mode
(When MA2 = 0 in SYSCR2)
ø (kHz)
3125
1250
78.125
2.7
4.0
5.5
VCC (V)
• AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V
• Active mode
• Sleep mode
(When MA2 = 1 in SYSCR2)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 268 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
(3) Analog Power Supply Voltage and A/D Converter Accuracy Guarantee Range
ø (MHz)
20.0
10.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.5 AVCC (V)
• VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V
• Active mode
• Sleep mode
(4) Range of Power Supply Voltage and Oscillation Frequency when Low-Voltage
Detection Circuit is Used
φosc (MHz)
20.0
16.0
2.0
Vcc(V)
3.0
4.5
5.5
Operation guarantee range
Operation guarantee range except
A/D conversion accuracy
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 269 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
18.3.2 DC Characteristics
Table 18.10 DC Characteristics (1)
V
CC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition
Min
Typ Max
Unit Notes
Input high VIH
voltage
RES, NMI
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC × 0.8
—
VCC + 0.3
V
WKP0 to WKP5,
IRQ0, IRQ3,
ADTRG,TMRIV,
TMCIV, FTCI,
FTIOA to FTIOD,
SCK3, SCK3_2,
SCK3_3*1, TRGV
VCC × 0.9
—
VCC + 0.3
VCC + 0.3
RXD, RXD_2,
RXD_3*1,
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC × 0.7
—
—
V
P12 to P10,
P17 to P14,
P22 to P20,
P57 to P50,
P76 to P70,
P84 to P80
VCC × 0.8
VCC + 0.3
PB3 to PB0
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC × 0.7
VCC × 0.8
—
—
—
—
—
AVCC + 0.3
AVCC + 0.3
VCC + 0.3
VCC + 0.3
VCC × 0.2
V
V
V
OSC1
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC – 0.5
VCC – 0.3
Input low VIL
voltage
RES, NMI
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V –0.3
WKP0 to WKP5,
IRQ0, IRQ3,
ADTRG,TMRIV,
TMCIV, FTCI,
FTIOA to FTIOD,
SCK3, SCK3_2,
SCK3_3*1, TRGV
–0.3
—
—
VCC × 0.1
VCC × 0.3
RXD, RXD_2,
RXD_3*1,
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V –0.3
V
P12 to P10,
P17 to P14,
P22 to P20,
P57 to P50,
P76 to P70,
P84 to P80
PB3 to PB0
–0.3
—
VCC × 0.2
OSC1
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V –0.3
–0.3
—
—
0.5
0.3
V
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 270 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
Values
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit Notes
Output
high
voltage
VOH
P12 to P10,
P17 to P14,
P22 to P20,
P57 to P50,
P76 to P70,
P84 to P80
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
–IOH = 1.5 mA
V
CC – 1.0 —
—
V
–IOH = 0.1 mA
VCC – 0.5 —
—
Output
low
voltage
VOL
P12 to P10,
P17 to P14,
P22 to P20,
P57 to P50,
P76 to P70
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
IOL = 1.6 mA
—
—
0.6
V
V
I
OL = 0.4 mA
—
—
—
—
0.4
1.5
P84 to P80
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
IOL = 20.0 mA
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
IOL = 10.0 mA
—
—
—
—
1.0
0.4
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
IOL = 1.6 mA
IOL = 0.4 mA
—
—
—
—
0.4
1.0
Input/
| IIL
|
OSC1, RES,
NMI, WKP0 to
WKP5,
VIN = 0.5 V to
(VCC – 0.5 V)
µA
output
leakage
current
IRQ0, IRQ3,
ADTRG, TRGV,
TMRIV, TMCIV,
FTCI, FTIOA to
FTIOD, RXD,
RXD_2, RXD_3*1,
SCK3, SCK3_2,
SCK3_3*1
P12 to P10,
P17 to P14,
P22 to P20,
P57 to P50,
P76 to P70,
P84 to P80
V
IN = 0.5 V to
—
—
—
—
1.0
1.0
µA
µA
(VCC – 0.5 V)
PB3 to PB0
VIN = 0.5 V to
(AVCC – 0.5 V)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 271 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
Values
Typ
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition
Min
Max
Unit Notes
Pull-up
MOS
current
–Ip
P12 to P10,
P17 to P14,
P55 to P50
VCC = 5.0 V,
IN = 0.0 V
50.0
—
300.0
µA
V
VCC = 3.0 V,
IN = 0.0 V
—
—
60.0
—
—
Reference
value
V
Input
capaci-
tance
Cin
All input pins
except power
supply pins
f = 1 MHz,
VIN = 0.0 V,
Ta = 25°C
15.0
pF
2
Active
mode
current
consump-
tion
IOPE1
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
Active mode 1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
15.0
8.0
1.8
1.2
11.5
6.5
1.7
1.1
—
30.0
—
mA
*
V
CC = 5.0 V,
fOSC = 20 MHz
2
*
Active mode 1
CC = 3.0 V,
OSC = 10 MHz
V
Reference
value
f
2
*
IOPE2
Active mode 2
CC = 5.0 V,
OSC = 20 MHz
3.0
—
mA
mA
mA
µA
V
f
2
*
Active mode 2
CC = 3.0 V,
OSC = 10 MHz
V
Reference
value
f
2
*
Sleep
mode
current
consump-
tion
ISLEEP1
ISLEEP2
ISTBY
Sleep mode 1
CC = 5.0 V,
OSC = 20 MHz
22.5
—
V
f
2
*
Sleep mode 1
CC = 3.0 V,
OSC = 10 MHz
V
Reference
value
f
2
*
Sleep mode 2
CC = 5.0 V,
OSC = 20 MHz
2.7
—
V
f
2
*
Sleep mode 2
CC = 3.0 V,
OSC = 10 MHz
V
Reference
value
f
2
*
Standby
mode
5.0
current
consump-
tion
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 272 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
Values
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit Notes
RAM data VRAM
retaining
VCC
2.0
—
—
V
voltage
Notes: 1. The SCK3_3 and RXD_3 pins are not available in the H8/36014.
2. Pin states during current consumption measurement are given below (excluding current
in the pull-up MOS transistors and output buffers).
Mode
RES Pin
Internal State
Other Pins
Oscillator Pins
Active mode 1
Active mode 2
VCC
Operates
VCC
Main clock:
ceramic or crystal
resonator
Operates
(φOSC/64)
Sleep mode 1
Sleep mode 2
VCC
Only timers operate
VCC
Only timers operate
(φOSC/64)
Standby mode
VCC
CPU and timers
both stop
VCC
Main clock:
ceramic or crystal
resonator
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 273 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
Table 18.10 DC Characteristics (2)
V
CC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Applicable
Item
Symbol
Pins
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Condition
Allowable output low IOL
current (per pin)
Output pins
except port 8
VCC = 4.0 V to
5.5 V
—
—
2.0
mA
Port 8
—
—
—
—
20.0
0.5
mA
mA
Output pins
except port 8
Port 8
—
—
—
—
10.0
40.0
mA
mA
Allowable output low ∑IOL
current (total)
Output pins
except port 8
VCC = 4.0 V to
5.5 V
Port 8
—
—
—
—
80.0
20.0
mA
mA
Output pins
except port 8
Port 8
—
—
—
—
40.0
2.0
mA
mA
Allowable output high I –IOH
current (per pin)
I
All output pins
VCC = 4.0 V to
5.5 V
—
—
—
—
0.2
mA
mA
Allowable output high I –∑IOH
current (total)
I
All output pins
VCC = 4.0 V to
5.5 V
30.0
—
—
8.0
mA
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 274 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
18.3.3 AC Characteristics
Table 18.11 AC Characteristics
V
CC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Typ
Applicable
Symbol Pins
Reference
Unit Figure
Item
Test Condition
Min
Max
1
*
System clock
oscillation
fOSC
OSC1,
OSC2
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 2.0
—
20.0
MHz
frequency
2.0
1
—
—
—
—
10.0
64
MHz
tOSC
µs
2
*
System clock (φ)
cycle time
tcyc
—
2
12.8
—
Instruction cycle
time
tcyc
Oscillation
stabilization time
(crystal resonator)
trc
OSC1,
OSC2
—
—
—
—
10.0
5.0
ms
ms
Oscillation
stabilization time
(ceramic resonator)
trc
OSC1,
OSC2
External clock
high width
tCPH
tCPL
tCPr
tCPf
tREL
OSC1
OSC1
OSC1
OSC1
RES
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 20.0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ms
Figure 18.1
40.0
—
External clock
low width
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 20.0
—
40.0
—
External clock
rise time
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V —
10.0
15.0
10.0
15.0
—
—
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V —
—
External clock
fall time
RES pin low
At power-on and in trc
modes other than
those below
Figure 18.2
width
In active mode and 200
sleep mode
—
—
ns
operation
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 275 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
Values
Typ
Applicable
Symbol Pins
Reference
Unit Figure
Item
Test Condition
Min
Max
Input pin high
width
tIH
NMI,
2
—
—
tcyc Figure 18.3
IRQ0, IRQ3,
WKP0 to
WKP5,
TMCIV,
TMRIV,
TRGV,
ADTRG,
FTCI,
FTIOA to
FTIOD
Input pin low
width
tIL
NMI,
2
—
—
tcyc
IRQ0, IRQ3,
WKP0 to
WKP5,
TMCIV,
TMRIV,
TRGV,
ADTRG,
FTCI,
FTIOA to
FTIOD
Notes: 1. When an external clock is input, the minimum system clock oscillator frequency is
1.0 MHz.
2. Determined by the MA2 to MA0 bits in the system control register 2 (SYSCR2).
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 276 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
Table 18.12 Serial Interface (SCI3) Timing
V
CC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Typ Max Unit
Applicable
Symbol Pins
Reference
Figure
Item
Test Condition
Min
Input
clock
cycle
Asynchro-
nous
tScyc
SCK3,
SCK3_2,
4
—
—
tcyc
Figure 18.4
Clocked
synchro-
nous
SCK3_3*
6
—
—
tcyc
Input clock pulse
width
tSCKW
SCK3,
SCK3_2,
SCK3_3*
0.4
—
0.6 tScyc
Transmit data delay
time (clocked
synchronous)
tTXD
TXD,
TXD_2,
TXD_3*
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
—
—
—
—
1
1
tcyc
tcyc
Figure 18.5
Receive data setup
time (clocked
synchronous)
tRXS
RXD,
RXD_2,
RXD_3*
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 50.0
100.0
—
—
—
—
ns
ns
Receive data hold
time (clocked
synchronous)
tRXH
RXD,
RXD_2,
RXD_3*
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 50.0
100.0
—
—
—
—
ns
ns
Note:
*
The SCK3_3, RXD_3, and TXD_3 pins are not available in the H8/36014.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 277 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
18.3.4 A/D Converter Characteristics
Table 18.13 A/D Converter Characteristics
V
CC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Applicable Test
Item
Symbol Pins
Condition
Min
Typ Max
Unit Notes
1
*
Analog power supply AVCC
voltage
AVCC
3.0
VCC 5.5
V
Analog input voltage AVIN
AN3 to
AN0
VSS – 0.3
—
—
AVCC + 0.3 V
Analog power supply AIOPE
current
AVCC
AVCC = 5.0 V —
fOSC
20 MHz
2.0
—
mA
=
2
*
AISTOP1
AVCC
AVCC
—
50
µA
Reference
value
3
*
AISTOP2
—
—
—
—
5.0
µA
pF
Analog input
capacitance
CAIN
AN3 to
AN0
30.0
Allowable signal
source impedance
RAIN
AN3 to
AN0
—
—
10
—
5.0
10
—
kΩ
bit
tcyc
Resolution (data
length)
10
Conversion time
(single mode)
AVCC = 3.0 V 134
to 5.5 V
Nonlinearity error
Offset error
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
7.5
7.5
7.5
0.5
8.0
—
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
tcyc
Full-scale error
Quantization error
Absolute accuracy
Conversion time
(single mode)
AVCC = 4.0 V 70
to 5.5 V
Nonlinearity error
Offset error
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
7.5
7.5
7.5
0.5
8.0
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
Full-scale error
Quantization error
Absolute accuracy
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 278 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
Values
Applicable Test
Symbol Pins Condition
Reference
Item
Min
Typ Max
Unit Figure
Conversion time
(single mode)
AVCC = 4.0 V 134
to 5.5 V
—
—
tcyc
Nonlinearity error
Offset error
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
3.5
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
3.5
3.5
0.5
4.0
Full-scale error
Quantization error
Absolute accuracy
Notes: 1. Set AVCC = VCC when the A/D converter is not used.
2. AISTOP1 is the current in active and sleep modes while the A/D converter is idle.
3. AISTOP2 is the current at reset and in standby and subsleep modes while the A/D
converter is idle.
18.3.5 Watchdog Timer Characteristics
Table 18.14 Watchdog Timer Characteristics
V
CC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Applicable Test
Item
Symbol
Pins
Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit Notes
On-chip
oscillator
overflow
time
tOVF
0.2
0.4
—
s
*
Note: * Shows the time to count from 0 to 255, at which point an internal reset is generated, when
the internal oscillator is selected.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 279 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
18.3.6 Power-Supply-Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics (Optional)
Table 18.15 Power-Supply-Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics
VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C, unless otherwise indicated.
Values
Test
Item
Symbol
Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Power-supply falling detection
voltage
Vint (D)
LVDSEL = 0 3.3
3.7
—
V
Power-supply rising detection
voltage
Reset detection voltage 1*1
Reset detection voltage 2*2
Vint (U)
LVDSEL = 0
LVDSEL = 0
—
—
4.0
4.5
V
Vreset1
Vreset2
VLVDRmin
2.3
3.6
—
2.7
4.2
—
V
V
V
LVDSEL = 1 3.0
1.0
Lower-limit voltage of LVDR
operation*3
LVD stabilization time
tLVDON
ISTBY
50
—
—
—
µs
Current consumption in standby
mode
LVDE = 1,
Vcc = 5.0 V,
When a 32-
kHz crystal
resonator is
not used
350
µA
Notes: 1. This voltage should be used when the falling and rising voltage detection function is
used.
2. Select the low-voltage reset 2 when only the low-voltage detection reset is used.
3. When the power-supply voltage (Vcc) falls below VLVDRmin = 1.0 V and then rises, a reset
may not occur. Therefore sufficient evaluation is required.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 280 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
18.3.7 Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics (Optional)
Table 18.16 Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics
VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C, unless otherwise indicated.
Values
Test
Item
Symbol
RRES
Condition
Min
100
—
Typ
150
—
Max
—
Unit
kΩ
Pull-up resistance of RES pin
Power-on reset start voltage*
Vpor
100
mV
Note:
*
The power-supply voltage (Vcc) must fall below Vpor = 100 mV and then rise after
charge of the RES pin is removed completely. In order to remove charge of the RES
pin, it is recommended that the diode be placed in the Vcc side. If the power-supply
voltage (Vcc) rises from the point over 100 mV, a power-on reset may not occur.
18.4
Operation Timing
tOSC
V
IH
OSC1
V
IL
tCPH
tCPL
tCPf
tCPr
Figure 18.1 System Clock Input Timing
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 281 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
VCC × 0.7
VCC
OSC1
tREL
RES
VIL
VIL
tREL
Figure 18.2 RES Low Width Timing
NMI,
V
IRQ0, IRQ3
WKP0 to WKP5
ADTRG
IH
V
IL
FTCI
FTIOA to FTIOD
TMCIV, TMRIV
TRGV
tIL
tIH
Figure 18.3 Input Timing
tSCKW
SCK3, SCK_2
tScyc
Figure 18.4 SCK3 Input Clock Timing
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 282 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
tScyc
2
2
*
*
VIH or VOH
VIL or VOL
SCK3, SCK3_2,
SCK3_3*1
tTXD
2
*
VOH
TXD, TXD_2,
TXD_3*1
(transmit data)
2
*
VOL
tRXS
tRXH
RXD, RXD_2,
RXD_3*1
(receive data)
Notes: 1. The SCK3_3, RXD_3, and TXD_3 pins are not available in the H8/36014.
2. Output timing reference levels
V
V
= 2.0 V
OH
= 0.8 V
OL
Output high:
Output low:
Load conditions are shown in figure 18.6.
Figure 18.5 SCI3 Input/Output Timing in Clocked Synchronous Mode
18.5
Output Load Condition
VCC
2.4 kΩ
LSI output pin
30 pF
12 kΩ
Figure 18.6 Output Load Circuit
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 283 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Section 18 Electrical Characteristics
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 284 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Appendix A Instruction Set
A.1
Instruction List
Operand Notation
Symbol
Rd
Description
General (destination*) register
Rs
General (source*) register
General register*
Rn
ERd
ERs
ERn
(EAd)
(EAs)
PC
General destination register (address register or 32-bit register)
General source register (address register or 32-bit register)
General register (32-bit register)
Destination operand
Source operand
Program counter
SP
Stack pointer
CCR
N
Condition-code register
N (negative) flag in CCR
Z (zero) flag in CCR
Z
V
V (overflow) flag in CCR
C (carry) flag in CCR
C
disp
→
Displacement
Transfer from the operand on the left to the operand on the right, or transition from
the state on the left to the state on the right
+
–
×
÷
∧
∨
⊕
¬
Addition of the operands on both sides
Subtraction of the operand on the right from the operand on the left
Multiplication of the operands on both sides
Division of the operand on the left by the operand on the right
Logical AND of the operands on both sides
Logical OR of the operands on both sides
Logical exclusive OR of the operands on both sides
NOT (logical complement)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 285 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Symbol
Description
( ), < >
Contents of operand
Note: General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L) and 16-bit registers
(R0 to R7 and E0 to E7).
Condition Code Notation
Symbol
Description
Changed according to execution result
Undetermined (no guaranteed value)
Cleared to 0
*
0
1
Set to 1
—
∆
Not affected by execution of the instruction
Varies depending on conditions, described in notes
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 286 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Table A.1 Instruction Set
1. Data transfer instructions
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
MOV.B #xx:8, Rd
B
B
B
B
B
B
2
#xx:8 → Rd8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
2
MOV
MOV.B Rs, Rd
2
2
4
8
2
Rs8 → Rd8
MOV.B @ERs, Rd
MOV.B @(d:16, ERs), Rd
MOV.B @(d:24, ERs), Rd
MOV.B @ERs+, Rd
@ERs → Rd8
4
@(d:16, ERs) → Rd8
@(d:24, ERs) → Rd8
6
10
6
@ERs → Rd8
ERs32+1 → ERs32
MOV.B @aa:8, Rd
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
2
@aa:8 → Rd8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
4
6
MOV.B @aa:16, Rd
MOV.B @aa:24, Rd
MOV.B Rs, @ERd
4
@aa:16 → Rd8
@aa:24 → Rd8
Rs8 → @ERd
6
8
2
4
8
2
4
MOV.B Rs, @(d:16, ERd)
MOV.B Rs, @(d:24, ERd)
MOV.B Rs, @–ERd
Rs8 → @(d:16, ERd)
Rs8 → @(d:24, ERd)
6
10
6
ERd32–1 → ERd32
Rs8 → @ERd
MOV.B Rs, @aa:8
B
B
2
4
6
Rs8 → @aa:8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
4
6
MOV.B Rs, @aa:16
MOV.B Rs, @aa:24
MOV.W #xx:16, Rd
MOV.W Rs, Rd
Rs8 → @aa:16
Rs8 → @aa:24
#xx:16 → Rd16
Rs16 → Rd16
B
8
W
W
W
W
W
W
4
4
2
2
4
8
2
2
MOV.W @ERs, Rd
MOV.W @(d:16, ERs), Rd
MOV.W @(d:24, ERs), Rd
MOV.W @ERs+, Rd
@ERs → Rd16
@(d:16, ERs) → Rd16
@(d:24, ERs) → Rd16
4
6
10
6
@ERs → Rd16
ERs32+2 → @ERd32
MOV.W @aa:16, Rd
MOV.W @aa:24, Rd
MOV.W Rs, @ERd
W
W
W
W
W
4
@aa:16 → Rd16
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
6
8
6
@aa:24 → Rd16
2
4
8
Rs16 → @ERd
4
MOV.W Rs, @(d:16, ERd)
MOV.W Rs, @(d:24, ERd)
Rs16 → @(d:16, ERd)
Rs16 → @(d:24, ERd)
6
10
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 287 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
MOV.W Rs, @–ERd
W
2
ERd32–2 → ERd32
Rs16 → @ERd
—
—
0
—
6
MOV
MOV.W Rs, @aa:16
MOV.W Rs, @aa:24
MOV.L #xx:32, Rd
W
W
L
4
6
Rs16 → @aa:16
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
6
8
Rs16 → @aa:24
6
#xx:32 → Rd32
6
MOV.L ERs, ERd
L
2
ERs32 → ERd32
@ERs → ERd32
2
MOV.L @ERs, ERd
MOV.L @(d:16, ERs), ERd
MOV.L @(d:24, ERs), ERd
MOV.L @ERs+, ERd
L
4
8
L
6
@(d:16, ERs) → ERd32
@(d:24, ERs) → ERd32
10
14
10
L
10
4
L
@ERs → ERd32
ERs32+4 → ERs32
MOV.L @aa:16, ERd
MOV.L @aa:24, ERd
MOV.L ERs, @ERd
L
L
L
L
L
L
6
@aa:16 → ERd32
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
12
8
8
@aa:24 → ERd32
4
ERs32 → @ERd
MOV.L ERs, @(d:16, ERd)
MOV.L ERs, @(d:24, ERd)
MOV.L ERs, @–ERd
6
ERs32 → @(d:16, ERd)
ERs32 → @(d:24, ERd)
10
14
10
10
4
ERd32–4 → ERd32
ERs32 → @ERd
MOV.L ERs, @aa:16
MOV.L ERs, @aa:24
POP.W Rn
L
L
6
8
ERs32 → @aa:16
ERs32 → @aa:24
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
—
—
—
10
12
6
W
2
4
2
4
@SP → Rn16
SP+2 → SP
POP
POP.L ERn
PUSH.W Rn
PUSH.L ERn
L
W
L
@SP → ERn32
SP+4 → SP
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
—
—
—
10
6
SP–2 → SP
Rn16 → @SP
PUSH
SP–4 → SP
10
ERn32 → @SP
Cannot be used in
this LSI
MOVFPE MOVFPE @aa:16, Rd
MOVTPE MOVTPE Rs, @aa:16
B
B
Cannot be used in
this LSI
4
4
Cannot be used in
this LSI
Cannot be used in
this LSI
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 288 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
2. Arithmetic instructions
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
ADD.B #xx:8, Rd
ADD.B Rs, Rd
B
B
2
4
6
Rd8+#xx:8 → Rd8
Rd8+Rs8 → Rd8
—
—
2
2
4
2
6
ADD
2
2
ADD.W #xx:16, Rd
ADD.W Rs, Rd
W
W
L
Rd16+#xx:16 → Rd16
Rd16+Rs16 → Rd16
— (1)
— (1)
— (2)
ADD.L #xx:32, ERd
ERd32+#xx:32 →
ERd32
ADD.L ERs, ERd
L
2
ERd32+ERs32 →
— (2)
2
ERd32
ADDX.B #xx:8, Rd
ADDX.B Rs, Rd
ADDS.L #1, ERd
ADDS.L #2, ERd
ADDS.L #4, ERd
INC.B Rd
B
B
L
2
Rd8+#xx:8 +C → Rd8
Rd8+Rs8 +C → Rd8
ERd32+1 → ERd32
ERd32+2 → ERd32
ERd32+4 → ERd32
Rd8+1 → Rd8
—
—
(3)
(3)
—
—
—
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
ADDX
ADDS
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
*
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
L
L
B
W
W
L
INC
INC.W #1, Rd
INC.W #2, Rd
INC.L #1, ERd
INC.L #2, ERd
DAA Rd
Rd16+1 → Rd16
Rd16+2 → Rd16
ERd32+1 → ERd32
ERd32+2 → ERd32
L
B
Rd8 decimal adjust
*
DAA
SUB
→ Rd8
SUB.B Rs, Rd
B
W
W
L
2
2
2
Rd8–Rs8 → Rd8
—
2
4
2
6
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
SUB.W #xx:16, Rd
SUB.W Rs, Rd
SUB.L #xx:32, ERd
SUB.L ERs, ERd
SUBX.B #xx:8, Rd
SUBX.B Rs, Rd
SUBS.L #1, ERd
SUBS.L #2, ERd
SUBS.L #4, ERd
DEC.B Rd
4
6
2
Rd16–#xx:16 → Rd16
Rd16–Rs16 → Rd16
— (1)
— (1)
ERd32–#xx:32 → ERd32 — (2)
ERd32–ERs32 → ERd32 — (2)
L
SUBX
SUBS
B
B
L
Rd8–#xx:8–C → Rd8
Rd8–Rs8–C → Rd8
ERd32–1 → ERd32
ERd32–2 → ERd32
ERd32–4 → ERd32
Rd8–1 → Rd8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
(3)
(3)
—
—
—
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
L
L
DEC
B
W
W
DEC.W #1, Rd
DEC.W #2, Rd
Rd16–1 → Rd16
Rd16–2 → Rd16
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 289 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
DEC.L #1, ERd
DEC.L #2, ERd
L
L
B
2
2
2
ERd32–1 → ERd32
ERd32–2 → ERd32
—
—
—
—
—
*
—
—
—
2
2
2
DEC
DAS DAS.Rd
Rd8 decimal adjust
*
→ Rd8
MULXU MULXU. B Rs, Rd
MULXU. W Rs, ERd
MULXS MULXS. B Rs, Rd
MULXS. W Rs, ERd
B
W
B
2
2
4
4
2
Rd8 × Rs8 → Rd16
(unsigned multiplication)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
14
22
16
24
14
Rd16 × Rs16 → ERd32
(unsigned multiplication)
Rd8 × Rs8 → Rd16
(signed multiplication)
W
B
Rd16 × Rs16 → ERd32
(signed multiplication)
DIVXU DIVXU. B Rs, Rd
Rd16 ÷ Rs8 → Rd16
(RdH: remainder,
RdL: quotient)
— (6) (7) —
— (6) (7) —
— (8) (7) —
— (8) (7) —
(unsigned division)
DIVXU. W Rs, ERd
DIVXS DIVXS. B Rs, Rd
DIVXS. W Rs, ERd
W
B
2
4
4
ERd32 ÷ Rs16 → ERd32
(Ed: remainder,
—
—
—
—
—
—
22
16
24
Rd: quotient)
(unsigned division)
Rd16 ÷ Rs8 → Rd16
(RdH: remainder,
RdL: quotient)
(signed division)
W
ERd32 ÷ Rs16 → ERd32
(Ed: remainder,
Rd: quotient)
(signed division)
CMP CMP.B #xx:8, Rd
CMP.B Rs, Rd
B
B
2
4
6
Rd8–#xx:8
—
—
2
2
4
2
4
2
2
2
2
Rd8–Rs8
CMP.W #xx:16, Rd
CMP.W Rs, Rd
W
W
L
Rd16–#xx:16
Rd16–Rs16
ERd32–#xx:32
ERd32–ERs32
— (1)
— (1)
— (2)
— (2)
CMP.L #xx:32, ERd
CMP.L ERs, ERd
L
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 290 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
NEG.B Rd
B
0–Rd8 → Rd8
W 0–Rd16 → Rd16
0–ERd32 → ERd32
2
2
2
2
—
—
—
—
2
2
2
2
NEG
NEG.W Rd
NEG.L ERd
L
EXTU EXTU.W Rd
W 0 → (<bits 15 to 8>
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
of Rd16)
EXTU.L ERd
L
0 → (<bits 31 to 16>
of ERd32)
2
2
2
—
—
—
2
2
2
EXTS EXTS.W Rd
EXTS.L ERd
W (<bit 7> of Rd16) →
(<bits 15 to 8> of Rd16)
L
(<bit 15> of ERd32) →
(<bits 31 to 16> of
ERd32)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 291 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
3. Logic instructions
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
AND.B #xx:8, Rd
AND.B Rs, Rd
B
B
W
W
L
2
4
6
2
4
6
2
4
6
Rd8∧#xx:8 → Rd8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
2
4
2
6
4
2
2
4
2
6
4
2
2
4
2
6
4
2
2
2
AND
2
2
4
2
2
4
2
2
Rd8∧Rs8 → Rd8
AND.W #xx:16, Rd
AND.W Rs, Rd
AND.L #xx:32, ERd
AND.L ERs, ERd
OR.B #xx:8, Rd
OR.B Rs, Rd
Rd16∧#xx:16 → Rd16
Rd16∧Rs16 → Rd16
ERd32∧#xx:32 → ERd32
ERd32∧ERs32 → ERd32
Rd8⁄#xx:8 → Rd8
L
B
B
W
W
L
OR
Rd8⁄Rs8 → Rd8
OR.W #xx:16, Rd
OR.W Rs, Rd
Rd16⁄#xx:16 → Rd16
Rd16⁄Rs16 → Rd16
ERd32⁄#xx:32 → ERd32
ERd32⁄ERs32 → ERd32
Rd8⊕#xx:8 → Rd8
Rd8⊕Rs8 → Rd8
OR.L #xx:32, ERd
OR.L ERs, ERd
L
XOR XOR.B #xx:8, Rd
XOR.B Rs, Rd
B
B
W
W
L
XOR.W #xx:16, Rd
XOR.W Rs, Rd
Rd16⊕#xx:16 → Rd16
Rd16⊕Rs16 → Rd16
ERd32⊕#xx:32 → ERd32
ERd32⊕ERs32 → ERd32
¬ Rd8 → Rd8
XOR.L #xx:32, ERd
XOR.L ERs, ERd
NOT NOT.B Rd
NOT.W Rd
L
4
2
2
2
B
W
L
¬ Rd16 → Rd16
NOT.L ERd
¬ Rd32 → Rd32
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 292 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
4. Shift instructions
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
SHAL.B Rd
B
W
L
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
SHAL
SHAR
SHLL
C
0
SHAL.W Rd
SHAL.L ERd
SHAR.B Rd
SHAR.W Rd
SHAR.L ERd
SHLL.B Rd
MSB
LSB
B
W
L
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
C
MSB
LSB
B
W
L
C
0
SHLL.W Rd
SHLL.L ERd
SHLR.B Rd
SHLR.W Rd
SHLR.L ERd
ROTXL.B Rd
ROTXL.W Rd
ROTXL.L ERd
ROTXR.B Rd
ROTXR.W Rd
ROTXR.L ERd
MSB
MSB
LSB
LSB
B
W
L
SHLR
ROTXL
0
C
B
W
L
C
MSB
LSB
B
W
L
ROTXR
C
MSB
LSB
ROTL ROTL.B Rd
ROTL.W Rd
B
W
L
C
MSB
LSB
ROTL.L ERd
ROTR.B Rd
ROTR.W Rd
ROTR.L ERd
B
W
L
ROTR
C
MSB
LSB
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 293 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
5. Bit manipulation instructions
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
BSET #xx:3, Rd
BSET #xx:3, @ERd
BSET #xx:3, @aa:8
BSET Rn, Rd
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
2
4
4
2
4
4
2
4
4
2
4
4
2
(#xx:3 of Rd8) ← 1
(#xx:3 of @ERd) ← 1
(#xx:3 of @aa:8) ← 1
(Rn8 of Rd8) ← 1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
8
8
2
8
8
2
8
8
2
8
8
2
BSET
BCLR
BNOT
BSET Rn, @ERd
BSET Rn, @aa:8
BCLR #xx:3, Rd
BCLR #xx:3, @ERd
BCLR #xx:3, @aa:8
BCLR Rn, Rd
(Rn8 of @ERd) ← 1
(Rn8 of @aa:8) ← 1
(#xx:3 of Rd8) ← 0
(#xx:3 of @ERd) ← 0
(#xx:3 of @aa:8) ← 0
(Rn8 of Rd8) ← 0
BCLR Rn, @ERd
BCLR Rn, @aa:8
BNOT #xx:3, Rd
(Rn8 of @ERd) ← 0
(Rn8 of @aa:8) ← 0
(#xx:3 of Rd8) ←
¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8)
BNOT #xx:3, @ERd
BNOT #xx:3, @aa:8
BNOT Rn, Rd
B
B
B
B
B
4
(#xx:3 of @ERd) ←
¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
8
8
2
8
8
4
(#xx:3 of @aa:8) ←
¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8)
2
4
4
(Rn8 of Rd8) ←
¬ (Rn8 of Rd8)
BNOT Rn, @ERd
BNOT Rn, @aa:8
(Rn8 of @ERd) ←
¬ (Rn8 of @ERd)
(Rn8 of @aa:8) ←
¬ (Rn8 of @aa:8)
BTST #xx:3, Rd
BTST #xx:3, @ERd
BTST #xx:3, @aa:8
BTST Rn, Rd
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
2
4
4
2
4
4
2
¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8) → Z
¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd) → Z
¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) → Z
¬ (Rn8 of @Rd8) → Z
¬ (Rn8 of @ERd) → Z
¬ (Rn8 of @aa:8) → Z
(#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
6
6
2
6
6
2
BTST
BTST Rn, @ERd
BTST Rn, @aa:8
BLD #xx:3, Rd
—
BLD
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 294 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
BLD #xx:3, @ERd
BLD #xx:3, @aa:8
BILD #xx:3, Rd
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
4
(#xx:3 of @ERd) → C
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
6
6
2
6
6
2
8
8
2
8
8
2
6
6
2
6
6
2
6
6
2
6
6
2
6
6
2
6
6
BLD
4
(#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
2
¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
BILD
BILD #xx:3, @ERd
BILD #xx:3, @aa:8
BST #xx:3, Rd
4
¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd) → C
¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
C → (#xx:3 of Rd8)
4
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
BST
BST #xx:3, @ERd
BST #xx:3, @aa:8
BIST #xx:3, Rd
4
C → (#xx:3 of @ERd24)
C → (#xx:3 of @aa:8)
4
BIST
2
¬ C → (#xx:3 of Rd8)
BIST #xx:3, @ERd
BIST #xx:3, @aa:8
BAND #xx:3, Rd
4
¬ C → (#xx:3 of @ERd24)
¬ C → (#xx:3 of @aa:8)
C∧(#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
4
2
BAND
BAND #xx:3, @ERd
BAND #xx:3, @aa:8
BIAND #xx:3, Rd
BIAND #xx:3, @ERd
BIAND #xx:3, @aa:8
BOR #xx:3, Rd
4
C∧(#xx:3 of @ERd24) → C
C∧(#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
C∧ ¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
C∧ ¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd24) → C
C∧ ¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
C⁄(#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
4
BIAND
2
4
4
2
BOR
BIOR
BOR #xx:3, @ERd
BOR #xx:3, @aa:8
BIOR #xx:3, Rd
4
C⁄(#xx:3 of @ERd24) → C
C⁄(#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
C⁄ ¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
C⁄ ¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd24) → C
C⁄ ¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
C⊕(#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
C⊕(#xx:3 of @ERd24) → C
C⊕(#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
C⊕ ¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
C⊕ ¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd24) → C
C⊕ ¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
4
2
BIOR #xx:3, @ERd
BIOR #xx:3, @aa:8
BXOR #xx:3, Rd
4
4
2
BXOR
BIXOR
BXOR #xx:3, @ERd
BXOR #xx:3, @aa:8
BIXOR #xx:3, Rd
BIXOR #xx:3, @ERd
BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:8
4
4
2
4
4
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 295 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
6. Branching instructions
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
Branch
I
H
N
Z
V
C
Condition
BRA d:8 (BT d:8)
BRA d:16 (BT d:16)
BRN d:8 (BF d:8)
BRN d:16 (BF d:16)
BHI d:8
—
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
Always
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
If condition
is true then
PC ← PC+d
else next;
Bcc
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Never
C ⁄ Z = 0
C ⁄ Z = 1
C = 0
BHI d:16
BLS d:8
BLS d:16
BCC d:8 (BHS d:8)
BCC d:16 (BHS d:16)
BCS d:8 (BLO d:8)
BCS d:16 (BLO d:16)
BNE d:8
C = 1
Z = 0
BNE d:16
BEQ d:8
Z = 1
BEQ d:16
BVC d:8
V = 0
BVC d:16
BVS d:8
V = 1
BVS d:16
BPL d:8
N = 0
BPL d:16
BMI d:8
N = 1
BMI d:16
BGE d:8
N⊕V = 0
N⊕V = 1
Z ⁄ (N⊕V) = 0
Z ⁄ (N⊕V) = 1
BGE d:16
BLT d:8
BLT d:16
BGT d:8
BGT d:16
BLE d:8
BLE d:16
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 296 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
JMP @ERn
JMP @aa:24
JMP @@aa:8
BSR d:8
—
—
—
—
2
4
2
2
PC ← ERn
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
4
6
JMP
BSR
PC ← aa:24
PC ← @aa:8
8
6
10
8
PC → @–SP
PC ← PC+d:8
BSR d:16
—
—
—
—
—
4
PC → @–SP
PC ← PC+d:16
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
8
6
8
8
8
10
8
JSR
JSR @ERn
JSR @aa:24
JSR @@aa:8
2
4
2
PC → @–SP
PC ← ERn
PC → @–SP
PC ← aa:24
10
12
10
PC → @–SP
PC ← @aa:8
RTS RTS
2
PC ← @SP+
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 297 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
7. System control instructions
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
1
TRAPA #x:2
RTE
—
2
PC → @–SP
CCR → @–SP
<vector> → PC
—
—
—
—
—
14 16
TRAPA
RTE
—
—
CCR ← @SP+
PC ← @SP+
10
2
—
SLEEP SLEEP
Transition to power-
down state
—
—
—
—
—
LDC #xx:8, CCR
B
B
2
#xx:8 → CCR
2
2
LDC
LDC Rs, CCR
2
Rs8 → CCR
LDC @ERs, CCR
W
W
W
W
4
@ERs → CCR
6
LDC @(d:16, ERs), CCR
LDC @(d:24, ERs), CCR
LDC @ERs+, CCR
6
@(d:16, ERs) → CCR
@(d:24, ERs) → CCR
8
10
4
12
8
@ERs → CCR
ERs32+2 → ERs32
LDC @aa:16, CCR
LDC @aa:24, CCR
STC CCR, Rd
W
W
B
6
@aa:16 → CCR
@aa:24 → CCR
CCR → Rd8
8
10
2
8
—
—
—
—
—
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
STC
STC CCR, @ERd
W
W
W
W
4
CCR → @ERd
6
STC CCR, @(d:16, ERd)
STC CCR, @(d:24, ERd)
STC CCR, @–ERd
6
CCR → @(d:16, ERd)
CCR → @(d:24, ERd)
8
10
4
12
8
ERd32–2 → ERd32
CCR → @ERd
—
—
STC CCR, @aa:16
STC CCR, @aa:24
ANDC #xx:8, CCR
ORC #xx:8, CCR
XORC #xx:8, CCR
W
W
B
6
8
CCR → @aa:16
CCR → @aa:24
CCR∧#xx:8 → CCR
CCR⁄#xx:8 → CCR
CCR⊕#xx:8 → CCR
PC ← PC+2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
8
10
2
2
2
2
ANDC
ORC
B
2
XORC
B
2
—
NOP NOP
—
2
—
—
—
—
—
2
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 298 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
8. Block transfer instructions
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
EEPMOV
EEPMOV. B
—
—
4
4
if R4L ≠ 0 then
repeat @R5 → @R6
R5+1 → R5
—
—
—
—
—
—
8+
4n*2
R6+1 → R6
R4L–1 → R4L
until
else next
R4L=0
EEPMOV. W
if R4 ≠ 0 then
repeat @R5 → @R6
R5+1 → R5
—
—
—
—
—
—
8+
4n*2
R6+1 → R6
R4–1 → R4
until
R4=0
else next
Notes: 1. The number of states in cases where the instruction code and its operands are located
in on-chip memory is shown here. For other cases see Appendix A.3, Number of
Execution States.
2. n is the value set in register R4L or R4.
(1) Set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 11; otherwise cleared to 0.
(2) Set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 27; otherwise cleared to 0.
(3) Retains its previous value when the result is zero; otherwise cleared to 0.
(4) Set to 1 when the adjustment produces a carry; otherwise retains its previous value.
(5) The number of states required for execution of an instruction that transfers data in
synchronization with the E clock is variable.
(6) Set to 1 when the divisor is negative; otherwise cleared to 0.
(7) Set to 1 when the divisor is zero; otherwise cleared to 0.
(8) Set to 1 when the quotient is negative; otherwise cleared to 0.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 299 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
A.2
Operation Code Map
Table A.2 Operation Code Map (1)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 300 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Table A.2 Operation Code Map (2)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 301 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Table A.2 Operation Code Map (3)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 302 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
A.3
Number of Execution States
The status of execution for each instruction of the H8/300H CPU and the method of calculating
the number of states required for instruction execution are shown below. Table A.4 shows the
number of cycles of each type occurring in each instruction, such as instruction fetch and data
read/write. Table A.3 shows the number of states required for each cycle. The total number of
states required for execution of an instruction can be calculated by the following expression:
Execution states = I × SI + J × SJ + K × SK + L × SL + M × SM + N × SN
Examples: When instruction is fetched from on-chip ROM, and an on-chip RAM is accessed.
BSET #0, @FF00
From table A.4:
I = L = 2, J = K = M = N= 0
From table A.3:
SI = 2, SL = 2
Number of states required for execution = 2 × 2 + 2 × 2 = 8
When instruction is fetched from on-chip ROM, branch address is read from on-chip ROM, and
on-chip RAM is used for stack area.
JSR @@ 30
From table A.4:
I = 2, J = K = 1, L = M = N = 0
From table A.3:
SI = SJ = SK = 2
Number of states required for execution = 2 × 2 + 1 × 2+ 1 × 2 = 8
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 303 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Table A.3 Number of Cycles in Each Instruction
Access Location
On-Chip Peripheral Module
Execution Status
(Instruction Cycle)
On-Chip Memory
Instruction fetch
SI
2
—
Branch address read
Stack operation
SJ
SK
SL
SM
SN
Byte data access
Word data access
Internal operation
2 or 3*
2 or 3*
1
Note:
*
Depends on which on-chip peripheral module is accessed. See section 17.1, Register
Addresses (Address Order).
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 304 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Table A.4 Number of Cycles in Each Instruction
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Word Data Internal
Fetch
I
Addr. Read Operation Access
Access
M
Operation
N
Instruction Mnemonic
J
K
L
ADD
ADD.B #xx:8, Rd
1
1
2
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
ADD.B Rs, Rd
ADD.W #xx:16, Rd
ADD.W Rs, Rd
ADD.L #xx:32, ERd
ADD.L ERs, ERd
ADDS #1/2/4, ERd
ADDX #xx:8, Rd
ADDX Rs, Rd
AND.B #xx:8, Rd
AND.B Rs, Rd
AND.W #xx:16, Rd
AND.W Rs, Rd
AND.L #xx:32, ERd
AND.L ERs, ERd
ANDC #xx:8, CCR
BAND #xx:3, Rd
BAND #xx:3, @ERd
BAND #xx:3, @aa:8
BRA d:8 (BT d:8)
BRN d:8 (BF d:8)
BHI d:8
ADDS
ADDX
AND
ANDC
BAND
1
1
Bcc
BLS d:8
BCC d:8 (BHS d:8)
BCS d:8 (BLO d:8)
BNE d:8
BEQ d:8
BVC d:8
BVS d:8
BPL d:8
BMI d:8
BGE d:8
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 305 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Word Data Internal
Fetch
I
Addr. Read Operation Access
Access
M
Operation
N
Instruction Mnemonic
J
K
L
Bcc
BLT d:8
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
BGT d:8
BLE d:8
BRA d:16(BT d:16)
BRN d:16(BF d:16)
BHI d:16
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
BLS d:16
BCC d:16(BHS d:16)
BCS d:16(BLO d:16)
BNE d:16
BEQ d:16
BVC d:16
BVS d:16
BPL d:16
BMI d:16
BGE d:16
BLT d:16
BGT d:16
BLE d:16
BCLR
BCLR #xx:3, Rd
BCLR #xx:3, @ERd
BCLR #xx:3, @aa:8
BCLR Rn, Rd
BCLR Rn, @ERd
BCLR Rn, @aa:8
BIAND #xx:3, Rd
BIAND #xx:3, @ERd
BIAND #xx:3, @aa:8
BILD #xx:3, Rd
BILD #xx:3, @ERd
BILD #xx:3, @aa:8
2
2
2
2
BIAND
BILD
1
1
1
1
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 306 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Word Data Internal
Fetch
I
Addr. Read Operation Access
Access
M
Operation
N
Instruction Mnemonic
J
K
L
BIOR
BIOR #xx:8, Rd
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
BIOR #xx:8, @ERd
BIOR #xx:8, @aa:8
BIST #xx:3, Rd
1
1
BIST
BIST #xx:3, @ERd
BIST #xx:3, @aa:8
BIXOR #xx:3, Rd
BIXOR #xx:3, @ERd
BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:8
BLD #xx:3, Rd
2
2
BIXOR
BLD
1
1
BLD #xx:3, @ERd
BLD #xx:3, @aa:8
BNOT #xx:3, Rd
BNOT #xx:3, @ERd
BNOT #xx:3, @aa:8
BNOT Rn, Rd
1
1
BNOT
2
2
BNOT Rn, @ERd
BNOT Rn, @aa:8
BOR #xx:3, Rd
2
2
BOR
BOR #xx:3, @ERd
BOR #xx:3, @aa:8
BSET #xx:3, Rd
BSET #xx:3, @ERd
BSET #xx:3, @aa:8
BSET Rn, Rd
1
1
BSET
2
2
BSET Rn, @ERd
BSET Rn, @aa:8
BSR d:8
2
2
BSR
BST
1
1
BSR d:16
2
BST #xx:3, Rd
BST #xx:3, @ERd
BST #xx:3, @aa:8
2
2
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 307 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Word Data Internal
Fetch
I
Addr. Read Operation Access
Access
M
Operation
N
Instruction Mnemonic
J
K
L
BTST
BTST #xx:3, Rd
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
BTST #xx:3, @ERd
BTST #xx:3, @aa:8
BTST Rn, Rd
1
1
BTST Rn, @ERd
BTST Rn, @aa:8
BXOR #xx:3, Rd
BXOR #xx:3, @ERd
BXOR #xx:3, @aa:8
CMP.B #xx:8, Rd
CMP.B Rs, Rd
CMP.W #xx:16, Rd
CMP.W Rs, Rd
CMP.L #xx:32, ERd
CMP.L ERs, ERd
DAA Rd
1
1
BXOR
CMP
1
1
DAA
DAS
DEC
DAS Rd
DEC.B Rd
DEC.W #1/2, Rd
DEC.L #1/2, ERd
DIVXS.B Rs, Rd
DIVXS.W Rs, ERd
DIVXU.B Rs, Rd
DIVXU.W Rs, ERd
EEPMOV.B
DUVXS
DIVXU
EEPMOV
EXTS
12
20
12
20
2n+2*1
2n+2*1
EEPMOV.W
EXTS.W Rd
EXTS.L ERd
EXTU
EXTU.W Rd
EXTU.L ERd
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 308 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Word Data Internal
Fetch
I
Addr. Read Operation Access
Access
M
Operation
N
Instruction Mnemonic
J
K
L
INC
INC.B Rd
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
3
5
2
3
4
1
1
1
2
4
1
1
2
3
1
2
4
1
1
INC.W #1/2, Rd
INC.L #1/2, ERd
JMP @ERn
JMP
JSR
LDC
JMP @aa:24
2
2
JMP @@aa:8
1
1
JSR @ERn
1
1
1
JSR @aa:24
2
JSR @@aa:8
LDC #xx:8, CCR
LDC Rs, CCR
LDC@ERs, CCR
LDC@(d:16, ERs), CCR
LDC@(d:24,ERs), CCR
LDC@ERs+, CCR
LDC@aa:16, CCR
LDC@aa:24, CCR
MOV.B #xx:8, Rd
MOV.B Rs, Rd
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
MOV
MOV.B @ERs, Rd
MOV.B @(d:16, ERs), Rd
MOV.B @(d:24, ERs), Rd
MOV.B @ERs+, Rd
MOV.B @aa:8, Rd
MOV.B @aa:16, Rd
MOV.B @aa:24, Rd
MOV.B Rs, @Erd
MOV.B Rs, @(d:16, ERd)
MOV.B Rs, @(d:24, ERd)
MOV.B Rs, @-ERd
MOV.B Rs, @aa:8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 309 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Word Data Internal
Fetch
I
Addr. Read Operation Access
Access
M
Operation
N
Instruction Mnemonic
J
K
L
1
1
MOV
MOV.B Rs, @aa:16
2
3
2
1
1
2
4
1
2
3
1
2
4
1
2
3
3
1
2
3
5
2
3
4
2
3
5
2
3
4
2
2
MOV.B Rs, @aa:24
MOV.W #xx:16, Rd
MOV.W Rs, Rd
MOV.W @ERs, Rd
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MOV.W @(d:16,ERs), Rd
MOV.W @(d:24,ERs), Rd
MOV.W @ERs+, Rd
MOV.W @aa:16, Rd
MOV.W @aa:24, Rd
MOV.W Rs, @ERd
2
MOV.W Rs, @(d:16,ERd)
MOV.W Rs, @(d:24,ERd)
MOV.W Rs, @-ERd
MOV.W Rs, @aa:16
MOV.W Rs, @aa:24
MOV.L #xx:32, ERd
MOV.L ERs, ERd
MOV
2
MOV.L @ERs, ERd
MOV.L @(d:16,ERs), ERd
MOV.L @(d:24,ERs), ERd
MOV.L @ERs+, ERd
MOV.L @aa:16, ERd
MOV.L @aa:24, ERd
MOV.L ERs,@ERd
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
MOV.L ERs, @(d:16,ERd)
MOV.L ERs, @(d:24,ERd)
MOV.L ERs, @-ERd
MOV.L ERs, @aa:16
MOV.L ERs, @aa:24
MOVFPE @aa:16, Rd*2
MOVTPE Rs,@aa:16*2
2
MOVFPE
MOVTPE
1
1
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 310 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Word Data Internal
Fetch
I
Addr. Read Operation Access
Access
M
Operation
N
Instruction Mnemonic
J
K
L
MULXS
MULXU
NEG
MULXS.B Rs, Rd
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
20
12
20
MULXS.W Rs, ERd
MULXU.B Rs, Rd
MULXU.W Rs, ERd
NEG.B Rd
NEG.W Rd
NEG.L ERd
NOP
NOT
NOP
NOT.B Rd
NOT.W Rd
NOT.L ERd
OR
OR.B #xx:8, Rd
OR.B Rs, Rd
OR.W #xx:16, Rd
OR.W Rs, Rd
OR.L #xx:32, ERd
OR.L ERs, ERd
ORC #xx:8, CCR
POP.W Rn
ORC
POP
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
POP.L ERn
PUSH
ROTL
PUSH.W Rn
PUSH.L ERn
ROTL.B Rd
ROTL.W Rd
ROTL.L ERd
ROTR.B Rd
ROTR
ROTR.W Rd
ROTR.L ERd
ROTXL.B Rd
ROTXL.W Rd
ROTXL.L ERd
ROTXL
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 311 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Word Data Internal
Fetch
I
Addr. Read Operation Access
Access
M
Operation
N
Instruction Mnemonic
J
K
L
ROTXR
ROTXR.B Rd
ROTXR.W Rd
ROTXR.L ERd
RTE
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
5
2
3
4
1
2
1
3
1
1
RTE
2
1
2
2
RTS
RTS
SHAL
SHAL.B Rd
SHAL.W Rd
SHAL.L ERd
SHAR
SHLL
SHLR
SHAR.B Rd
SHAR.W Rd
SHAR.L ERd
SHLL.B Rd
SHLL.W Rd
SHLL.L ERd
SHLR.B Rd
SHLR.W Rd
SHLR.L ERd
SLEEP
STC
SLEEP
STC CCR, Rd
STC CCR, @ERd
STC CCR, @(d:16,ERd)
STC CCR, @(d:24,ERd)
STC CCR,@-ERd
STC CCR, @aa:16
STC CCR, @aa:24
SUB.B Rs, Rd
SUB.W #xx:16, Rd
SUB.W Rs, Rd
SUB.L #xx:32, ERd
SUB.L ERs, ERd
SUBS #1/2/4, ERd
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
SUB
SUBS
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 312 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Word Data Internal
Fetch
I
Addr. Read Operation Access
Access
M
Operation
N
Instruction Mnemonic
J
K
L
SUBX
SUBX #xx:8, Rd
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
3
2
1
SUBX. Rs, Rd
TRAPA
XOR
TRAPA #xx:2
1
2
4
XOR.B #xx:8, Rd
XOR.B Rs, Rd
XOR.W #xx:16, Rd
XOR.W Rs, Rd
XOR.L #xx:32, ERd
XOR.L ERs, ERd
XORC #xx:8, CCR
XORC
Notes: 1. n: Specified value in R4L and R4. The source and destination operands are accessed
n+1 times respectively.
2. Cannot be used in this LSI.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 313 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
A.4
Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes
Table A.5 Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes
Addressing Mode
Functions
Instructions
Data
transfer
instructions
MOV
BWL BWL BWL BWL BWL BWL
B
BWL BWL
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
WL
—
POP, PUSH
MOVFPE,
MOVTPE
ADD, CMP
SUB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Arithmetic
operations
BWL BWL
WL BWL
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ADDX, SUBX
ADDS, SUBS
INC, DEC
DAA, DAS
MULXU,
B
B
L
—
—
—
—
BWL
B
BW
MULXS,
DIVXU,
DIVXS
NEG
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
B
BWL
WL
BWL
BWL
BWL
B
—
—
—
—
—
B
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
W
W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
W
W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
W
W
—
—
—
—
—
—
B
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
W
W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
EXTU, EXTS
AND, OR, XOR
NOT
Logical
operations
Shift operations
Bit manipulations
Branching
instructions
BCC, BSR
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
JMP, JSR
RTS
—
—
—
—
—
—
W
W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
System
control
instructions
TRAPA
RTE
—
—
—
—
W
W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SLEEP
LDC
—
B
STC
—
B
B
—
—
ANDC, ORC,
XORC
NOP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Block data transfer instructions
BW
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 314 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Appendix B I/O Port Block Diagrams
B.1
I/O Port Block Diagrams
RES goes low in a reset, and SBY goes low in a reset and in standby mode.
Internal data bus
RES
SBY
PUCR
PMR
Pull-up MOS
PDR
PCR
IRQ
TRGV
Legend
PUCR: Port pull-up control register
PMR: Port mode register
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.1 Port 1 Block Diagram (P17)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 315 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Internal data bus
RES
SBY
PUCR
PMR
Pull-up MOS
PDR
PCR
IRQ
Legend
PUCR: Port pull-up control register
PMR: Port mode register
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.2 Port 1 Block Diagram (P14)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 316 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Internal data bus
RES
SBY
PUCR
Pull-up MOS
PDR
PCR
Legend
PUCR: Port pull-up control register
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.3 Port 1 Block Diagram (P16, P15, P12*, P10)
Note: * This pin is available only in the H8/36014.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 317 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
SCI3_3 Internal data bus
RES
SBY
PUCR
SCKIE
Pull-up MOS
SCKOE
PDR
PCR
SCKO
SCKI
Legend
PUCR: Port pull-up control register
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.4 Port 1 Block Diagram (P12) (H8/36024)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 318 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Internal data bus
RES
SBY
PUCR
Pull-up MOS
PDR
PCR
Legend
PUCR: Port pull-up control register
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.5 Port 1 Block Diagram (P11)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 319 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Internal data bus
SBY
PMR
PDR
PCR
SCI3
TXD
Legend
PMR: Port mode register
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.6 Port 2 Block Diagram (P22)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 320 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
SBY
Internal data bus
PDR
PCR
SCI3
RE
RXD
Legend
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.7 Port 2 Block Diagram (P21)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 321 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
SBY
SCI3
SCKIE
SCKOE
Internal data bus
PDR
PCR
SCKO
SCKI
Legend
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.8 Port 2 Block Diagram (P20)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 322 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Internal data bus
SBY
PMOS
PMR
PDR
PCR
Legend
PMR: Port mode register
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.9 Port 5 Block Diagram (P57, P56) (H8/36014)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 323 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Internal data bus
SBY
PMOS
PMR
PDR
PCR
SCI3_3
TXD_3
Legend
PMR: Port mode register
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.10 Port 5 Block Diagram (P57) (H8/36024)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 324 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Internal data bus
SBY
PMOS
PMR
PDR
PCR
SCI3_3
RE
RXD_2
Legend
PMR: Port mode register
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.11 Port 5 Block Diagram (P56) (H8/36024)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 325 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Internal data bus
RES
SBY
PUCR
PMR
Pull-up MOS
PDR
PCR
WKP
ADTRG
Legend
PUCR: Port pull-up control register
PMR: Port mode register
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.12 Port 5 Block Diagram (P55)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 326 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Internal data bus
RES
SBY
PUCR
PMR
Pull-up MOS
PDR
PCR
WKP
Legend
PUCR: Port pull-up control register
PMR: Port mode register
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.13 Port 5 Block Diagram (P54 to P50)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 327 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Internal data bus
SBY
Timer V
OS3
OS2
OS1
OS0
PDR
PCR
TMOV
Legend
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.14 Port 7 Block Diagram (P76)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 328 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Internal data bus
SBY
PDR
PCR
Timer V
TMCIV
Legend
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.15 Port 7 Block Diagram (P75)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 329 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Internal data bus
SBY
PDR
PCR
Timer V
TMRIV
Legend
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.16 Port 7 Block Diagram (P74)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 330 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Internal data bus
SBY
PDR
PCR
Legend
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.17 Port 7 Block Diagram (P73)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 331 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Internal data bus
SBY
PMR
PDR
PCR
SCI3_2
TXD_2
Legend
PMR: Port mode register
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.18 Port 7 Block Diagram (P72)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 332 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
SBY
Internal data bus
PDR
PCR
SCI3_2
RE
RXD_2
Legend
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.19 Port 7 Block Diagram (P71)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 333 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
SBY
SCI3_2
SCKIE
SCKOE
Internal data bus
PDR
PCR
SCKO
SCKI
Legend
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.20 Port 7 Block Diagram (P70)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 334 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Internal data bus
SBY
Timer W
Output
control
signals
A to D
PDR
PCR
FTIOA
FTIOB
FTIOC
FTIOD
Legend
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.21 Port 8 Block Diagram (P84 to P81)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 335 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Internal data bus
SBY
PDR
PCR
Timer W
FTCI
Legend
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.22 Port 8 Block Diagram (P80)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 336 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Internal data bus
A/D converter
DEC
CH3 to CH0
VIN
Figure B.23 Port B Block Diagram (PB3 to PB0)
B.2
Port States in Each Operating State
Port
Reset
Active
Sleep
Subsleep
Standby
P17 to P14, High impedance
P12 to P10
Functioning Retained
Retained
High impedance*
P22 to P20
P57 to P50
P76 to P70
P84 to P80
High impedance
High impedance
High impedance
High impedance
Functioning Retained
Functioning Retained
Functioning Retained
Functioning Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
High impedance
High impedance*
High impedance
High impedance
High impedance
PB3 to PB0 High impedance
High
High
impedance impedance
Note: * High level output when the pull-up MOS is in on state.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 337 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Appendix C Product Code Lineup
Product Type
Product Code
Model Marking
HD64F36024FP
HD64F36024FX
HD64F36024FY
HD64F36024FT
HD64F36024GFP
HD64F36024GFX
HD64F36024GFY
HD64F36024GFT
Package Code
LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
QFN-48(TNP-48)
LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
QFN-48(TNP-48)
H8/36024 Flash memory Standard HD64F36024FP
version
product
HD64F36024FX
HD64F36024FY
HD64F36024FT
HD64F36024GFP
HD64F36024GFX
HD64F36024GFY
HD64F36024GFT
Product
with POR
& LVDC
Masked ROM Standard HD64336024FP
HD64336024(***)FP LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
HD64336024(***)FX LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
HD64336024(***)FY LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
HD64336024(***)FT QFN-48(TNP-48)
HD64336024G(***)FP LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
HD64336024G(***)FX LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
HD64336024G(***)FY LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
HD64336024G(***)FT QFN-48(TNP-48)
HD64336023(***)FP LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
HD64336023(***)FX LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
HD64336023(***)FY LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
HD64336023(***)FT QFN-48(TNP-48)
HD64336023G(***)FP LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
HD64336023G(***)FX LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
HD64336023G(***)FY LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
HD64336023G(***)FT QFN-48(TNP-48)
version
product
HD64336024FX
HD64336024FY
HD64336024FT
HD64336024GFP
HD64336024GFX
HD64336024GFY
HD64336024GFT
Product
with POR
& LVDC
H8/36023 Masked ROM Standard HD64336023FP
version
product
HD64336023FX
HD64336023FY
HD64336023FT
HD64336023GFP
HD64336023GFX
HD64336023GFY
HD64336023GFT
Product
with POR
& LVDC
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 338 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Product Type
Product Code
Model Marking
HD64F36022FP
HD64F36022FX
HD64F36022FY
HD64F36022FT
HD64F36022GFP
HD64F36022GFX
HD64F36022GFY
HD64F36022GFT
Package Code
H8/36022 Flash memory Standard HD64F36022FP
LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
QFN-48(TNP-48)
LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
QFN-48(TNP-48)
version
product
HD64F36022FX
HD64F36022FY
HD64F36022FT
HD64F36022GFP
HD64F36022GFX
HD64F36022GFY
HD64F36022GFT
Product
with POR
& LVDC
Masked ROM Standard HD64336022FP
HD64336022(***)FP LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
HD64336022(***)FX LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
HD64336022(***)FY LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
HD64336022(***)FT QFN-48(TNP-48)
HD64336022G(***)FP LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
HD64336022G(***)FX LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
HD64336022G(***)FY LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
HD64336022G(***)FT QFN-48(TNP-48)
version
product
HD64336022FX
HD64336022FY
HD64336022FT
HD64336022GFP
HD64336022GFX
HD64336022GFY
HD64336022GFT
Product
with POR
& LVDC
H8/36014 Flash memory Standard HD64F36014FP
HD64F36014FP
HD64F36014FX
HD64F36014FY
HD64F36014FT
HD64F36014GFP
HD64F36014GFX
HD64F36014GFY
HD64F36014GFT
LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
QFN-48(TNP-48)
LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
QFN-48(TNP-48)
version
product
HD64F36014FX
HD64F36014FY
HD64F36014FT
HD64F36014GFP
HD64F36014GFX
HD64F36014GFY
HD64F36014GFT
Product
with POR
& LVDC
Masked ROM Standard HD64336014FP
HD64336014(***)FP LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
HD64336014(***)FX LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
HD64336014(***)FY LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
HD64336014(***)FT QFN-48(TNP-48)
HD64336014G(***)FP LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
HD64336014G(***)FX LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
HD64336014G(***)FY LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
HD64336014G(***)FT QFN-48(TNP-48)
version
product
HD64336014FX
HD64336014FY
HD64336014FT
HD64336014GFP
HD64336014GFX
HD64336014GFY
HD64336014GFT
Product
with POR
& LVDC
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 339 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Product Type
Product Code
Model Marking
Package Code
H8/36013 Masked ROM Standard HD64336013FP
HD64336013(***)FP LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
HD64336013(***)FX LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
HD64336013(***)FY LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
HD64336013(***)FT QFN-48(TNP-48)
HD64336013G(***)FP LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
HD64336013G(***)FX LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
HD64336013G(***)FY LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
HD64336013G(***)FT QFN-48(TNP-48)
version
product
HD64336013FX
HD64336013FY
HD64336013FT
HD64336013GFP
HD64336013GFX
HD64336013GFY
HD64336013GFT
Product
with POR
& LVDC
H8/36012 Flash memory Standard HD64F36012FP
HD64F36012FP
HD64F36012FX
HD64F36012FY
HD64F36012FT
HD64F36012GFP
HD64F36012GFX
HD64F36012GFY
HD64F36012GFT
LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
QFN-48(TNP-48)
LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
QFN-48(TNP-48)
version
product
HD64F36012FX
HD64F36012FY
HD64F36012FT
HD64F36012GFP
HD64F36012GFX
HD64F36012GFY
HD64F36012GFT
Product
with POR
& LVDC
Masked ROM Standard HD64336012FP
HD64336012(***)FP LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
HD64336012(***)FX LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
HD64336012(***)FY LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
HD64336012(***)FT QFN-48(TNP-48)
HD64336012G(***)FP LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
HD64336012G(***)FX LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
HD64336012G(***)FY LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
HD64336012G(***)FT QFN-48(TNP-48)
HD64336011(***)FP LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
HD64336011(***)FX LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
HD64336011(***)FY LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
HD64336011(***)FT QFN-48(TNP-48)
HD64336011G(***)FP LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
HD64336011G(***)FX LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
HD64336011G(***)FY LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
HD64336011G(***)FT QFN-48(TNP-48)
version
product
HD64336012FX
HD64336012FY
HD64336012FT
HD64336012GFP
HD64336012GFX
HD64336012GFY
HD64336012GFT
Product
with POR
& LVDC
H8/36011 Masked ROM Standard HD64336011FP
version
product
HD64336011FX
HD64336011FY
HD64336011FT
HD64336011GFP
HD64336011GFX
HD64336011GFY
HD64336011GFT
Product
with POR
& LVDC
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 340 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Product Type
Product Code
Model Marking
Package Code
H8/36010 Masked ROM Standard HD64336010FP
HD64336010(***)FP LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
HD64336010(***)FX LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
HD64336010(***)FY LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
HD64336010(***)FT QFN-48(TNP-48)
HD64336010G(***)FP LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
HD64336010G(***)FX LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
HD64336010G(***)FY LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
HD64336010G(***)FT QFN-48(TNP-48)
version
product
HD64336010FX
HD64336010FY
HD64336010FT
HD64336010GFP
HD64336010GFX
HD64336010GFY
HD64336010GFT
Product
with POR
& LVDC
Legend
POR & LVDC: Power-on reset and low-voltage detection circuits
(***): ROM code
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 341 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
Appendix D Package Dimensions
The package dimensions that are shows in the Renesas Semiconductor Packages Data Book have
priority.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 342 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
c
c
c
1
1
A
2
A
A
E H
E
2 *
E
Z
Figure D.1 FP-64E Package Dimensions
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 343 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
c
c
c
1
1
2
A
A
A
E
H
E
2 *
E
Z
Figure D.2 FP-48F Package Dimensions
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 344 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
c
c
c
1
2
1
A
A
A
E
H
E
2 *
E
Z
Figure D.3 FP-48B Package Dimensions
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 345 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Appendix
p
L
e
A
E
1
A
2
Z
A
1
c
E
c
E
H
Figure D.4 TNP-48 Package Dimensions
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 346 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Main Revisions and Additions in this Edition
Item
Page Revision (See Manual for Details)
Preface
vi, vii When using the on-chip emulator (E7, E8) for H8/36014
program development and debugging, the following
restrictions must be noted.
1. The NMI pin is reserved for the E7 or E8, and cannot be
used.
2. Area H'7000 to H'7FFF is used by the E7 or E8, and is not
available to the user.
4. When the E7 or E8 is used, address breaks can be set as
either available to the user or for use by the E7 or E8. If
address breaks are set as being used by the E7 or E8, the
address break control registers must not be accessed.
5. When the E7 or E8 is used, NMI is an input/output pin
(open-drain in output mode).
6. Use channel 1 of the SCI3 (P21/RXD, P22/TXD) in on-
board programming mode by boot mode.
Note has been deleted.
Section 1 Overview
3
3
Can also be used for the E7 or E8 emulator.
1.2 Internal Block Diagram
Figure 1.1 Internal Block
Diagram
Figure 1.2 Pin
Arrangement (FP-64E)
4
5
2
2
Can also be used for the E7 or E8 emulator.
Can also be used for the E7 or E8 emulator.
Figure 1.3 Pin
Arrangement (FP-48F, FP-
48B, TNP-48)
Table 1.1 Pin Functions
7
Type
E10T
Functions
Interface pin for the E10T, E8, or E7 emulator
Section 7 ROM
Section 8 RAM
77
93
The features of the 32-kbyte (4 kbytes of them are the control
program area for E7 or E8) flash memory built into the
HD64F36024 and HD64F36014 are summarized below.
Note: When the E7 or E8 is used, area H'F780 to H'FB7F
must not be accessed.
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 347 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Item
Page Revision (See Manual for Details)
Section 12 Watchdog
Timer
168
Bit Bit Name
TCSRWE
Description
12.2.1 Timer Control/Status
Register WD (TCSRWD)
4
Timer Control/Status Register WD
Write Enable
Section 14 A/D Converter 220
Therefore byte access to ADDR should be done by reading
the upper byte first then the lower one. Word access is also
possible. ADDR is initialized to H'0000.
14.3.1 A/D Data Registers
A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD)
Section 18 Electrical
Characteristics
254
Values
Table 18.2 DC
Characteristics (1)
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition
Min
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC × 0.7
VCC × 0.8
Input high VIH
voltage
PB3 to PB0
Input low VIL
voltage
RXD, RXD_2,
RXD_3*1,
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V –0.3
P12 to P10,
P17 to P14,
:
PB3 to PB0
Table 18.2 DC
257
Characteristics (1)
Mode
RES Pin
Internal State
Active mode 1
Active mode 2
Operates
VCC
Operates
(φOSC/64)
Sleep mode 1
Sleep mode 2
Only timers operate
VCC
Only timers operate
(φOSC/64)
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 348 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Item
Page Revision (See Manual for Details)
Table 18.10 DC
270
Characteristics (1)
Values
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition
Min
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC × 0.7
VCC × 0.8
Input high VIH
voltage
PB3 to PB0
Input low VIL
voltage
RXD, RXD_2,
RXD_3*1,
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V –0.3
P12 to P10,
P17 to P14,
:
PB3 to PB0
Table 18.10 DC
273
Characteristics (1)
Mode
RES Pin
Internal State
Active mode 1
Active mode 2
Operates
VCC
Operates
(φOSC/64)
Sleep mode 1
Sleep mode 2
Only timers operate
VCC
Only timers operate
(φOSC/64)
Appendix D Package
Dimensions
343
Swapped with new one.
Figure D.1 FP-64E
Package Dimensions
Figure D.2 FP-48F
Package Dimensions
344
345
346
Swapped with new one.
Swapped with new one.
Swapped with new one.
Figure D.3 FP-48B
Package Dimensions
Figure D.4 TNP-48
Package Dimensions
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 349 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 350 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Index
Trap instruction.....................................45
A
A/D converter ......................................... 217
A/D conversion time........................... 224
External trigger input.......................... 225
Sample-and-hold circuit...................... 224
Scan mode........................................... 223
Single mode........................................ 223
Absolute maximum ratings..................... 251
Address break ........................................... 59
Addressing modes..................................... 30
Absolute address................................... 31
Immediate............................................. 32
Memory indirect ................................... 32
Program-counter relative ...................... 32
Register direct....................................... 31
Register indirect.................................... 31
Register indirect with displacement...... 31
Register indirect with post-increment... 31
Register indirect with pre-decrement.... 31
F
Flash memory ...........................................77
Boot mode.............................................82
Boot program ........................................82
Erase/erase-verify .................................88
Erasing units .........................................78
Error protection.....................................91
Hardware protection..............................91
Program/program-verify .......................86
Programming units................................78
Programming/erasing in user program
mode......................................................85
Software protection...............................91
G
General registers .......................................13
C
Clock pulse generators.............................. 65
Condition field.......................................... 28
Condition-code register (CCR)................. 14
CPU ............................................................ 9
I
I/O ports....................................................95
I/O port block diagrams ......................315
Instruction set............................................19
Arithmetic operations instructions........21
Bit Manipulation instructions................24
Block data transfer instructions.............28
Branch instructions ...............................26
Data Transfer instructions.....................20
Logic Operations instructions...............22
Shift Instructions...................................23
System control instructions...................27
Internal power supply step-down
E
Effective address....................................... 33
Effective address extension ...................... 28
Electrical characteristics
AC Characteristics.............................. 259
DC Characteristics.............................. 254
Exception handling................................... 45
Reset exception handling...................... 52
Stack status ........................................... 56
circuit ......................................................237
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 351 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Interrupt
Internal interrupts ................................. 54
Prescaler S ................................................ 67
Product code lineup ................................ 338
Program counter (PC) ............................... 14
PWM operation....................................... 153
R
Interrupt response time ......................... 56
IRQ3 to IRQ0 interrupts....................... 53
NMI interrupt........................................ 53
WKP5 to WKP0 interrupts................... 53
Register field............................................. 28
Registers
ABRKCR...................... 60, 228, 232, 234
ABRKSR ...................... 61, 228, 232, 234
ADCR ......................... 222, 227, 231, 234
ADCSR....................... 221, 227, 231, 234
ADDRA ...................... 220, 227, 231, 234
ADDRB ...................... 220, 227, 231, 234
ADDRC ...................... 220, 227, 231, 234
ADDRD ...................... 220, 227, 231, 234
BARH ........................... 62, 228, 232, 234
BARL............................ 62, 228, 232, 234
BDRH ........................... 62, 228, 232, 234
BDRL............................ 62, 228, 232, 234
BRR ............................ 184, 227, 231, 234
EBR1............................. 81, 227, 231, 233
FENR............................ 81, 227, 231, 233
FLMCR1....................... 79, 227, 231, 233
FLMCR2....................... 80, 227, 231, 233
GRA............................ 147, 226, 230, 233
GRB............................ 147, 227, 230, 233
GRC............................ 147, 227, 231, 233
GRD............................ 147, 227, 231, 233
IEGR1........................... 47, 228, 232, 235
IEGR2........................... 48, 229, 232, 235
IENR1........................... 49, 229, 232, 235
IRR1.............................. 50, 229, 232, 235
IWPR ............................ 51, 229, 232, 235
LVDCR....................... 231, 226, 230, 233
LVDSR ....................... 232, 226, 230, 233
MSTCR1....................... 72, 229, 232, 235
MSTCR2....................... 72, 229, 232, 235
PCR1............................. 97, 228, 232, 235
PCR2........................... 100, 228, 232, 235
PCR5........................... 104, 228, 232, 235
L
Large current ports...................................... 2
Low-voltage detection circuit................. 229
LVDI ...................................................... 235
LVDI (interrupt by low voltage detect)
circuit...................................................... 235
LVDR..................................................... 234
LVDR (reset by low voltage detect)
circuit...................................................... 234
M
Memory map ............................................ 10
Module standby function.......................... 76
O
On-board programming modes................. 82
Operation field.......................................... 28
P
Package....................................................... 2
Package dimensions................................ 342
Pin arrangement.......................................... 4
Power-down modes .................................. 69
Sleep mode ........................................... 75
Standby mode....................................... 75
Subsleep mode...................................... 75
Power-on reset........................................ 229
Power-on reset circuit............................. 233
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 352 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
PCR7........................... 109, 228, 232, 235
PCR8........................... 112, 228, 232, 235
PDR1 ............................ 97, 228, 232, 234
PDR2 .......................... 101, 228, 232, 234
PDR5 .......................... 105, 228, 232, 234
PDR7 .......................... 109, 228, 232, 234
PDR8 .......................... 113, 228, 232, 235
PDRB.......................... 116, 228, 232, 235
PMR1............................ 96, 228, 232, 235
PMR5.......................... 103, 228, 232, 235
PUCR1.......................... 98, 228, 232, 234
PUCR5........................ 105, 228, 232, 234
RDR............................ 178, 227, 231, 234
RSR..................................................... 178
SCR3........................... 180, 227, 231, 234
SMCR......................... 191, 226, 230, 233
SMR............................ 179, 227, 231, 234
SSR............................. 182, 227, 231, 234
SYSCR1 ....................... 70, 228, 232, 235
SYSCR2 ....................... 71, 228, 232, 235
TCNT.......................... 147, 226, 230, 233
TCNTV....................... 119, 227, 231, 234
TCORA....................... 120, 227, 231, 234
TCORB....................... 120, 227, 231, 234
TCRV0 ....................... 121, 227, 231, 234
TCRV1 ....................... 125, 227, 231, 234
TCRW......................... 140, 226, 230, 233
TCSRV ....................... 123, 227, 231, 234
TCSRWD.................... 168, 227, 231, 234
TCWD ........................ 169, 227, 231, 234
TDR............................ 178, 227, 231, 234
TIERW ....................... 141, 226, 230, 233
TIOR0......................... 144, 226, 230, 233
TIOR1......................... 145, 226, 230, 233
TMRW........................ 139, 226, 230, 233
TMWD........................ 170, 228, 231, 234
TSR.....................................................178
TSRW ......................... 142, 226, 230, 233
S
Serial communication interface 3 (SCI3) 173
Asynchronous mode............................192
Bit rate.................................................184
Break...................................................215
Clocked synchronous mode ................200
Framing error ......................................196
Mark state ...........................................215
Multiprocessor communication
function...............................................207
Overrun error ......................................196
Parity error ..........................................196
Stack pointer (SP) .....................................13
System clocks ...........................................65
T
Timer V...................................................117
Timer W..................................................135
V
Vector address...........................................45
W
Watchdog timer.......................................167
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 353 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Rev. 4.00 Sep. 23, 2005 Page 354 of 354
REJ09B0025-0400
Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer
Hardware Manual
H8/36024 Group, H8/36014 Group
Publication Date: 1st Edition, Mar., 2001
Rev.4.00, Sep. 23, 2005
Published by:
Sales Strategic Planning Div.
Renesas Technology Corp.
Customer Support Department
Global Strategic Communication Div.
Renesas Solutions Corp.
Edited by:
2005. Renesas Technology Corp., All rights reserved. Printed in Japan.
Sales Strategic Planning Div. Nippon Bldg., 2-6-2, Ohte-machi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-0004, Japan
RENESAS SALES OFFICES
http://www.renesas.com
Refer to "http://www.renesas.com/en/network" for the latest and detailed information.
Renesas Technology America, Inc.
450 Holger Way, San Jose, CA 95134-1368, U.S.A
Tel: <1> (408) 382-7500, Fax: <1> (408) 382-7501
Renesas Technology Europe Limited
Dukes Meadow, Millboard Road, Bourne End, Buckinghamshire, SL8 5FH, United Kingdom
Tel: <44> (1628) 585-100, Fax: <44> (1628) 585-900
Renesas Technology Hong Kong Ltd.
7th Floor, North Tower, World Finance Centre, Harbour City, 1 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: <852> 2265-6688, Fax: <852> 2730-6071
Renesas Technology Taiwan Co., Ltd.
10th Floor, No.99, Fushing North Road, Taipei, Taiwan
Tel: <886> (2) 2715-2888, Fax: <886> (2) 2713-2999
Renesas Technology (Shanghai) Co., Ltd.
Unit2607 Ruijing Building, No.205 Maoming Road (S), Shanghai 200020, China
Tel: <86> (21) 6472-1001, Fax: <86> (21) 6415-2952
Renesas Technology Singapore Pte. Ltd.
1 Harbour Front Avenue, #06-10, Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632
Tel: <65> 6213-0200, Fax: <65> 6278-8001
Renesas Technology Korea Co., Ltd.
Kukje Center Bldg. 18th Fl., 191, 2-ka, Hangang-ro, Yongsan-ku, Seoul 140-702, Korea
Tel: <82> 2-796-3115, Fax: <82> 2-796-2145
Renesas Technology Malaysia Sdn. Bhd.
Unit 906, Block B, Menara Amcorp, Amcorp Trade Centre, No.18, Jalan Persiaran Barat, 46050 Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia
Tel: <603> 7955-9390, Fax: <603> 7955-9510
Colophon 3.0
H8/36024 Group, H8/36014 Group
Hardware Manual
相关型号：
HD64F36012FX
Microcontroller, 16-Bit, FLASH, H8/300H CPU, 20MHz, CMOS, PQFP48, 10 X 10 MM, 0.65 MM PITCH, LQFP-48
HITACHI
HD64F36012FXV
16-BIT, FLASH, 20MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP48, 10 X 10 MM, 0.65 MM PITCH, LQFP-48
RENESAS
HD64F36012FY
16-BIT, FLASH, 20MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP48, 7 X 7 MM, 0.50 MM PITCH, LQFP-48
RENESAS
HD64F36012FY
Microcontroller, 16-Bit, FLASH, H8/300H CPU, 20MHz, CMOS, PQFP48, 7 X 7 MM, 0.50 MM PITCH, LQFP-48
HITACHI
HD64F36012GFP
Microcontroller, 16-Bit, FLASH, H8/300H CPU, 20MHz, CMOS, PQFP64, 10 X 10 MM, 0.50 MM PITCH, LQFP-64
HITACHI
HD64F36012GFP
16-BIT, FLASH, 20MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP64, 10 X 10 MM, 0.65 MM PITCH, LQFP-64
RENESAS
HD64F36012GFPV
16-BIT, FLASH, 20MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP64, 10 X 10 MM, 0.65 MM PITCH, LQFP-64
RENESAS
©2020 ICPDF网 联系我们和版权申明